E REDD  CITY OF RED BLUFF 555 Washington Street, Red Bluff, California 96080 (530)527-2605; Fax (530) 529-6878 www.iyofredblutf.org  ORNIA  PLANNING COMMISSION AGENDA Tuesday, October 22, 2024 5:30 p.m. Regular Council Chambers, City Hall  Date of Meeting: Time of Meeting: Place of Meeting:  THIS HYBRID MEETING WILL BE CONDUCTED VIA TELECONFERENCE AND IN-PERSON  Live audio is available on the City's website at: https/redbluffca.ia2com/Ctizens/Defaultaspx  Please click this URL to join. Passcode: 154075 Orj join by phone: 16699006833 or*16694449171 Webinar ID: 89582946535 Passcode: 154075  ttps/us02web.z00m.US/8958295829465357PWdES7F1eC9gNWnEVmSOMXWMEFhIVmVHOT09  The City of Red Bluff welcomes you to their Planning Commission meetings, which are regularly scheduled for the fourth Tuesday of each month. Your participation and interest are encouraged and appreciated. Meeting notices are available in appropriate alternative formats, upon request of a person with a disability. Ifaccommodations are needed for individuals with disabilities, please contact the Deputy City Clerk's office  at (530)527-2605 72 hours prior to the day oft the meeting.  CALL1 TOORDER PLEDGE OF ALLEGIANCE  CONFLICT OF INTEREST DECLARATION  CITIZEN COMMENT  This time is set-aside for citizens to address the Planning Commission on any item of interest to the public that is within the subject matter jurisdiction of the Planning Commission. For items that are on the agenda, public comment will be heard when the item is discussed. If your comments concern an item that is noted as a public hearing, please address Planning Commission after the public hearing is opened for public testimony. The The Chairperson also may limit or prohibit multiple presentations by the same individual(s) on the same topic. Please understand that by law, the Planning Commission cannot make decisions on matters that are not on the  Chairperson reserves the right to limit each speaker to three (3) minutes.  agenda and matters of concern will be referred to the City Manager's Office.  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Employer* Agenda Pg. 1    APPROVAL OF DRAFT MINUTES  1. Planning Commission Regular - Sep 24, 2024 5:30 PM  REGULAR AGENDA  These items include significant financial and administrative actions of special interest that are usually approved individually by a majority vote. The Regular Agenda also includes noticed hearings and public hearings. The deadline for items to be placed on the City's agenda is 5:00 p.m. on the preceding  Tuesday, unless a holiday intervenes.  2.  Elevation Designs Review and Revised Tentative Map of the Victorian Villas  Subdivision Recommended Action: 1. Conduct a public hearing: subdivision being proposed.  a. Consider all testimony regarding the elevation designs.  b. Consider all testimony regarding the Revised Tentative Tract Map of the  2.Adopt Resolution No. 05-2024 recommending the City Council approve the changes to Tentative Tract Map 2023-01 with the Findings and Conditions of approval as shown.  3.  Design Review of an Expansion Project of U-Haul 1. Conduct a Public Hearing and consider all testimonies.  Recommended Action:  2. Review and adopt Resolution 06-2024 recommending the City Council approve the design review and elevations of a new 20,000 sqft warehouse facility located at 2950  Main Street. 4.  Use Permit UP-2024-03 Historic Chinatown Markers and Maintenance  Agreement Recommended Action:  1. Conduct Public Hearing and consider all testimonies. Use Permit and Maintenance Agreement to the City Council.  2. Consider and adopt Resolution 07-2024 recommending the approval of UP-2024-03  PLANNING COMMISSION COMMENTS UPDATES FROM STAFF  FUTURE AGENDA ITEMS BY CONSENSUS  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Employer* Agenda Pg. 2    ADJOURNMENT  This meeting is adjourned until the next regularly scheduled meeting. Regular Planning Commission meetings are scheduled on the fourth Tuesday of the month beginning at 5:30 p.m. in the City Council Chambers at 555 Washington Street, Red Bluff California. Agenda packets, minutes and audio are available on the City's website at ntpwww.redDumtrca.gm2.com Contact the Deputy City Clerk's office for assistance at  530)527-2805x3057.  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Employer* Agenda Pg. 3    1  RED  CITY OF RED BLUFF 555 Washington Street, Red] Bluff, California 96080 (530)527-2605; Fax (530) 529-6878 www.ctyoldblufiorg  ORNIA  PLANNING COMMISSION MINUTES Tuesday, September 24, 2024 Council Chambers, City Hall  Attendee Name Brian Quigley Greg Latourell Ron Johnson Steve Piffero Tyler Miranda STAFF PRESENT  Title Commissioner Commissioner Commissioner Commissioner Commissioner  Status Present Present Excused Present Present  Arrived 5:30 PM 5:30 PM 5:30 PM 5:30 PM 5:30 PM  Councilmember Pat Hurton City Manager Tom Westbrook  Community Development Director Beth Lindauer Deputy City Clerk and CM Assistant Anita Rice  PLEDGE OF ALLEGIANCE  Chairperson Latourell led the assembly in the pledge of allegiance.  CONFLICT OF INTEREST DECLARATION  Vice Chair Piffero recused himself from item #2.  CITIZEN COMMENT  There was no citizen comment. APPROVAL OF DRAFT MINUTES  September 24, 2024  Page 1of3  *The City of Red Bluffi is ank Equal Opportunity Employer*  Packet Pg. 4    1  1. RESULT: MOVER: AYES: ABSTAIN: EXCUSED: Johnson  Planning Commission - Regular - Aug 27, 2024 5:30 PM  ACCEPTED [2TOO 0] Tyler Miranda, Commissioner Latourell, Miranda Quigley, Piffero  SECONDER: Brian Quigley, Commissioner  REGULAR AGENDA  These items include significant financial and administrative actions of special interest that are usuall approved individually by a majority vote. The Regular Agenda also includes noticed hearings and public  hearings. The deadline for items to be placed on the City's agenda is 5:00  on the p.m.  5  preceding  Tuesday, unless a holiday intervenes.  2.  Variance No. 2024-01; 370 Brearcliffe Dr; Setback Adjustment and Retro- Vice Chair Steve Piffero recused himself from participating due to his home being in Community Development Director Beth Lindauer reviewed the staff report and  Permitting Request  close proximity to the subject property.  recommended that the Planning Commission take the following action:  1. 2.  Conduct a Public hearing and consider all testimonies and facts presented. Make a recommendation to the City Council on whether the variance qualifies by  way of the findings of facts. closed it at 5:40 PM.  Chairperson Latourell opened the public hearing at 5:40 PM and hearing no comment, Chairperson Latourell asked how close is the nearest structure on the other side of the fence to the subject structure. Also,does the variance carry over to future owners and Ms. Lindauer stated that the nearest structure on the other side of the fence is about 8 Commissioner Miranda stated that the Technical Advisory Committee (TAC) made good recommendations/conditions and it should be mandatory that the property owner Chairperson Latourell agreed that all the recommendations/conditions should be met City Manager Tom Westbrook explained that no work should be done until the City  was assured that it would.  to 10 feet away from the subject structure.  complete all of them.  and should be done before the next city council meeting. Council approves in case Council denies the Variance.  September 24, 2024  Page 2of3  *The City of Red Bluffi is ank Equal Opportunity Employer*  Packet Pg. 5    1  RESULT: MOVER: AYES: ABSTAIN: EXCUSED: Johnson PLANNING COMMISSION COMMENTS No comments were made.  APPROVED [3 TOO] Tyler Miranda, Commissioner Quigley, Latourell, Miranda  SECONDER: Brian Quigley, Commissioner  Piffero  UPDATES FROM STAFF  Community Development Beth Lindauer reported that the new construction for Wendy's isv well under way. We've gained approval from City Council for abatement at the dilapidated 527 Johnson Street residence. There have been some new businesses opening: Bab's Bath, an upholstering shop, as well as 2 new single family dwellings. Code enforcement has been busy and staff has completed the draft EIR for the General Plan Update and it is available for public review for 45 days.  FUTURE AGENDA ITEMS BY CONSENSUS  The Commission requested no future agenda items.  ADJOURNMENT  Chairperson Latourell adjourned the meeting at 5:49 pm  September 24, 2024  Page 3of3  *The City of Red Bluffi is ank Equal Opportunity Employer*  Packet Pg. 6    2  AGENDA REPORT  B  ORNIA:  TO: FROM:  Honorable Members of the Planning Commission Beth Lindauer, Community Development Director  SUBJECT: Elevation Designs Review and Revised Tentative Map of the  Victorian Villas Subdivision  RECOMMENDED COUNCIL ACTION: 1. Conduct a public hearing: subdivision being proposed.  a. Consider all testimony regarding the elevation designs.  b. Consider all testimony regarding the Revised Tentative Tract Map of the  2.Adopt Resolution No. 05-2024 recommending the City Council approve the changes to Tentative Tract Map 2023-01 with the Findings and Conditions of approval as shown. The applicant proposed and received approval by way of Resolution for ai tentative subdivision map to develop three parcels totaling 16.2 acres into 61 single-family lots (APN: 035-022-020, 035-022-021, 035-510-015) in December 2023 (Attachment A). Through additional design work, the property and home designs have allowed for an extra lot, making the new subdivision a 62-lot development (Attachment B), thus  PROJECT DESCRIPTION  requiring an amendment to the Subdivision Map.  DISCUSSION  Along with the request for consideration and approval of the revised Tentative Tract Map (TTM 2023-01), Raghu Malladi, the applicant, has submitted the preliminary Design Packet for the manufactured homes intended for the Victorian Villas As part of the RBMC's Planned Development Use Permit process, the Planning Commission, City Council, and the Public shall review and consider the designs of the new development to ensure the project meets the city's functional, aesthetically pleasing, and harmonious living and working environments and goals.  development.  The applicant has carefully selected a team to craft home designs replicating traditional site-built homes with characteristics that meet the quality and integrity expected ofa  single-family subdivision (Attachment C).  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*  Packet Pg. 7    2  While the site plan, floor plans, and elevations have been included, the renderings provided ini this report are intended for informational purposes only, and approval is not reqgured(Altachments D-G). The Planning Commission's hearing and examination are intended to provide feedback to the developer and his team for their future submission  of the Planned Development Use Permit Packet.  GENERAL PLAN  These parcels have a General Plan designation of R-L-Residential Low-Density. If the stafl-recommended Mitigation Measures and Conditions are approved, this project will  be consistent with all elements of the General Plan.  ZONING  The site is within an R-1 (Single-Family Residential) Zoning District. Before issuing Building Permits, staff will verify that future development complies with use, setbacks, parking, and other zoning standards. As noted above, the applicant will be required to receive approval of a Planned Development Use Permit before the construction of any  homes on these lots. CEQA  Ina accordance with the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA), an Initial Study and Mitigated Negative Declaration was prepared for the TTM in 2010. At that time, the Mitigated Negative Declaration (MND) was distributed to responsible and trustee agencies. When the MND was routed in 2010, no comments were received from responsible agencies that identified significant impacts of the project. The proposed conditions of approval include all of the previous conditions for the TTM.  STAFF ANALYSIS  The Technical Advisory Committee (TAC) reviewed the applicant's request and advised the Planning Commission to consider and recommend to the City Council that Tentative Tract Map TTM-2023-01 be approved with conditions outlined in Resolution 05-2024.  ATTACHMENTS:  A. Attachment A - Originally Approved Site Plan Map (61-lots) B. Attachment B - Site Plan_ REVISED 06.18.24 C.A Attachment C-V Victorian Villas Straight Plans Renderings D.A Attachment D Site_ Plan_ with_ Setbacks_- Color(1] F.A Attachment F- Exterior_ Color_(Body,_Trim_&Accent)  E.A Attachment E - Floor Plans G.A Attachment G-  HUD.appoved.aser_cando.pam.ron_Roole)  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*  Packet Pg. 8    2.a  AGENDA REPORT  RED  Meeting Date: December 19, 2023 Agenda Item #7 City Manager Approval: TW  Adopted (Approved By Red BluffCity Council AM Initial" Deputy City Clerk City of Red Bluff 5:00  12:19:23 Date  ORNIA  TO: FROM:  Honorable Mayor and Members of the City Council Beth Lindauer, Community Development Director  SUBJECT: Tentative Tract Map 2023-01, 2001 S. Jackson Street, Victorian Villas Public Hearing to consider; Tentative Tract Map 2023-1; Mitigated Negative Declaration; Adopt Resolution No. 37-2023; 61 Lot single family subdivision at South Jackson Street;  RECOMMENDED COUNCIL ACTION:  Magnolia Capital Group, LLC Applicant/Owner)  PUBLIC HEARING  This is a public hearing. Notices have been posted in the Red Bluff Daily News and mailed to surrounding property owners located within 300 feet of the project.  SUMMARY  The applicant proposes a tentative subdivision map to develop three parcels totaling 16.2 acres into 61 single-family lots (APN: 035-022-020, 035-022-021, 035-510-015). See the Vicinity Map as Attachment "A." All lots proposed do not conform to the Lot Standards in the RBCC Section 25.53 of 6,000 sq. ft. for an interior lot and 7,000 sq. ft. for a corner lot and will require a Planned Development Use Permit. All lots will have street frontage and access, as required ini the City of Red Bluff Land Division Standards, and with the exception of the lot sizes, will meet other requirements of the Zoning Code. See the attached Reduced Tentative Tract Map TTM 2023-01 marked Attachment "B."  PREVIOUS COUNCIL AND PLANNING COMMISSION ACTION  The applicant had previously submitted and received approval (Attachment "C") for a tentative tract map known as TTM 07-1000 (formally APN: 035-510-15, 035-020-22, 035-020-035) on June 15, 2010. By virtue of State legislature action AB208 section 66452.23 (a), AB116 section 66452.24 (a), and AB1303 section 66452.25 (a), this project received extensions voiding the original expiration date of June 15, 2012, On May 22, 2018, the applicant applied for and received by the action of the planning commission a one-year extension of time for TTM 07-1000 under RBMC 20.4(G)(2),  changing it to June 15, 2018.  granting a new expiration date of June 15, 2019.  Packet Pg. 9  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*    2.a  On May 28, 2019, the applicant requested and received approval for a two-year extension under RCMC 20.4(G)(2) amendment, updating the expiration date to June 15, On May 20, 2021, the City of Red Bluff granted a final extension for Tentative Tract Map TTM 07-1000 pursuant to AB 1561, revising the expiration date to December 15, 2022. Since the extended Tentative Tract Map was never finalized, the map expired, and for a subdivision to be considered, a new TTM was required to be filed with and approved by  2021, by the planning commission's action.  the City. DISCUSSION  On November 6, 2023, the City of Red Bluff received an application (TTM 2023-01) with updated and revised development plans for the previously expired TTM 07-100 project. Its should be noted that the original map (Attachment "D") approved in 2010 also had smaller lot sizes and required the approval of a Planned Development Use Permit. That subdivision included 65 lots, and the proposed subdivision includes 61. Further, the extent of the proposed subdivision is the same as what was originally approved by the Planning Commission and City Council in 2010. The only difference is the reduction of four lots. As a result, the original conditions of approval for the TTM have been carried  forward and included for consideration with the. proposed map.  GENERAL PLAN  These parcels have a General Plan designation of R-L - Residential Low-Density designation. This project will be consistent with all elements of the General Plan if the Mitigation Measures and Conditions recommended by staff are approved.  ZONING  The site is within an R-1 (Single-Family Residential) Zoning District. Before issuing Building Permits, staff will verify that future development complies with use, setbacks, parking, and other zoning standards. As noted above, due to the smaller lot sizes, the applicant will be required to receive approval of a Planned Development Use Permit before constructing any homes on these lots. With the approval of a Planned  Development Use Permit  CEQA  Ina accordance with the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA), an Initial Study (Attachment "E" and Attachment "F") Mitigated Negative Declaration Notice of Determination (Attachment "G"), a Wetland study (Attachment "H"), and an Air Quality Greenhouse Gases Traffic Study (Attachment "!") were prepared for the TTM in_2 2010. At that time, the Mitigated Negative Declaration (MND) was distributed to responsible and trustee agencies. When the MND was routed in 2010, no comments were received from responsible agencies that identified significant impacts of the project. The proposed conditions of approval include all of the previous conditions for the TTM and all Mitigation Measures recommended by staff (Attachment "J") as  indicated in the MND. CITY FISCAL IMPACT No anticipated fiscal impact.  Packet Pg. 10  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*    2.a  FINDINGS AND CONDITIONS  Staff recommends the adoption of certain findings and the application of certain  conditions in the attached Resolution No. XX. PLANNING COMMISSION RECOMMENDATION  The Planning Commission considered Tentative Tract Map 2023-01 and held a public hearing on Tuesday, November 28, 2023. The staff gave a presentation and responded to questions related to the project. The public hearing was opened, and no comments  were heard in opposition. 1. Conduct the Public Hearing. submitted to the Commission.  2. Consider all public testimony and all other information relating to this project 3. Adopt Resolution No. XXX to approve the Mitigated Negative Declaration and Tentative Tract Map 2023-01 with the Findings and Conditions of approval shown in  Resolution No. XXX. ATTACHMENTS:  A. Attachment A - Vicinity Map B. Attachment B - Tentative Map_Sub1 11-20-23 C. Attachment C - Original CC Resolution D.A Attachment D - Original Map 2010 E.A Attachment E - TTM 07-1000 Initial Study F.A Attachment F- TTM 07-1000 ERRATAADDENDUM Initial Study G.A Attachment G - Original Notice of Determination H. Attachment H - Original Wetland Study Report Final A Attachment I- Original Air Quality Greenhouse Gases Traffic Initial Study J. Attachment J- Summary of Mitigation Measures TTM 2023-01  Packet Pg. 11  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*    2.a  CITY COUNCIL RESOLUTION NO. 37-2023  TENTATIVE TRACT MAP 2023-01, 2001 S. JACKSON STREET, VICTORIAN VILLAS WHEREAS, the Planning Commission previously found that the original project Tentative Tract Map No. 07-1000 was approved by City Council Resolution No. 22-2010 WHEREAS, the City of Red Bluff, California did complete the necessary studies WHEREAS, the City Council has found that Tentative Tract Map No. 2023-01 does NOW THEREFORE BE IT RESOLVED, that Tentative Tract Map No. 2023-01 is  on June 15, 2010, but expired on December 15, 2022, and;  thereon, as provided by law, and;  generally conform to the Zoning Code and the Building Code. approved with the following Findings and Conditions:  Findings: If the conditions listed below are imposed, implemented and monitored: 1. All significant impacts identified in the Initial Study will be mitigated.  2. None of the conditions listed in CEQA Guidelines Sections 15065 (a) through (d) 3. The Mitigated Negative Declaration will conform to CEQA and its Guidelines. 4. None of the conditions listed in Government Code Sections 66474 (a) through (g) 5. This project will conform to the City's General Plan, Zoning Regulations, Land Division Standards, other local regulations, standards, and policies, and the  will exist with regard to this project.  will exist with regard to this project.  Subdivision Map Act.  Conditions: The following conditions shall apply to this project:  1. MITIGATION MEASURES. The pplcanowneldeveoper shall comply with the mitigation measures in the document titled "Summary of Mitigation Measures Tentative Tract Map 2023-01 (formally TTM07-1000) So. Jacksons St. Red Bluff CA" as included in the June 10, 2008, Initial Study and Mitigated Negative Declaration. 2. FLAG LOT CONDITIONS. Lots 30,31 and 32 shall share a 40-foot wide paved (asphalt) drive-way/road that starts at the curb/gutter on Proposed Road A and continues to the existing House on lot 31 and the proposed house on lot 32, which shall include 20 feet from Lot 30 and 20 feet from Lot 32; a reciprocal drainage and access easement shall be recorded prior to building permit issuance that includes all rights for lots 30,31, &32. The existing house on lot 31 shall be retrofitted with a Fire DepartmentaPproved fire sprinkler system in the home, and a Fire Department- approved fire sprinkler system for the proposed structure on lot 32 shall be installed  prior to finaling of the building permit.  Packet Pg. 12  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*    2.a  3. PROJECT CONFORMANCE. All construction, improvements, and operations shall be constructed, completed, maintained, and operated in substantial conformance with the plans, information, and documents reviewed by the Planning Commission and recommended for approval to the City Council on November 28, 2023, unless otherwise notified herein. The Planning Department or other appropriate City Department may approve minor modifications to the project and/or these conditions. 4. DEVELOPMENT IMPACT FEES. Appicant/developer shall pay the required City of Red Bluff Development Impact Fees in effect at the time of Building Permit issuance. 5. GRADING AND DRAINAGE. Detailed grading and drainage plans shall be included as part of the improvement plans that shall be submitted for review and approval by the Building, Planning, and Public Works Departments prior to issuance of a Grading Permit. If required, Drainage and/or Drainage Easement shall be designed by the applicantDeveloper and approved by the Public Works Director prior to Final Map 6. DRAINAGE CONDITIONIS) A. Storm drain lines shall be sized to accommodate the ultimate build-out of upstream development in accordance with the requirements of the Public Works Department. A hydrology analysis of the pre verse post- construction 50 yr. storm event shall be required for an on-site oelow-ground retention/detention, which shall be included as part of the subdivisions improvement plans and shall be supported and approved by the Public Works Director as part of 7. DRAINAGE CONDITIONIS) B. Prior to approval of the improvement plan, the developer shall submit drainage plans and a hydrology analysis to the Department of Public Works for review and approval. The plans and calculations approved by the Public Works Department will define the size and depth location of the public storm drainage system within the project site to its discharge point on So. Jackson St. 8. DRAINAGE CONDITION(S) C. Drainage systems shall be designed and installed sO that runoff collected from roof drains and other improvements is conveyed to the street without crossing neighboring private property. No lot-to-lot drainage shall be 9. DRAINAGE CONDITIONS(S) D. The project shall follow all requirements set forth in California's NPDES permit for stormwater discharges for small MS4s. 10. WATER AND SEWER. Water and Sewer lines shall be sized to accommodate the ultimate build-out of upstream development in accordance with the requirements of the Public Works Department. Therefore, the plans and calculations approved by the Public Works Department will define the size and depth location of the public sewer and water systems within the project site to their connection points on So. Jackson 11. PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS. Prior to commencing construction of site improvements, the developer and contractor shall attend a pre-construction meeting with the Planning Department, Building Department, and Public Works Department staff. Prior to commencing development on the subdivision lots, the developer and contractor shall attend a pre-construction meeting with Planning Department and  approval and Recording.  the improvement plans for each phase.  allowed.  St.  Building Department staff.  Packet Pg. 13  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*    2.a  12.100% IMPROVEMENT COMPLETION. All required on and off-site Project improvements (including but not limited to buildings, driveway, landscaping, public street improvements, utilities, etc.) shall be completed 100% and to the satisfaction of the Planning Department prior to Site Final and/or Building Occupancy. If 100% improvement completion can not be achieved prior to Site Final and/or Building Occupancy, the City may consider the deposit of a cash security, bond or other form of security deemed acceptable to the City, in an amount to Cover 150% of the 13. Lot 32 ACCESS. Lot 32 shall access the lot from the 40-foot road/driveway as 14. MASONRY SOUND WALL. The rear yard of lot 30 along So. Jacksons St. shall include a masonry wall built to 6 feet tall from the grade of the sidewalk on So. Jackson St. along the rear property line shall be split face block or better. The final design and materials of the masonry wall shall be submitted to the Planning Department for review and approval prior to issuance of a Building Permit. A new solid overlapping panel(s) 6-foot fence along the So. Jackson Side, yard of lot 31 (existing house), shall be constructed along the length of the property and painted to 15. STREET CLEANING. During grading and construction activities, all streets adjacent to this site shall be kept clean and free of dirt and debris. Street cleaning shall occur daily unless determined to be needed more frequently or less frequently 16. CONSTRUCTION. All future construction and improvement on the new lots shall be done in accordance with the City of Red Bluff Standards and specifications in effect at the time of Building Permit issuance. The owner/developer shall adhere to City 17. BUILDING PERMITS. Prior to any construction or grading, the applicant or future property owner shall apply for and obtain all necessary Building and/or Grading Permits from the City of Red Bluff. All building permits shall conform to the latest 18. CONSTRUCTION HOURS. Construction activities shall be limited to the hours of 7AM to 7PM during weekdays and 9AM to 6PM during weekends and holidays. These hours may be restricted by City staff if complaints relating to noise before or after these hours are received from individuals residing in the vicinity of the 19. CURRENT STANDARDS AND POLICIES. Unless exceptions are granted in writing by the City, the Subdivision will be designed and constructed to conform to the standards that are in effect at the time the Improvement Plans are submitted to the City. Unless exceptions are granted in writing by the City, development within the subdivision shall conform to the standards that are in effect at the time the 20. IMPROVEMENT PLANS. Prior to the issuance of a grading permit, the applicantdeveloper shall submit improvement plans to the Building Department, Planning Department, and Public Works for review and approval. All subdivision  estimated cost of the outstanding improvement(s).  required in Condition No.2  match (grey) the masonry walls on each side.  by the City.  approved plans and conditions.  edition of the California Building Code.  construction site.  development plans are submitted to the City.  Packet Pg. 14  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*    2.a  improvement plans and proposed infrastructure shall comply with the City of Red Bluff Land Division Standards. These improvements shall be constructed to City standards prior to recording the final map unless otherwise approved by the Public Works Department, and a bond of 150% of the accepted engineer's estimate is 21. UTILITY UNDERGROUND. All existing above-ground utilities along So. Jackson St. and this project's frontage, along with all new utilities on and off-site required by the project andlor required as part of a street improvement for the project, shall be undergrounded. For continuity and within the nexus of the project proposal, this shall include the existing joint pole to the south of the property located on the east 22. UTILITY CONNECTION APPROVAL. The City shall not approve gas and electric utilities serving structures on each lot until development on that lot complies with all 23. AIR POLLUTION CONTROL. Only U.S. EPA Phase II certified wood Burning devices are to be installed in the residences as necessary. The total emission potential from the residence shall not exceed 7.5 grams per hour from wood-burning 24. UTILITY SCREENING. All mechanical equipment, utility meters, transformers, irrigation control boxes, backflow devices, valves, etc., shall be screened by the buildings, fencing, and or vaults and shall be painted out and landscaped in a 25. PLANTER STRIP RRIGATION/LANDSCAPING. The planter strips between the curb and the sidewalk shall be regarded as within the front yard and/or street side yard of each lot and shall be landscaped with water-efficient landscaping, and shade trees every 30 feet on center; the lands shall be mowed, maintained and irrigated sO as not to constitute a nuisance per the City code. Removing the planter strip is acceptable with the installation of a contiguous sidewalk and a minimum of two trees (minimum of 15 gallons) planted within each yard in lieu of street trees planted every 26. LAND CLEARING PERMIT. No open burning shall occur on this property unless a land clearing permit is obtained from the Tehama County Air Pollution Control 27. Lot 30 RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURE. The grading plan indicates no additional fill or cuts on lots 30 or 31. Therefore, as lot 31 will be occupied by an existing residence, lot 30 shall be developed with a custom stem wall foundation placement that will allow for the terrain offset and custom emergency access hammerhead. When the phase one grading Plan is submitted, the applicantowner/developer may further address and refine the lots topographic and functioning issues as approved by City 28. YARD FENCING. All Residential lots shall be screened from public and private view by a 6-foot wood fence; the fencing shall start at the face of the house in the front yard and continue parallel with the street to the side property lines, then run along the side property lines to the rear property line and connect in the middle of  made.  side of So. Jackson street.  approved plans and all conditions imposed by the City.  devices.  manner which reflects the building design and setback requirements.  30 feet.  District.  staff.  Packet Pg. 15  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*    2.a  the rear property line screening all side yards and rear yard. All open space along So. Jackson St. and Proposed Road B shall be fenced with a wrought Iron fence. 29. FRONT AND STREET SIDE YARD LANDSCAPING. All front and street-side yard landscaping shall conform to the Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance of the 30. The Ownerlapplicantdeveloper will defend, indemnify, and hold harmless The City of Red Bluff, including the City Council and its officers, agents, and employees, from any claim, action, or proceeding to attack, set aside, void, or annul any approval made by the City, including the City Council, or its officers, agents, or employees, regarding the development project known as TTM 2023-01. The OMnetAplcanudeveloper shall be responsible for all attorney's fees and costs associated with such defense and indemnification, and specifically, shall upon written request of the City, pay or, at the City option, reimburse the City for all costs for preparation of an administrative record required for any such action, including the costs of transcription, City staff time, and duplication. The City shall retain the right to elect to appear in and defend any such action on its own behalf regardless of any tender under this provision; the applicant shall be responsible for all such defense costs, including attorney's fees, incurred by the City. This indemnification obligation isi intended to include, but not be limited to, actions brought by third parties to invalidate any determination made by the City under the California Environmental Quality Act (Public Resources Code Section 21000 et seq.) for the Project or any decisions made by the City relating to the approval of the Project. Upon request of the city, the applicantowner/developer shall execute an agreement in a form approved by the City Attorney incorporating the provisions of this condition. 31. The Storm Drain system shall be included in the proposed Improvement Plans for each construction phase. Phase one Improvement Plans shall include and show the delineation of the Storm Drain line to the eastern point of Lots 24 and 41 with drop inlets on each side of the street. Phase two Improvement Plans shall show the extension of the storm drain line in the Snow Mountain Way Right of Way east to the end of lots 11&51. Phase three Improvement Plans shall include and show the rest of the storm drain line extended from the eastern point of Lots 24 and 45 continuing in the Proposed Road A right of Way, then into the Snow Mountain Way Right of 32. Water and Sewer lines shall be included in the proposed Improvement Plans for each construction phase. Phase one Improvement Plans shall include and show the delineation of the Water and Sewer lines to the eastern point of Lots 24 and 41 with aB Blow-off for water (Per City Standard). Phase 2 Improvement Plans shall show the extension of the water and sewer lines in the Snow Mountain Way right of Way East to the end of Lots 11 and 51. Phase three Improvement Plans shall include and show the rest of the water and sewer lines extending from the eastern point of Lots 24 and 41 continuing in the Proposed Road A Right of Way, running until the middle point of lots 1 and 51 (Water shall continue and connect the loop to the existing 33. Secondary and Emergency Service Accessibility shall be included as part of the Improvement Plans for each construction phase. Phase one Improvement Plans shall include and show the delineation of all roads and utilities along with the 20 ft. wide all-weather surfaced secondary access as constructed from the end of Phase  State of California.  Way running until the eastern point of Lots 11 &55.  water line in Snow Mountain Way).  Packet Pg. 16  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*    2.a  One between lots 24 and 41 running south thru proposed lots 42 and 57 continuing into the proposed Snow Mountain Way Right of Way and connecting to the existing paved portion of Snow Mountain Way. Phase two Improvement Plans shall include and show all roads and utilities along with the extension of Snow Mountain Way to the end of phase two between lots 51 and 11 with an approved Fire Department Turn around that is all weather surfaced. Finally, the Phase 3 improvement Plans shall show all roads and utilities along with the rest of Proposed Roads A and the extension of Snow Mountain Way. The Improvement Plans for each phase shall include grading Plans, utility profiles, etc., and all other information related to the project and the submittal requirements as required by the project conditions and/or Red Bluff City Standards/Policies Land & Engineer Standards. Lot 57 in Phase Two and Lot 42 in Phase Three shall not be developed with a residence or the secondary access road altered unit. Phase Three builds out proposed Road A and that portion of Snow Mountain Way extension that would finish the circulation and complete the thru access from So. Jackson St., which then connects back to So. Jackson St. 34. The proposal is for 61 single-family homes and a remainder of open space on approximately 16.2 acres, approximately 4,000 feet east of the Red Bluff Municipal Airport Runway, within the Referral Area Boundary and, therefore, any person who intends to offer subdivided lands, common interest development and residential properties for lease or sale within the airport influence area is required to disclose that fact to the person buying the property. As a condition of the map, any person who intends to offer subdivided lands, common interest development, and residential properties for lease or sale within the airport influence, which includes TTM 2023-01, shall do SO according to the Business and Professions Code Section 11010 and Civil code Sections 1102.6,1103.4, and 1353, prior to leasing and/or selling any lot in this 35. South Jackson St. Improvements shall continue north consistent with the current alignment and improvement requirements of TTM 2023-01, a reference that shall include the development along the east side of the So Jackson Roadway with a 33.5-foot section from the center line of the road which is 55 ft. curb face to curb face with the 5-foot side walk adjacent to the curb. Between the curb and the yards along So. Jackson Landscaping shall conform to the Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance of the State of California. This area shall be regarded as part of lots 34 and 35 and maintained as part of the property SO as not to constitute a 36.LANDSCAPE AND LIGHTING DISTRICT. Prior to the recordation of the Final Map for any phase, the developer shall establish a landscape and lighting district or other equivalent fund-collecting organization approved by the City of Red Bluff to fund the operation and/or continued maintenance of street lighting, landscape strips in the public right-of-way (if elected), stormwater collection and detention facilities, and any remaining portions of the property that will not be developed. The project engineer shall prepare an estimate of the annual maintenance costs for these facilities that  proposed subdivision.  nuisance.  shall be made part of the District formation procedure.  NOW THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED, ON DECEMBER 19, 2023, BY THE CITY  COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF RED BLUFF:  Packet Pg. 17  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*    2.a  RESULT: MOVER: AYES:  ADOPTED [UNANIMOUS] Patrick Hurton, Councilmember Strock, Hurton, Gonzales, Deiters, Parker  SECONDER: Cody Strock, Councilmember  PhL Clay Parker, Mayor  ATTEST:  Anita Rice, Deputy dRe  Clerk City  Packet Pg. 18  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*    HATCHLEGEND (E)CONCRETE (N)CONCREIE (E)PAVEMENT (N)PAVEMENT (3"H HMA OVER8" "AB) LAWN/IANDSCAPE AREA DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE WETLAND- VERNAL SWALE WETLAND- VERNAL POOL SEESHEET G2FOR RGENERALI NOTES  VACANTLAND  DETENTION BASIN/ BIORETENTION  REMAII  ORTHKEYSTONE SHEETC98S1  REMAINDER  355  ROPOSED ROADB  AVEDFLAGLOT  STA22+95.35 19 STA23-45.35 33 STA23+95.35 A24+37.99  6 3  SNOW MOUNTAIN WY  ROADB  SEESH  REVISIONS  VICTORIAN VILLASS SUBDIVISION SOUTHJ JACKSONS STREET, REDB BLUFF,CA OVERALL SITE PLAN  SHEET C3 PG50F23 Pack 19  ERAHON  PACE ENGINEERING  100% CD'S    NOTES  HATCHLEGEND (E)CONCRETE (N)CONCRETE (E)PAVEMENT (N)PAVEMENT HMA AREA DETECTABLEV SURFACE WETLAND- VERNAL POOL  POINT TABLE NORTHING EASTING DESCRIPTION  ARES SOMMTOMEFACEOFCURR SITE CONCRETES SHALLE BE CLASS 520-C-2500W WITH4"N MAXIMUMS SLUMP, UNLESS  STANDARDS (WHERE SHOWN), SIATEOFCALFORNA DEPARIMENTOF IONSFORP WORKS CONSTRUCTION (GREEN BOOK), ANDTHESOILS CALL USA 800- -227-2600) TOLOCATEA ALL UTILITIES HOURS PRIORTOANY THE CONTR SHALL OBTAIN ANENCROACH STRUCTURAL TRAFFICI 5.5BASEDO ONCIYOF REDBLUFFE ENGINEERING DESIGN STANDARDS, TABLE3-1. ANY CHANGENIHESEPIANS, ARETORECEIVE APPROVAL OFOWNER ENGINEERING, INC.  JULY31,  OT MIX  CONFORMT TOTHE REQUIREMENTS OF THE STATEOF STANDARDS SIZE AGGREGATE. BINDER SHALLE BEPG EBASEPERS ASMEASUREDBYA STATE SPECIFICATIONS, RELOCATEDT TIMBERE BARRICADES ARET TOHAVET TYPEN2( (RED) REFLECTORS. SHALLE BEABATEDPRIORT TOTHENEXT FIRE SEASON. HYDROSEED ALL CUTA ANDFILL AREAS THAT TARENOTSURFACED WITH ASPHALTOR  COMPACTT ALL  THICKNESS WERE DETERMINEDU DESIGNMANUAL CALCULATIONS AREE BASED  SOUTH JACKSON STREET  OFF-SITEI IMPROVEMENTPLAN  SECTION  REVISIONS  JACKSONMEADOWS SUBDIVISION OFF-SITEI OFF-SITEI IMPROVEMENT PLAN  SHEET C1 PG20F9  ERAHON  PACE ENGINEERING  100% CD'S    2.c  VICTORIAN VILLAS - ELEVATIONS  Packet Pg. 21    2.c  PLAN-1A  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 22    2.c  PLAN-1B  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 23    2.c  L -  -E  PLAN-1C  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 24    2.c  PLAN-2  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 25    2.c  PLAN-3  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 26    2.c  PLAN-4  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 27    2.c  PLAN-5A  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 28    2.c  PLAN-5B  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 29    2.c  PLAN-6  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 30    2.c  PLAN-7  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 31    2.c  PLAN-8A  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 32    2.c  1  PLAN-8B  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 33    2.c  PLAN-8C  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 34    2.c  PLAN-8D  ELEVATION  Packet Pg. 35    Existing structure  VICTORIAN VILLAS SUB-DIVISION  MODEL PLAN-01 PLAN-02 PLAN-03 PLAN-04  PLAN-07 PLAN-08  SHEET TITLE: SITEPLAN-COLOURI WITH SETBACKS PROPOSEDI PROJECT SUBDIVISION MANUFACTURED HOUSE(HUD)  BUILD DERS/DEVELOPERS: LANDI 423RILEY CT, TRACY, CA-95377 1001 Direct: Fax: 510-319-7443 rmalladi@paradis lopers Web: www. pmadwalnateeiepena.om  VICTORIAN VILLAS Office:    PLAN PLAN-01A (4 BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1958 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 02 LOT NUMBERS 01,31  66'-0"x291-8" 77 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  66'-0"  Bath  Utility  Bedroom #4  Bedroom #1  Living Room 19-9"x1  Bath1  Dining! Room  Bedroom#2  Bedroom# #3  chen:  PLAN-01A FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 01 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 37  VV-3066-4A Plan 1A 4Bed]2 Bath] 11,958 Sq. Ft.    PLAN PLAN-01A(4BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1958 Sq,ft LOTI NUMBERS 01,31  PLAN-01A - ELEVATIONS  E  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  12  PAGALEROE EVELE  EEESEEIEESEE  #SPORCHLEVEL  FRONT ELEVATION  REARI ELEVATION  PLAN-01A ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 02 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 38  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-01A (MIRRORED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1958 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  (4BED) 29'-8-"x66'-0" 77 Sq.ft  33  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  Kitchen-  Bedroom# #2 12-0-4119"  Bedroom! #3  Dining Room 14-6x14-4-  Bath1  Living Room  Bedroom! #4  6'-0"  PLAN-01A FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 03 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 39  VV-3066-4A Plan 1A(M) 4Bad28a138SAF    PLAN PLAN-01A-A -MIRRORED (4E BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1958 Sq,ft LOTNUMBER 33  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  HSEHESIEEBEEE3  FRONT ELEVATION PLAN-01A MIRRORERARELEMATIONS  PLAN-01A MIRRORED ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 04 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 40  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN: PLAN-01B (4 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1958 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  66'-0"x291-8" 78 Sq.ft  15  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  (Site-E -Built Garage)  (Site-Buit Porch)  Bath  Bedroom  Bedroom! #1  Living Room 19:9x144- lope  Bath  Dining Room  Bedroom# #2  Bedroom #3  chen  PLAN-01B FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 05 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 41  VV-3066-4B Plan 1B 4Bed/2Bath) 11,958Sq.FL.    PLAN PLAN-01B(4BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1958 Sq,ft LOTNUMBER 15  PLANOIB-ELEVATONS  PRGACEROS  EEEEE  FRONT ELEVATION  PAGATEROCF POFCALEVEE  E  RIGHT-S SIDE ELEVATION  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-01B ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 06 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 42  REAR ELEVATION    PLAN FLAN-OIB-MIRRORED (4BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE 66-0"x291-8" LIVABLE AREA 1958 Sq.ft PORCH 78Sq,.ft GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 02 LOT NUMBERS 14,20  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  6'-0"  chen  Bedroom! #2  Bedroom #3 12-0"x1149-  Dining Room  Bath1  Bedroom  Living Room  Bedroom #4  (Site-Built Porch) 96"X  (Site-Built Garage)  PLAN-01B MIRRORED FLOORI PLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 07 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 43  VV-3066-4B Plan 1B(M) 4Bed/2Bath/1,958: Sq.Ft.    PLAN PLAN-01B- MIRRORED (4E BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1958 Sq,ft LOTI NUMBERS 14,20  PLAN-01B (MIRRORED) -ELEVATIONS  PITCMLEVEE RAEBOTTONL  FRONT ELEVATION  e -  PICALEVEL  12s  LEFT-SIDEE  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  RPPEPTCN LEV PACAGEVCOE EVELE  PLAN-01B MIRRORED ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 08 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 44  RAI5L  REAR ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-01C (4 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1958 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  66'-0"x291-8" 81 Sq.ft  27  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  (Site-Built Garage)  Utility  Bedroom #4  Bath  Bedroom #1  Living Room  Bath1  Dining Room 14:6'x144  Bedroom #2  Bedroom# #3  Kitchen  PLAN-01C FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 09 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 45  66'-0"  VV-3066-4C Plan 1C 4Bed/2Bath) 11,958 Sq. Ft.    PLAN PLAN-01C/(4BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1958 Sq,ft LOTI NUMBER 27  PLAN-01C- ELEVATIONS  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  12  opes  E  FEEFE  FRONT ELEVATION  REAR ELEVATION  LEVEL  PLAN-01C ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 10 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 46  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-02 (3 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1587 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 05 LOT NUMBERS 02,16,18,34,37  60'-0"x291-8" 89 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  47'-0"  DD Bath  (Site-Built Garage)  Dining Room Utility: 1-2-x10-10  Bedroom#1 12-40-X12-4  Bath #2 Bedroom# #3  Living Room  Kitchen  PLAN-02 FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 11 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 47  60'-0"  VV-3060-3A Plan 2 3Bed]2E Bath/1,5875 Sq. Ft.    PLAN : PLAN-02(4BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY: SERIES AREA 1587 Sq.ft LOTN NUMBERS 02,16,18,34,37  PLAN-02-E ELEVATIONS  RIGHT SIDE ELEVATION  iopers  FRONT ELEVATION  REARE ELEVATION  PLAN-02 ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 12 OF44SHEETS Packet Pg. 48  LEFTSIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-02 MIRRORED (3 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1587 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 05 LOT NUMBERS 17,19,24,35,37  60'-0"x291-8" 89 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  60'-0"  Kitchen  #2 11:0"x11g  Bedroom #3 Bath 11--x119-  Living Room  Bedroom#1  Dining Room  Bath  (Site- -Built Garage)  47'-0"  PLAN-02 MIRRORED FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 13 OF44SHEETS Packet Pg. 49  VV-3060-3A Plan 2(M) 3Bed/2Bath 11,587 Sq. Ft.    PLAN PLAN-02- MIRRORED (31 BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1587 Sq.ft LOTNUMBERS 17,19,24,35,37  PLAN-02 (MIRRORED) - ELEVATIONS  EPTICH  RIGHT SIDE ELEVATION  dloper  2  FRONT ELEVATION  REAR ELEVATION  RPEPTONL EVELOZCH EF  PLAN-02 MIRRORED ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 14 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 50  LEFTSIDE ELEVATION    PLAN : PLAN-03 (4 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1547 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 03 LOT NUMBERS 13,23,30  60'-0"x26'-4" 79 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  (Site-Built 20'x Garage)  60'-0"  Kitchen  Bath  Utility  Bedroom #1:  DiningRoom  Bath  Living Room 219"x 14-4  #2 Bedroom#3 14-0"x104-  PLAN-03 FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 15 OF44SHEETS Packet Pg. 51  57'-6"  VV-2860-3A Plan 3 3Bedi2Bath11847S4. Ft.    PLAN PLAN-03(3BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1547 Sq,ft LOTI NUMBERS 13,23,30  PLAN-03 -E ELEVATIONS  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  12  elopere  EEHEEEEEEE ML  FRONT ELEVATION  REARELEVATION  PLAN-03 ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 16 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 52  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-03 -MIRRORED (41 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES  SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1547 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  60'-0"x26'-4" 79 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  25  57-6"  #2 Bedroom #3 11-0"x10  yeloy  Bedroom  Dining Room 12-0x12-3-  Bath  Utility  Kitchen  (Site-Built Garage)  PLAN-03 MIRRORED FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 17 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 53  VV-2860-3A I Plan 3(M) 3Bed/2Bath/1,547: Sq. Ft.    PLAN PLAN-03- MIRRORED (31 BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1547 Sq,ft LOTNUMBER 25  PLAN-03 (MIRRORED) - ELEVATIONS  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  12  opere  EHEEE  FRONTELEVATION pae  REAR ELEVATION  PLAN-03 MIRRORED ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 18 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 54  LEFT SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-04( (3BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1467 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 380 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  62'-0"x231-8" 76 Sq.ft  38  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  (Site-BuitGarage)  (Site-Built Porch)  Bedroom#  LivingR Room  Bath1  Bedroom# #2  Bedroom #3  Dining Room Kitchen  PLAN-04 FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 19 OF44SHEETS Packet Pg. 55  62'-0"  VV-2462-3A Plan 4 3Bed/2Bath 1,468 Sq. Ft.    PLAN PLAN-04(3BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1467 Sq.ft LOTN NUMBER 38  PLAN-04- ELEVATIONS  -  EEEET  FRONT SIDE ELEVATION  e  PITCHLEVE PACAG  RIGHT SIDE ELEVATION  LEFT SIDE ELEVATION  dise  POERIEOE RPEBOTTOM.  PLAN-04 ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 20 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 56  REAR SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-05A (3 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1365 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 13 LOT NUMBERS 03,05,07,09,11,43,  46-0"x30-0" 87 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  45,47,49,53,55,57,59  (Site-E -Built Garage)  (Site-BuiltF Porch)  Utility  #3  Living Room  Bath  Bedroom# #1  Bedroom #2 Bath  Kitchen  PLAN-05A FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 21 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 57  46'-0"  VV-3046-3A Plan 5A 3Bed/2Bath) 11,365 Sq. Ft.    PLAN PLAN-05A(3BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1365 Sq,ft LOTI NUMBERS 03,05,07,09,11,43, 45,47,49,53.55,57,59  PLAN-05A - ELEVATIONS  EVEL PFMERE BVELBOI  ELEVATION  PITCILEVEE PABACEROOE EOVEBOTIONL  BOPEROTION  EEE L I FRONT ELEVATION  REAR SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-05A ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 22 OF44SHEETS Packet Pg. 58  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-05A -MIRRORED (3 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1365 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 12 LOT NUMBERS 04,06,08,10,12,44,46,  46-0"x30-0" 87 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  48,52,54,56,58  (Site- -Built Garage)  (Site-Built Porch)  Utility  Bedroom#3 11,0"x11-9-  Living Room  Drwr Bath  Bath Bedroom #2  Kitchen  PLAN-05A (MIRRORED) FLOORF PLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 23 OF44SHEETS Packet Pg. 59  46'-0"  VV-3046-3A Plan 5A(M) 3Bed/2Bath! 1,365Sq.Ft.    PLAN PLAN-05A- MIRRORED (3 BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1365 Sq,ft LOTNUMBERS 04,06,08,10,12A4,46, 48,52,54,56,58  PLAN-05A (MIRRORED) - ELEVATIONS  PICLEVEE PAGAIROPE BAVEBOTTON  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  PITCLEVEE PACALES EOOEBOTT  ROPEBOTIOM-  FRONT ELEVATION  REAR SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-05A (MIRRORED) ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 24 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 60  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-05B (3 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1365 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 380 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  46-0"x30-0" 90 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  26  46-0"  #2 Bath Bedroom #3  Bedroom#1 3-41x14-4"  Bath  Living/Dining! Room  Kitchen  Utility:  VV-3046-3B IPlan 5B 3Bed/2Bath] 11,365 Sq. Ft.  (Site-E Built Garage)  PLAN-05B FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 25 OF44SHEETS Packet Pg. 61    PLAN PLAN-05B (3BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1365 Sq,ft LOTNUMBER 26  PLAN-05B - ELEVATIONS  TCHLEVEL  #  LEFT SIDE ELEVATION  12  FRONT ELEVATION  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-05B ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 26 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 62  RIGHT SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN F PLAN-06 (3 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1319 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  46-0"x28'-8" 79 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  21  (Site-Built Garage)  (Site-BuiltF Porch)  Bedroom #3  m  Bath  Bedroom#1  Bedroom# #2 Bath  PLAN-06 FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 27 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 63  VV-2946-3A IPlan 6 3Bed] 2Bath] 11,319Sq. Ft.    PLAN PLAN-06 (3BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1319 Sq.ft LOTI NUMBER 21  PLAN-06-E ELEVATIONS  12  12  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  PITCHLE  S'PORCHLEVEL  FRONT ELEVATION  REAR SIDE ELEVATION  12  PLAN-06 ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 28 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 64  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-06 -MIRRORED (3BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE 46-0"x28'-8" LIVABLE AREA 1319 Sq.ft PORCH 79 Sq.ft GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 02 LOT NUMBERS 22,42  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  (Site-Built Garage)  (Site-Built Porch)  Bedroom #3  Living Room  Bath  Bedroom# #1  Bath Bedroom #2  Kitchen  PLAN-06 (MIRRORED) FLOORF PLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 29 OF44SHEETS Packet Pg. 65  46 '-0"  VV-2946-3A Plan 6(M) 3Bed]2Bath] 11,319 Sq.Ft.    PLAN PLAN-06 MIRRORED (3E BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1319 Sq,ft LOTI NUMBERS 22,42  PLAN-06 (MIRRORED) - ELEVATIONS  PACALEYCOF  I  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  EESESHEHEEI  FRONT ELEVATION  REAR SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-06 (MIRRORED) ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 30 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 66  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-07 (3 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1216 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 02 LOT NUMBERS 28,51  41-0"x291-8" 81 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  (Site- -Built Garage)  (Site-BuitF Porch)  Bedroom #3  Living! Room  Bath:  Bedroom! #1  #2 Bath  PLAN-07 FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 31 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 67  Kitchen  41'-0"  VV-3041-3A IPlan 7 3Bedj2Bath1121654, Ft.    PLAN PLAN-07(3BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1216 Sq,ft LOTI NUMBERS 28,51  PLAN-07 - ELEVATIONS  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  EEE  FRONT ELEVATION  REAR SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-07 ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 32 OF44SHEETS Packet Pg. 68  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN :PLAN-07- MIRRORED (3BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1216 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 02 LOT NUMBERS 29,50  41'-0"x29'-8" 81 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  (Site-BuiltGarage)  (Site-BuiltF Porch)  Bédroom #3  Living Room  Bedroom #1  Bath Bedroom #2  tchen  PLAN-07 MIRRORED FLOORI PLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 33 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 69  41'-0"  VV-3041-3AI IPlan 7(M) 3Bd12Bah/12i6S.F    PLAN PLAN-07- MIRRORED (3E BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1216 Sq,ft LOTI NUMBERS 29,50  PLAN-07 (MIRRORED) - ELEVATIONS  -  ELEVATION  LEVI  FRONT ELEVATION  REAR SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-07 (MIRRORED) ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 34 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 70  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-08A (2 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1068 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  46-0"x291-8" 75 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas 20'-0"  60  26'-0"  (Site-Built Porch) (Plan 8A Only)  (Site-Built Garage)  Bedroom# #2  Living Room    Bath  Bedroom#1  46'-0"  PLAN-08A FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 35 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg.71  VV-3046-2AI Plans 8A 2Bed/2Bath! 11,068Sq.F Ft.    PLAN PLAN-08A (2BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1068 Sq,ft LOTNUMBER 60  PLAN-08A - ELEVATIONS  FRONTE ELEVATION  FERE  LEV  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-08A ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 36 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 72  REAR SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-O8A-MIRRORED MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1068 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  (2BED) 46-0"x291-8" 75 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  26'-0"  20'-0"  41  (Site-BuiltF Porch) (Plan 8A Only)  pei  (Site-Built Garage)  Bedroom #2  Living5 Room  Bath  Bedroom#1  Kitchen  PLAN-08A MIRRORED FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 37 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 73  VV-3046-2A Plans 8A(M) 2Bed/2Bath! 11,068Sq.FL.    PLAN PIAN-08A-MIRRORED: (2 BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1068 Sq,ft LOTN 41  PLAN-08A (MIRRORED) - ELEVATIONS  FRONT ELEVATION  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-08A MIRRORED ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 38 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 74  REAR SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-08B (2 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES  SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1068 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 02 LOT NUMBERS 40,61  46-0"x291-8" 74Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas 20'-0"  26'-0"  60"X60"  (Site-Built Garage)  #2  Living Room  Bedroom#1  Kitchen (Site-Built (Plan 8-B Only) Porch)  PLAN-08B FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 39 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 75  46'-0"  VV-3046-2A Plans 8B 2Bed/2Bath] 11,068Sq. Ft.    PLAN PLAN-08B (2E BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1068 Sq,ft LOTI NUMBERS 40,61  PLAN-08B - ELEVATIONS  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  PACALEVECE EPVEBOTIOM  FRONTELEVATION  REAR SIDE ELEVATION  15  PLAN-08B ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 40 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 76  ACHEEVEL EOPEBOTTON.  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-08C (2 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1068 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  46-0"x291-8" 75 Sq.ft  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  62  26'-0"  20'-0"  Bedroom #1  (Site-Built Garage)  Bedroom #2  Living 16-2"x Room 13-11"  Kitchen  (Site-Built Porch) (Plan 8-C Only)  PLAN-08C FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 41 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 77  46'-0"  VV-3046-2B Plans 8C 2Bed/2Bath! 11,068Sq.Ft.    PLAN PLAN-08C/2BED) MODEL: VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1068 Sq,ft LOTI NUMBER 62  PLAN-8C - ELEVATIONS  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  E  FRONT ELEVATION  REAR SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-08c ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 42 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 78  444L4LII  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    PLAN PLAN-08D (2 BED) MODEL : VV-HARMONY SERIES SIZE LIVABLE AREA 1068 Sq.ft PORCH GARAGE AREA 400 Sq.ft NUMBER OF LOTS 01 LOT NUMBER  46-0"x291-8" 89 Sq.ft  39  Harmony Series Victorian Villas  Kitchen  Bedroom# #2 Bath  Living Room:  (Site-E Built Garage)  26'-0"  20'-" VV-3046-2B IPlans 8D 2Bed/2Bath11,0685 Sq.F Ft.  PLAN-08D FLOORPLAN SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 43 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 79    PLAN PLAN-08D (2BED) MODEL VV-HARMONY SERIES AREA 1068 Sq,ft LOTNUMBER 39  PLAN-8D - ELEVATIONS  RIGHT-SIDE ELEVATION  AEVEL  B-PORCHLEVEL  FRONT ELEVATION  REAR SIDE ELEVATION  PLAN-08D ELEVATIONS SHEET DATE 07/30/24 SCALE 1/8"=1'-0" SHEET 44 OF44SHEETS! Packet Pg. 80  LEFT-SIDE ELEVATION    2.f  Clayton  perris  EXTERIOR COLOR PACKAGES  Tempo HARMONY  Packet Pg. 81    2.f accer  trim  trim  accent  trim  OLIVE IT #1 OLIVE IT  EARLY EVENING #2 EARLY EVENING  STATUE GARDEN  bodi  #3 STATUE GARDEN  trim  accent  trim  accent  trim  accer  LIGHT DRIZZLE  body  DESERT DUNE  body  DOVER GREY  bodi  #4 LIGHT DRIZZLE  #5 DESERT DUNE  #6 DOVER GREY  Packet Pg. 82    2.f  trim  accent  trim  accent  trim  acce  GREY HERON  body  STONES THROW  body  OUTSIDE WHITE #9 ALL WHITE  bod  #7 GREY HERON  #8 STONES THROW  trim  accent  shutters  trim  accent  shutters  trim  accer  QUEST  body  AQUA SMOKE  body  OATMEAL  bodi  #10 QUEST  #11 AQUA SMOKE  #12 HIGHRISE  Packet Pg. 83    2.g  Clayton Built  Site  Construction  Manual  Revised May 2022  Packet Pg. 84    2.g  Using the Manual  This manual is organized into a series of steps that will take you through the entire installation process using only those pages required for the specific home beingi installed. First, review the entire manual, including the Introduction chapter. As you readi it, identify sections of the manual that you willr need; identify other documents ori information you will need; construct lists of tools and materials required for your particular installation; and make sure youl have everything your need before starting work. After reviewing the entire manual, refer to the sequence of installation steps int the table below. Identify the pathway fory your installation and follow the arrows downward. Select either Single Section Home or al Multi-Section Home and choose the col- umn corresponding to thel home's foundation type, either Pier and Ground Anchor or Load-Bearing Perimeter Wall (see Defi- Ifusing an alternative (proprietary) foundation system, the installation process will change from that described in this manual. Consult the system manufacturers directions fori instructions. See page 81 for alternative foundation system criteria.  nitions, p. 6). Then complete the worki ine each of the sections starting with Getting Started.  SINGLE SECTION HOME  MULTI-SECTION HOME  Pier and Ground Anchor Getting Started (p. 10) V Prepare the Site (p. 15) V Install Footings (p. 20) V Sett the Home (p. 38) V Install Stabilizing System (p.74) Connect Utilities (p. 95) V Prepare Appliances and Equipment (p. 103) V Complete Under the tures (p. 112) V Prepare Home for Occu- pancy (p. 115) V Complete Installation Checklist (p. 116)  Load-Bearing Perimeter Wall Getting Started (p. 10) V Prepare the Site (p. 15) V Construct Foundation (p.35) V Connect Utilities (p. 95) V Prepare Appliances and Equipment (p. 103) V Complete Under the Home and Site built Struc- tures (p.112) V Prepare Home for Occu- V Complete Installation Checklist (p. 116)  Pier and Ground Anchor Getting Started (p. 10) V Prepare the Site (p. 15) V Install Footings (p. 20) Set the Home (p. 38) Complete Multi-Section Set (p. 44) Complete Roof and Exte- rior Walls (p. 56) V Connect Crossovers (p.61) V Complete Interior (p.72) V Install Stabilizing System (p.74) V Connect Utilities (p. 95) Prepare Appliances and Equipment (p. 103) V Complete Under the tures (p. 112) V Prepare Home for Occu- pancy (p. 115) V Complete Installation Checklist (p. 116)  Load-Bearing Perimeter Wall Getting Started (p. 10) V Prepare the Site (p. 15) V Construct Foundation (p.35) V Complete Multi-Section Set (p.44) V Complete Roof and Exte- rior' Walls (p. 56) V Connect Crossovers (p.61) V Complete Interior (p. 72) Connect Utilities (p.95) V Prepare Appliances and Equipment (p. 103) Complete Under the Home and Site built Struc- tures (p. 112) V Prepare Home for Occu- Complete Installation Checklist (p. 116)  Home and Site built Struc- pancy (p. 115)  Home and Site built Struc- pancy (p. 115)  APPROVEDI BY NIANC FEDERAL MANUFACTURED  REVISED  AND SAFETYS STANDARDS 1  Packet Pg. 85    Getting Started  2.g  LIST OF FIGURES Figure No. Description Figure 1 Supporting al home for display Figure 2 Sample Datal Plate Figure 2A Wind Zonel Map Figure 3 Thermal (Uo) Map Figure: 3A Humid and Fringe Climate Map Figure 3B Roofl Load! Map Figure 4 Crownt the soil undert the home Figure 5 Direct runoff awayf from the home Figure 5A Frost Protection Map Figure 6 Typical pointl load support locations Figure7 Typical pointl load support locations Figure 8 Typical support locations notr requir- Figure 8A Typical marriage line support loca- Figure 9 Typical support locations requiring Figure 10 Typical marriage line support loca- Figure 11 Maximum footing extensions Figure 12 Perimeter Supports Figure 13 Cross Beam Installation Figure 14 Connection using 2x10 Sill Plate Figure 15 Safety Cribbing Figure 16 Frame Pier Construction Figure 17 Correct Shim Placement Figures 18 Floor Connection Figures 19 Wall Connections Figures 20 Roof Connections Figure 21 Tag Unit Offset Floor Connection Figure 22 Tag Unit Wall Connection Figure 23 Tag UnitF Flush Roof Connection Figure 24 Tag Unit Offset Roof Connection Figure 25 Shingle Installation at Ridge Figure 26 Shingle Fasteners for WZI landI II Figure 27 Shingle Cutl In To Thirds Figure 28 Ridge Vent  Pagel No. Figure No. Description  Page No. 59 59 60 61 62 62 62 63 63 64 65 65 65 66 66 66 67 67 68 69 69 70 70 71 75 75 77 90 90 91 92  9 10 11 12 12 13 16 16 19 20 21 23 24 26 26 33 34 36 36 39 42 42 45-53 45-53 45-53 54 54 55 55 56 56 57 57 2  Figure 29 Triple Section Roof Connection Method 1 58 Figure 30 Triple Section Roof Connection Method2 58 Figure 31 Tag Unit Flush Roof Connection Figure 32 Tag Unit Roofing Connection w/less than Figure 33 Tag Unit Offset Roof Connection Figure 34 Furnace Over Trunk Duct, Two Home Figure 34A Furnace Offset from Trunk duct, Two Figure 34B Furnace Over Trunk Duct, Three Home Figure 34C Furnace Offseti from Trunk Duct, Three Figure 35 Duct Crossover Located int the Roof Figure 36 In-floor Duct Connection through Rim Figure 37 In-floor Duct with Crossover Using Metal Figure 38 Types of Junction Box Wiring Connec- Figure 39 Electrical Crossover Floor Wires w/Flush Figure 40 Floor Electrical Crossover Wires Figure 41 Undert the Rim. Joist Electrical Crossover Figure 42 Inside Marriage Wall Crossover Con- Figure 43 Inside Partition or Endwall Electrical Figure 44 Electrical Bonding of Multi-Section Figure 45 Water Line Crossover w/Access Panel Figure 46 Water Line Crossover thru Bottom Board Figure 47 Drain Crossover Connection Figure 48 DWV System Figure 49 DWV Connection to Sewer/Septic Figure 50 DWVF Pipe Support Options Figure 51 Gas Crossover Connection Figure 52 Typical Anchor Locations fora al Double Figure 53 Typical Anchor Locations for al Double Figures 54 Frame Tie Down Configuration Figure 55 In-Line Anchor Configuration Figure 56 Stabilizer Plate Configuration Figure 57 Anchor and Stabilizer Platel Location Figure 58 Radius Clip  twoi inchl height difference Sections Home Sections Sections Home Section Cavity Joist w/lo Metal Sleeve Sleeve tions Access Panels w/Bumped-out. Access Panels Connection with Conduit netion Crossover Connection Homes  ing perimeter supports tions not requiring perimeter sup- ports perimeter supports tions for required perimeter supports  Section Home in WZI Section Homei in WZIla and III  Packet Pg. 86    Getting Stal 2.g  LIST OF FIGURES (cont.) Figure No. Description Figure 59 Tiel Down Strap Splice Figure 60 Strapt to Beam Connection Figure 61 Procedure for Connecting the Strap Figure 62 Longitudinal Frame Anchor Attach- Figure 63 Marriage Line Tie Down Connec- Figure 64 Electrical Feeder Connection when Figure 65 Meter Base Wiring whent the Meter Figure 66 Water System Connection Figure 67 Water Heater Drip Pan and Drain Figure 68 Gas Service Connection  Page No. Figure No. Description  Page No. 104 105 105 107 107 108 109 110 110  92 92 93 93 94 95 97 98 99 101  Figure 69 Whole House Ventilation Flex Duct Figure 71 Ducts Connecting Exterior Heating Figure 72 Clothes Dryer Ventilation Ductwork Figure 73 Chimney and Combustion. Air Intake Figure 74 Chimney Clearance Figure 75 Roof Flashing and Shingle Installation Figure 76 Exterior Lighting Connection Figure 77 Wiring for Ceiling Fan or Chain-Hung Figure 78 Ceiling Fan/Light Mounted to Flush  Figure 70 Open  toF Frame and Anchor ment Method tions  and/or Cooling Equipment tol Home through Floor or Exterior Wall Duct Installation Around Chimney Light w/maximum Weight Ridge Beam  Meteri is on aF Post or Pole is ont thel Home  LIST OF TABLES Table No. Description Table 1 Wind Zone by! Locality Table: 2 Humid and Fringe Climate Zones Table 3 Roofl Loads by Locality Table 4 Soil Bearing Capacity by Soil Type Table 5 Point Load on Footings atN Marriage Line Openings 22-23 Table 6 Loadc on Frame Pier Footings for Homes Not Re- quiring Perimeter Blocking Except at Openings Table 7 Load on Frame Pier Footings for Homes Requiring 27-30  Page No. 11 12 13 18 24-25 30 31 32 33 41 41 45-53 45-53 45-53 61 74 78-81 82-85 85-86 87 88 88 89 90 96  Perimeter Blocking Table 8 Footing Materials Table 9 Pier Configuration Table 10 Footing Dimensions Table 10A Footing Thickness Table 11 Pier Material Minimum Specifications Table 12 Pier Construction Table 13 Floor Connection Fastening Specifications Table 14 Maximum Strap Spacing Table 15 Strap Fastening Minimum Specifications Table 16 Under Floor Duct Configurations Table 17 Anchor Location Types Table 18 WZI Frame Tiedown Quantities Table 19 WZI II Frame Tiedown Quantities Table 20 WZI IIIF Frame Tiedown Quantities Table 21 WZILongitudinal Frame Tiedown Quantities Table: 22 WZI II Longitudinal Frame Tiedown Quantities Table 23 WZI IIIL Longitudinal Frame Tiedown Quantities Table 24 Anchor Location Types Table 25 Anchor System Materials Specifications Table 26 Electrical Feeder Wire and Equipment Sizes for  Copper Conductors  3  Packet Pg. 87    Getting Started  2.g  Table 27 Skirting and' Ventilation Specifications Table 28 Foundation Ventilation Appendix List Appendix Description A B C D  113 113 Page No.  OPEN Cooling Equipment Sizing Guidelines Storm Shutter Installation Hinged Roof  Others Plant Specific Addendum Pages following installation manual.  Please refer to Appendix for any plant specific details that may supplement or supersede information listed in the  The following is a list of revisions to this manual since the 2018 version:  Page 20 - revised introduction and added approval to use manual for unreinforced strip and Page 21 - revised first bullet point and added language regarding additional factory installed  slab footings floor joists  Page 33 - added language for unreinforced strip and slab footings  Page 44 - corrected order of Steps 7 &8 Page 72 - revised 2. Fasten Walls instructions Page 99 - revised water heater drain instructions Page 105- - revised dryer vent connection instructions  Page 95-98 - added Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductor chart  Packet Pg. 88    Getting Stal 2.g  Introduction  This installation manual contains instructions that must be followed for thep proper installation oft the home. It complies with the HUDI Installation Standards. Please read all instructions and any other documents (including addendum pages and supplements) that may apply tot thes specific home prior to commencing site work ori installation. This installation manual covers permits and site work through final inspection of the installation. Itc covers both single and multi-section homes installed over pier anda anchor and load bearing crawl space walls. It contains instructions, including specifications and procedures, fori thes set and hookup of homes tol be used as single-family dwellings. The importance of correct installation cannot be over-emphasized. Correct installation is absolutely essential to homeowner satisfaction and the structural integrity oft the home. Alli instructions must be followed to provide the No manual can cover all circumstances that may exist for certain home designs or building sites. For questions, further clarification ori if you encounter conditions at the: site or in the design of the home ori its foundation not covered by this ma- Supplemental addendum pages may be included with this manual. Supplements include requirements not covered in this  customer with as safe, quality home.  nual, please contact the manufacturer, a registered engineer or registered architect. Once the home installation is complete, leave this manual with the home.  manual or that supercede the manual instructions.  IMPORTANT NOTICES  The home manufacturer is notr responsible for installation or fort the materials supplied by thes set-up crew at the time ofi installation. The installer may be responsible for any deviations from thei installation instructions of this To keep the! home in compliance withi its warranty, the home installation must follow the procedures described in this manual or other procedures approved by the manufacturer. Deviation from thei instructions in this manual may void the home's warranty. Any alterations or changes tot thel home shall be approved by a registered engi- When an installer does not provide support and anchorage in accordance with the approved manufacturer's in- stallation instructions, or encounters site conditions (such as areas that are subject tot flood damage or high seismic risk) or other conditions that prevent the use of the instructions provided in this manual, the installer must obtain special site-specific instructions from the manufacturer or use a design approved by a registered engineer or registered architect. Designs provided by registered professional engineers or registered architects must also be approved by ther manufacturer and DAPIA. Alternative support and anchorage designs may be used which are state approved and acceptable to thel local authority having jurisdiction.  manual.  neer or registered architect and may still be subject to warranty violations.  SAFETY  There are potential hazards associated with the installation of a manufactured home. Home installers are licensed and, as experienced professionals, should recognize these hazards, be qualified to work with them, and be capable of providing Only qualified persons should install a manufactured home. The installer must possess a validi installation license as a manufactured home installer. As qualified professionals ini the field of home installation, installers are the experts and must be aware of the hazards and conditions faced. Warnings are published throughout this manual as reminders. These reminders may not cover all hazards, all potential hazards, or all possible consequences of improper or unsafe installation Construction crews should be trained int the skills required and! be supervised by experienced personnel. Installers should Obey OSHA regulations, particularly those related to home construction, such as Title 29 Code of Regulations Part 1926.  safe work practices and equipment that minimize the risks ofi injury.  practices.  regularly inspect work preformed by crews and subcontractors.  For copies of OSHA regulations, call (202)512-1800 or visity www.osha.goy on the web.  5  Packet Pg. 89    Getting Started  2.g  RESOURCES  Office of Regulatory Affairs and Manufactured Housing USI Department of Housing and Urban Development 451 Seventh Street, SW, Room 9164 Washington, DC: 20410-8000 Telephone: (202)708-6423 or (800) 927-2891 FAX: (202)708-4213 State Administrative Agencies FEDERAL PREEMPTION  Al list of SAAS may bei found ont the web at www.hud.govlofficeshsglsth/mhs/mhssaa.cfm or by contacting the Of- This home was engineered, constructed and inspected in conformance with the Federal Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standards oft the US Department of Housing and Urban Development (24 CFRI Part 3280, commonly referred to as the' "HUD Code")i ine effect on the date of construction. These Standards seti forth minimum requirements for the de- Individual states, counties and cities shall have no authority to establish standards regarding the construction or safety of ar manufactured home. Ar metal certification label is affixed to each section of the home to certify thati ith has been con- structed and inspected to comply with these Standards. The design plans andi in-plant construction of all homes are in- The installation oft the home and any alterations made toi the home shall conform tot the requirements oft the Federal Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standards and the HUDI Model Manufactured Home Installation Standards. These installation instructions are minimum requirements. Applicable local or state laws may have more: stringent installa- tion requirements than outlined int this manual and must be followed. Consult with the local authority having jurisdiction (LAHJ) forr regulations thatr may require licenses and/or permits or which may affect procedures described int this manual. ANCHOR. ASSEMBLY. Any device or other means designed to transfer home anchoring loads to the ground. ANCHORING EQUIPMENT. Ties, straps, cables, turnbuckles, chains, and other approved components, including tension- ANCHORING SYSTEM. A combination of anchoring equipment and anchor assemblies that will, when properly designed BASEMENT. AI load bearing perimeter walli foundation that includes habitable space (finished or unfinished, heated or CONCRETE ANCHOR. As specific anchoring assembly device designed tot transfer home anchoring tension loads from straps CRAWLSPACE. The space underneath thel home's floor system, enclosed with either load- or non-load bearing perimeter walls. The ground may be covered with a concrete slab or by a plastic ground cover. Crawispace walls must be vent- CROSSOVERS. Utility interconnections between sections of multi-section homes, including heating and cooling ducts, DATAF PLATE. An information sheet located on a cabinet door under the kitchen sink or on a wall panel or doori face near the electrical panel, utility room ori int the master bedroom closet. It contains a unique identification number and identi- DIAGONAL TIE. A tie intended to resist horizontal or sheari forces, but which may resist vertical, uplift, and overturning GROUND ANCHOR. A specific anchoring assembly device designed to transfer homel loads tot the ground. H-BEAM. Steel H-beams, also called cross beams, are often used to support al home over a basement or crawlspace. They span across the foundation from sidewall to sidewall, typically with an intermediate support pier andi footing (typ- ically int the center point resulting in al line of piers under the centerline ofa double section home). INFORMATION PACKET. A set of important documents provided with the home including warranties, information on high  fice of Regulatory. Affairs and Manufactured Housing ori int the Homeowners Manual.  sign and construction ofr manufactured homes designed tol be used as dwellings.  spected byi independent third party agencies to assure compliance with the Standards.  DEFINITIONS  ing devices thata are used to secure al home to anchor assemblies. andi installed, resist the uplift, overturning, and lateral forces on the home.  unheated) completely orp partially below grade. to concrete foundation or slab system. ed and an access must be provided.  electrical circuits, and water pipes, drain plumbing, and gas lines.  fies the windz zone, roofl load: zone, and climatic zone for which the home was constructed. FOOTING. That portion of thes support system that transmits loads directly tot the soil.  forces.  wind coverage, and other features oft the specific home.  6  Packet Pg. 90    Getting Stal 2.g  INSTALLATION LICENSE. The proof that an installer meets the requirements for installing manufactured homes under LABELED. Equipment or materials to which has been attached al label, symbol, or other identifying mark ofa a certified testing laboratory, inspection agency, or other organization concerned with product evaluation. The label indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine suitable usage in a specified manner. LISTED OR CERTIFIED. Included in al list published by ar nationally recognized testing laboratory, inspection agency, or other organization concerned with product evaluation that maintains periodic inspection of production of listed equip- ment or materials, and whose listing states either thatt the equipment or material meets nationally recognized stand- LOAD-BEARING PERIMETER WALLI FOUNDATION. As support system for thel home whereby the home is mechanically fastened to as structural wall(s) that transfers gravity, lateral and uplift loads tot the ground. LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (LAHJ). The state, city, county, municipality, utility, or organization that has local responsibilities that must be complied with during thei installation of ar manufactured home.  the HUD-administered installation program.  ards or has been tested andi found suitable for use in as specified manner.  MUST. Indicates ar mandatory requirement. NIA. Indicates not applicable.  PIER. That portion of the support system between the footing and the home, exclusive of shims. Types of piers include, buta are notl limited to: (1)manufactured: steel stands; (2) pressure-treated wood; (3) manufactured concrete stands; PIER AND GROUND ANCHOR FOUNDATION. A support system for the home that employs piers under the chassis and other locations to support gravity loads and employs ground anchors and tie downs (the stabilizing system) to resist PERIMETER BLOCKING. Regularly spaced piers supporting the sidewalls and marriage line of the home. Some homes QUALIFIED (ORI LICENSED). Has the necessary knowledge ands skills gained from experience and training that will allow performance of the job safely, competently, andi in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, rules and regula- tions. Meets all necessary qualification tests including anyl license and certification requirements thatr may be in effect int the area where the home will be installed, including the requirements for installing manufactured homes under the HUD-administered installation program. The term does noti incorporate a state-issued installation license or certifica- tion, except to the extent provided int this part. The term does noti imply that HUD approves or recommends ani install- er or warrants the work of an installer, and should not be usedi in any wayt that indicates HUD approval in violation of RAMADA. Any freestanding roof or shade structure, installed ore erected over a home or any portion of the home.  (4) concrete blocks; and (5) portions off foundation walls.  lateral and uplift loads.  require perimeter blocking in addition to supports under thel home's frame.  18 U.S.C.709.  SHOULD. Indicates ar recommendation thati is strongly advised but not mandatory.  SHALL. Indicates ar mandatory requirement.  SITE FOR AI HOME. A designated parcel ofl land designed for the accommodation of one home, its accessory buildings or SKIRTING. A weather-resistant material used to enclose the perimeter, under thel living area oft thel home, from the bottom STABILIZING SYSTEM. All components of the anchoring and support systems, such as piers, footings, ties, anchoring equipment, ground anchors, or any other materials andr methods of construction that support and secure thel home to SUPPORT SYSTEM. Pilings, columns, a combination of footings, piers, foundation walls, caps, and shims and any com- bination thereof that will, when properly installed, support and secure the home tot the ground. TIE. Straps, cable, or securing devices used to connect the home to anchoring assemblies. UTILITY CONNECTION. The connection of the home to utilities that include, but are not limited to, electricity, water, sew- WIND ZONE. The areas designated on thel Basic Wind Zone Map, as further defined in by the Manufactured Home Con-  structures, and accessory equipment, for the exclusive use of the occupants oft the home.  oft the home to grade. the ground.  er,gas, or fuel oil.  VERTICAL TIE. A1 tie intended tor resist uplifting and overturning forces.  struction and Safety Standards  Packet Pg. 91    Getting Started  2.g  ENGINEER'S STAMP  Certain pages of this manual, display thes seal of a registered engineer. Federal guidelines only require the seal from one  state to be displayed, but the details herein applyt to all states. SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL  iy This icon indicates ani important warning. Itis critical to heed these warnings.  This icon indicates ar recommended best practice. While not required, following these practices will resulti in as superior installation, reducing the chance that cosmetic or dura-  bility related complaints might arise.  ABBREVIATIONS ABS ANSI APA ASTM AWPA CFM CFR DWV EMT FEMA ft ga HUD in LAHJ Ib(s)  Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene American National Standards Institute American Plywood. Association American Society for Testing and Ma- terials American Wood Preservers Associa- tion Cubict feet per minute Code of Federal Regulations Drain, Waste, Vent Electrical metallic tubing Federal Emergency Management Agency Foot/feet Gauge US Department of Housing and Ur- ban Development Inch(es) Local Authority Having Jurisdiction Pound(s)  max. MHCSS min. mph NEC NFIP NFPA O.C. OSHA OZ p. psf psi SAA sq ft  Maximum Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standards Minimum Mile(s) hour per National Electric Code National Flood Insurance Program National Fire Protection Association Occupational Safety and Health Admin-  On center istration Ounce(s) Page Pounds per square foot Pounds square inch per State Administrative Agency Square foot/feet  ALTERNATIVE FOUNDATION SYSTEMS  Alternative foundation systems or designs are permitted in accordance with the following:  System designs are prepared by a registered engineer or a registered architect ort tested and certified by a regis- tered engineer or registered architect in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and are manufactured and installed so as not to take the home out of compliance with the Manufactured Home Construction and Safety An Alternative Foundation and/or Tiedown system design must be submitted to the manufacturer ifiti is not listed on the manufacturer's website. Go to wwgeleenwesperis.com to view all DAPIA approved. Alternative Tiedown systems. Prior to obtaining an alternative design contact the home building facility for available approved alternative  Standards.  designs or instructions for submitting an alternative design.  8  Packet Pg. 92    Getting Stal 2.g  DISPLAY AND STORAGE OF THE HOME  WEATHER PROTECTION  Ift the installation is nots started immediately upon delivery of thel home, the retailer and/ori installer has ther responsibility to ensure the exterior weather protection covering of marriage walls and the roof of homes has not been damaged during shipment. Inspect the home immediately upon the delivery andi frequently during storage. Promptly repair tears ini the home closure materials to prevent damage from the elements. Inspect andr repair nail holes in roof shingles with asphalt When a new home is to be displayed at a retail location, temporarily block and support the home. Set up homes with sin- gle block piers (maximum height per Table 9), metal piers orj jack stands spaced not further apart than 121 feet O.C. beneath each I-beam. Thet tire and axle: system may be used as one oft these required supports, and the! hitch jack may be used as another. Locate the first support noi further than twof feet from the rear end oft the home (Figure 1). Place additional sup- ports along the perimeter on either side of openings greater than four feet (i.e. sliding glass doors, bay windows, etc.). For For multi section homes, locate additional supports along the marriage line under support columns. These locations will  cement or replace damaged shingles. Inspect and repair siding as needed.  SUPPORTING AI HOME FORI DISPLAY  18' wide homes, perimeter supports must also be spaced no further than 12 feet O.C.  be marked by the manufacturer.  Figure 1. Supporting ah home for display  GRADE 00e 2-0" 1 12-0"  12-0"  12-0"  12-0"  12-0"  For all homes, place footings below each support. Footings may be placed directly on thes surface grade without excava- tion and may be ABS pads, 2x10by 16 inchl long pressure treated lumber or 16"x1 16" by 4 incht thick concrete pads. To prevent damage to homes being stored at ther manufacturer's facility, model home center ort thel home site, but not on display (i.e. people shall not be permitted inside thel home) for a period exceeding 30 days, locate supports below each I- beam noi further thant two feeti from eache end oft the home and at the approximate center of the home length. For 18' wide Whether the homei is being supported for display or storage the height oft the home should be no higher than 48 inches as measured from the top of the ground to the bottom of the I-beam. In addition, iti is extremely important that the roof/ridge vents are installed while thel home is on display. Failure toi install the rooflridge vents may lead to significant damage to  SUPPORTING AI HOME FOR STORAGE  homes, perimeter supports must also be spaced noi further than 121 feet O.C.  the roof and home.  9  Packet Pg. 93    Getting Started  2.g  Getting Started  This chapter covers af few: steps that, taken now, willa avoid problems later in thei installation process.  Follow the Steps below:  STEP 1.LOCATE THE DATA PLATE (p. 10) STEP 2. CONFIRM WIND: ZONE (p. 10) STEP 3. CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE (p. 11) STEP 4. CONFIRM ROOF-LOAD ZONE (p. 13)  STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS (p. 14)  STEP 1. LOCATE THE DATA PLATE  Locate the data plate inside the home (Figure 2), typically inside al kitchen cabinet door orona a wall panel or door face near the electrical panel, utility room or bedroom closet.  Figure 2. Sample data plate shown as reference only, actual data plate may vary.  Thei information ont the data plate will be used to verify that the home was designed for From Table 1, identify the wind zone for thel home. Verify that the home conforms to the following rules and any special requirements determined byt the LAHJ. Nol home may be located in al higher wind: zone thant that indicated on the da- tay plate. (Example: al home designed for Wind Zone II cannot be placed in AH home may be located in al lower wind zone than thati indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for Wind Zone II can! be placed in either Wind Zone II orl I.) When al home is located in al lower wind zone thani indi- cated on the data plate it may be installed per the requirements of thel lower Homes located within 1,5001 feet of the coastline in Wind Zones Ila and III must be designed to withstand exposure 'D' conditions. This willl bei indicated on Ift the home does not conform tot these rules, contact the manufacturer immediately.  the proper location.  STEP 2. CONFIRM WIND ZONE  Wind Zone III.)  wind zone. the data plate.  10  Packet Pg. 94    Getting Stal 2.g  TABLE 1. WIND ZONE BY LOCALITY  Wind Zonel Wind Zone II Alabama Florida Georgia Louisiana Maine Mississippi Texas Virginia Wind Zone III Hawaii Alaska Florida Louisiana Other  All areas exceptt those areas listed below as being within) Wind Zone IlC orllI  Counties of Baldwin and Mobile  All counties except thosel listed below as within Wind Zone III Counties of Bryan, Camden, Chatham, Glynn, Liberty, Mcintosh  Parishes of Acadia, Allen, Ascension, Assumption, Calcasieu, Cameron, East Baton Rouge, East Feliciana, Evangeline, Iberia, Iberville, Jefferson Davis, Lafayette, Livingston, Pointe Coupee, St. Helena, St.. James, St. John the Baptist, St. Landry, St. Martin, St. Tammany, Tangipahoa, Vermillion, Washington, West Baton Rouge, and  West Feliciana  Counties of Hancock and' Washington  Massachusetts Counties of Barnstable, Bristol, Dukes, Nantucket, and Plymouth  Counties of George, Hancock, Harrison, Jackson, Pearl River, and Stone Pamlico, Pasquotank, Pender, Perquimans, Tyrrell, and' Washington Nueces, Orange, Refugio, San Patricio, and' Willacy  North Carolina Counties of Beaufort, Brunswick, Camden, Chowan, Columbus, Craven, Currituck, Jones, New Hanover, Onslow, South Carolina Counties of Beaufort, Berkeley, Charleston, Colleton, Dorchester, Georgetown, Horry, Jasper, and Williamsburg  Counties of Aransas, Brazoria, Calhoun, Cameron, Chambers, Galveston, Jefferson, Kenedy, Kleberg, Matagorda,  Cities of Chesapeake, Norfolk, Portsmouth, Princess Anne, and' Virginia Beach Coastal regions (as determined by the 90 mphi isotach ont the ANSIASCE7-88 map)  Entire state Pinellas, and Sarasota  Counties ofE Broward, Charlotte, Collier, Dade, Franklin, Gulf, Hendry, Lee, Martin, Manatee, Monroe, Palm Beach, Parishes of. Jefferson, Lal Fourche, Orleans, Plaquemines, St. Bernard, St. Charles, St. Mary, and Terrebonne Allr regions oft the U.S. Territories of American Samoa, Guam, Northern Mariana Islands, Puerto Rico, Trust Territo-  North Carolina Counties of Carteret, Dare, and Hyde  ryoft the Pacific Islands, and the United States Virgin Islands  ND  Figure 2A. Wind zone map  STEP 3. CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE  From Table 2, identify thet thermal (UO): zone for the home. Verify thatt thel home con- No home may be locatedi in an area with al higher thermal zone number than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: al home designed for Thermal  forms tot the following rules.  Zone 2 cannot be placed in Thermal Zone 3.)  11  Packet Pg. 95    Getting Started  2.g  AH home may be located in al lower thermal zone thant thati indicated ont the da- tap plate. (Example: al home designed for Thermal Zone 21 may be placed ine ei- In no case may al home designated for installation in the' "Humid & Fringe Climate," as identified on the data plate, be located outside of this region Ift thel home does not conform tot these rules, contact the manufacturer immediately.  ther Thermal Zone 2or1.). (Table 2).  Figure 3. Thermal (Uo) zone  map  Figure 3A. Humid & fringe climate map  Climales  TABLE 2. HUMID AND FRINGE CLIMATE ZONES Humid and Fringe Climate Zone  Alabama Florida Georgia Hawaii Louisiana Mississippi  Counties of Baldwin, Barbour, Bullock, Butler, Choctaw, Clarke, Coffee, Conecuh, Covington, Cerenshaw, Dale, Escambia, Geneva, Henry, Houston, Lowndes, Marengo, Mobile, Monroe, Montgomery, Pike, Washington, and Counties of Appling, Atkinson, Bacon, Baker, Ben Hill, Berrien, Brantley, Brooks, Bryan, Calhoun, Camden, Char- leton, Chatham, Clay, Clinch, Coffee, Colquitt, Cook, Crisp, Decatur, Dougherty, Early, Echols, Effingham, Evans, Glynn, Grady, Irwin, Jeff Davis, Lanier, Lee, Liberty,Long, Lowndes, Mcintosh, Miller, Mitchell, Pierce, Quitman, Counties of Adams, Amite, Claiborne, Clarke, Copiah, Covington, Forrest, Franklin, George, Greene, Hancock, Harrison, Hinds, Issaquena, Jackson, Jasper, Jefferson, Jefferson Davis, Jones, Lamar, Lawrence, Lincoln, Mari- on, Pearl River, Perry, Pike, Rankin, Simpson, Smith, Stone, Walthall, Warren, Wayne, and' Wilkinson Counties of Anderson, Angelina, Aransas, Atascosa, Austin, Bastrop, Bee, Bexar, Brazoria, Brazos, Brooks, Bur- leson, Caldwell, Calhoun, Cameron, Camp, Cass, Chambers, Cherokee, Colorado, Comal, De Witt, Dimmit, Duval, Falls. Fayette. FortE Bend. Franklin. Freestone. Frio. Galveston. Goliad. Gonzales. Gregg. Grimes. Guadalupe.  Wilcox All counties and locations  Randolph, Seminole, Tattnall, Terrell, Thomas, Tift, Turner, Ware, Wayne, and' Worth  All counties and locations All counties andI locations  North Carolina Counties of Brunswick, Carteret, Columbus, New Hanover, Onslow, and Pender South Carolina Counties of Beaufort, Berkeley, Charleston, Colleton, Dorchester, Georgetown, Horry and. Jasper  Texas  12  Packet Pg. 96    Getting Stal 2.g  Hardin, Harris, Harrison, Hays, Henderson, Hidalgo, Hopkins, Houston, Jackson, Jasper, Jefferson, Jim Hogg, Jim Wells, Karnes, Kaufman, Kenedy, Kinney, Kleberg, La Salle, Lavaca, Lee, Leon, Liberty, Limestone, Live Oak, Madison, Marion, Matagorda, Maverick, McMullen, Medina, Milam, Montgomery, Morris, Nacogdoches, Navarro, Newton, Nueces, Orange, Panola, Polk, Rains, Refugio, Robertson, Rusk, Sabine, San Augustine, San. Jacinto, San Patricio, Shelby, Smith, Starr, Titus, Travis, Trinity, Tyler, Upshur, Uvalde, Val Verde, Van Zandt, Victoria, Walker, Waller, Washington, Webb, Wharton, Willacy, Williamson, Wilson, Wood, Zapata, and! Zavala  STEP 4. CONFIRM ROOF LOAD ZONE  From Table 3, identify thel RoofLoad Zone for thel home. Verify that the home con-  forms tot the following rules.  Nol home may be placed in an area with a higher roofl load than thati indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for the South (20 psf) Roof Load Zone cannot be placed int thel Middle (30 psf) Roofl Load Zone). AH home may be located in an area with al lower roof load than thati indicated ont the data plate. (Example: al home designed for the Middle (30 psf) Roof Load Zone may be placed in the South (20 psf) Roof Load Zone). When a home isl located in an area with al lower roof load than indicated on the data plate it may be installed per the requirements oft thel lower roofl load area. There are special high roofl load areas (primarily in mountains) not shown on the map. Contact the LAHJ or SAA1 for information about these areas. The home's data plate willi indicate ift the home has been designed for one of these high roof load areas. Ramadas may be usedi in areas with roof livel loads greater than 40 psf. Ramadas are tol be self-supporting, except that any connection tot the home must bet for weatherproofing only.  ND  Figure 3B. Roof (snow). load  map  Zones  TABLE 3. ROOF LOADS BY LOCALITY North (40 psf roofl load) Alaska Maine Middle (30 psf roof load) Colorado Idaho lowa Maine Michigan Minnesota  Allo counties All counties All counties  Counties of Aroostook, Piscataquis, Somerset, Penobscot, Waldo, Knox, Hancock, Washington  Counties of: Buena Vista, Butler, Calhoun, Cerro Gordo, Cherokee, Chickasaw, Clay, Dickinson, Emmet, Floyd, Franklin, Hamilton, Hancock, Hardin, Howard, Humboldt, Ida, Kossuth, Lyon, Mitchell, O'Brien, Osceola, Palo Alto, Plymouth, Pocahontas, Sac, Sioux, Webster, Winnebago, Worth, Wright Counties of Androscoggin, Cumberland, Franklin, Kanabec, Lincoln, Oxford, Sagadahoc, York Counties of Alger, Alcona, Alpena, Antrim, Baraga, Benzie, Charlevoix, Cheboygan, Chippewa, Crawford, Delta, Dickson, Emmet, Gogebic, Grand Traverse, Houghton, Iron, Kalkaska, Keweenaw, Leelanau, Luce, Mackinac, Marquette, Menominee, Missaukee, Montmorency, Ogemaw, Ontonagon, Oscoda, Otsego, Presque Isle, Ros- Counties ofA Aitkin, Anoka, Benton, Blue Earth, Brown, Cass, Carlton, Carver, Chippewa, Chisago, Cook, Cotton- wood, Crow) Wing, Dakota, Dodge, Douglas, Faribault, Fillmore, Freeborn, Goodhue, Grant, Hennepin, Hubbard, Itasca, Isanti, Jackson, Kandiyohi, Kanabec, Koochiching, Lac qui Parle, Lake, Le Sueur, Lincoln, Lyon, McLeod,  Massachusetts County of Essex  common, Schoolcraft, Wexford  13  Packet Pg. 97    Getting Started  2.g  Meeker, Morrison, Milliel Lacs, Mower, Martin, Murray, Nicollet, Nobles, Olmsted, Pipestone, Pine, Pope, Ramsey, Redwood, Renville, Rice, Rock, St. Louis, Sibley, Scott, Steele, Sherburne, Swift, Stearns, Stevens, Todd, Wade-  na, Wright, Washington, Wabasha, Winona, Waseca, Watonwan, Yellow Medicine  Montana New Hamp- shire New York  AII Counties AlIO Counties  Counties of Cayuga, Clinton, Essex, Erie, Franklin, Fulton, Genesee, Hamilton, Herkimer, Jefferson, Lewis, Living- ston, Madison, Monroe, Montgomery, Niagara, Oneida, Onondaga Ontario, Orleans, Oswego, St. Lawrence, Sara-  toga, Schenectady, Seneca, Warren, Washington, Wayne, Wyoming, Yates McCook, Miner, Minnehaha, Moody, Turner, Union, Yankton  South Dakota Counties of Brookings, Clay, Codington, Deuel, Grant, Hamlin, Hanson, Hutchinson, Kingsbury, Lake, Lincoln,  Utah Vermont Wisconsin Wyoming South (20 psf roof load) Other  AII Counties Washington, Windsor AlIO Counties roofl load: zone.  Counties ofA Addison, Caledonia, Chittenden, Essex, Franklin, Grand Isle, Lamoille, Orange, Orleans, Rutland, Counties ofA Ashland, Bayfield, Barron, Buffalo, Burnett, Clark, Chippewa, Door, Douglas, Dunn, Eau Claire, Flor- ence, Forest, Iron, Jackson, Langlade, Lincoln, Marathon, Marinette, Menominee, Oconto, Oneida, Pepin, Pierce,  Polk, Price, Rusk, St. Croix, Sawyer, Taylor, Trempealeau, Vilas, Washburn  Thes states and counties not listedf for thel Middle orl North roof load: zone above are deemed tol be withint the South  Is the data plate present and the home placed in the appro- YES, go to STEP 5, CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PER- NO, Stop installation activities and notify the home retailer. STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS Local regulations may set conditions for the siting andi installation ofa a manufactured home. Consult the LAHJ, state manufactured housing association and the state SAA (See Resources, p. 5) fort the: specific local requirements, including: Building codes that may affect the construction of site built structures andi in- Local requirements regulating thei installation of manufactured homes. Setback requirements for property lines, streets, yards, and courts. Fire separation distances. Development covenants for the specific property. for homes installed int those areas.  priate wind, thermal and roof load zones?  MITS, (p. 14).  v Areas subject to flooding. The foundation specifica- tions contained int this manual are NOT intended to address flood loads. If the home is locatedi in the floodp plain, consult a regis- tered engineer.  frastructure.  The locations of flood hazard areas and any special foundation requirements Insome areas, building permits are required to install manufactured homes. Priort tor making any alteration to thes site and thel home, contact the LAHJto  determine ifp plan approval and permits are required. go to Prepare the Site (p. 15)  14  Packet Pg. 98    Prepare the 2.g  Prepare the Site  Ap properly prepared sitei is critical to a good quality installation and the long term structural stability of the home. This chapter explains the process of planning the site, evaluating thes soil, and preparing the site for construction oft the  home's support system.  Follow the Steps below: STEP 1. PLAN SITE ACCESS (p. 15)  STEP 2. DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT (p. 15) STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE (p. 16) STEP 4. DETERMINE SOIL CONDITIONS (p. 16)  STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY. AND FROST LINE (p. 17) STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY (p. 19)  STEP 1. PLAN SITE ACCESS through which the home will pass.  Planning ther route to the site ist typically the responsibility of the retailer or transporta- tion company. Whoever is responsible musts secure state permits from the states Inp planning the route, avoid obstructions thatr mighti interfere with the passage of the home, such as low hanging wires and trees, low overpasses and! bridges not suitable for the load. Contact the utility companyi if wires need to be moved. Do not allow branches, bushes or other foliage to scrape against the home as the homei is moved to the site. Avoid ditches, berms, steep: slopes and soft ground. Identify andi fill any holes and soft spotsi into which the transporter's wheels may sink. Avoid moving overs steep Ifre required, provide for home storage and staging areas on the site. Plan the delivery and staging of home sections and materials so that after all deliveries are complete, home sections andr materials can be accessed for use andi installed int the appropriate sequence. Orient home sections so they do not have to be rotated or excessively ma- neuvered during the installation process. Plani for temporary needs, such as dump- sters, portable toilets, crew parking, delivery vehicle drop-offs and concrete mixer deli- Before moving the home tot the site, inform thel LAHJ and make sure the sitei is pre- STEP 2. DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT The home location may have already been determined by others. Ifnot, plan the! home location and layout in compliance with the regulations researched in Getting Started, STEP 5. CHECKI LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS (p. 14). Contact utilities for locations ofe existing infrastructure, such as underground cables, pipes and electrical  Hy Site Preparation. Final re- sponsibility for site prepara- tion, including soil stability and frost heave control, lies with the installer. An impro- perly prepared site may re- sult int the denial ofaf foun- dation-related warranty claim.  changes in grade (20 degrees or more).  veries.  pared and utilities are available.  v Fire separation. Comply with any! LAHJ fire separa- tion requirements or the re- quirements NFPA! 501A, 2003 edition (Chapter 6).  lines.  When planning the sitei mprovements, consider thei following: The home location should be level. tial flood zones.  Avoid contact with large trees, steep slopes, poorly drained areas and poten- Preserve trees and shrubs for shade, visual screens and windbreaks.  15  Packet Pg. 99    Prepare the Site  2.g  Plan the driveway, parking areas, septic, well, other structures and utility lines. Consider future additions, such as screen rooms, porches and awnings.  Sitet thel home away from natural water paths. STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE  Trim overhanging foliage (tree limbs, etc. that could cause damage to thel home) consid- ering future growth, potential storms, swaying in wind and snowice-weighted branches. All organic material such as vegetation, wood, roots, twigs, dead branches, grass, brush and wood scraps must be removed in areas where footings are to be placed. Remove any debris that could! become termite infested from the: site and surrounding area. Home site must be graded to drain surface water away fromi foundation walls and to pre- vent water build-up under the home. (Figure 4)1 The grade shall not be less than 5 inches within the first 101 feet around the perimeter oft the home. Where proper slope away from home cannot be achieved, the site must be provided with drains, ditches, berms, swales or otherwise graded to drain water away fromt the structure, as showni in Figure 5. Ifh home will have skirting, grading shall facilitate the drainage of surface water away from the home. Homes on concrete slabs or with perimeter foundation walls shall have drainage tiles, gravel, crushed stone drains, or other approved drainage systems. These must be installed at or below the lowest grade under the home or below the bot- tom oft the slab and shall discharge by gravity or mechanical means to daylight.  v Site drainage. Moisture un- der thel home can resulti in structural damage tot the floor system, foundation, anchoring system and other parts oft thel home. Failure to provide adequate slope/drainage can resulti in moisture-related problems such as mold, mildew and erosion. The home site must be prepared so that there will be no depressions inv which surface water may accumulate beneath the home. Figure 4. Grade the. soil away from the home Figure 5. Direct runoff away from the home  Properly dispose of all items.  HOUSE  ARROWS INDICATE DIRECTION OF WATERFLOW.  Grade the ground so that water under porches, decks and recessed entries flows away from thel home. Ifp proper grading is not possible, use other methods such as a drain tile and automatic sump pump system to remove: any water that may collect under the The home is suitable for the installation of gutters and downspouts. Gutters and down- spouts must be installed per the gutter and downspout manufacturer's installation in- structions. When gutters and downspouts are installed, direct runoff away from the  home. home.  STEP 4. DETERMINE SOIL CONDITIONS  Examine thes soil type under the proposed home location to make sure itis suitable for placement of al home. The design of the home's foundation, including footing/pier spac- ing and size, will in part be determined by the bearing capacity of the soil and, if ground anchors are used, byt the soil's withdrawal strength. The soil under every portion of the foundation must meet the following criteria. Soil and fill under the home, but not directly The soil must be firm and undisturbed (not previously excavated) ori fill com-  v Soil. Inadequate soil bearing capacity or ai foundation mismatched to the soil char- acteristics can result ine ex- cessive or differential  supporting footings, are exempt from these criteria.  16  Packet Pg. 100    Prepare the 2.g  pacted to atl least 90% of its maximum relative density). Uncompacted fill will settle over time, causing thel home to shift and become unlevel. Fill must not contain large debris. This too will settle over time. Thes soil mustr not be comprised of organic clays or peat. Organic material can decay, causing settlement anda also may harbor pests that can infest thel home. As soil's bearing capacity can be greatly reduced when it is saturated with wa- ter. Note that water tables may vary with seasonal or climactic conditions. Consult a geologist or the LAHJ ify you are unsure of the water table level. Thes soil must not be a highly expansive type. Expansive soils can expand when they become saturated with water, causing the home to shift and be- come unlevel. Ifs soils are expansive contact ar registered engineer, or regis- tered architect to assist with the design of the foundation: system.  settlement oft the home, which can cause thel home tol become unlevel, resulting inj jammed doors and win- dows, cracks int finishes and ruptured plumbing connec- tions.  Does the soil meet these criteria? FROST LINE, (p. 17).  YES, go to STEP 5, DETERMINE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY AND NO, Consult a registered engineer, registered architect, or geologist to  determine a suitable soil bearing capacity.  STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST The soil under al home must be capable of withstanding the loads imposed byt the weight oft thel home, its support system andi furnishings as well as any loads imposed by wind, Determine the soil bearing capacity in pounds per square foot (psf) before designinga support system. The higher the capacity (psf), ther more weight the soil can hold without unduly compressing. As the soil bearing capacity increases, footings can be reduced in Use one or more of thei following methods to determine the site's soil bearing capacity: Test the soil. Hire a registered geologist, registered engineer, or registered architect to determine the soil classification and maximum allowable soil bear- ing capacity by testing the soili in accordance with generally accepted engineer- ing practice. In addition, the registered professional may designate ai footing capacity (Ibs) based on a site-specific soils evaluation andi footing design. Obtain soil records. Thel local office oft the U.S. Department of Agriculture's Natural Resources Conservation Service www.solsusda.gov) and/or the LAHJ may! have test results and/or soil analyses oni file for the area. Conduct a pocket penetrometer test. Use a pocket penetrometer to estimate 2. Clear ar minimum area of one square foot tot the depth of thel bottom of the 3. Usingt thei instructions provided with the pocket penetrometer, take atl least 4. Discard the high and low readings and average the remaining readings. Round this result down tot the nearest soil bearing value shown in Table 4. 5. Confirm that ther rounded result matches the soil description in Table 4. Determine soil bearing value by visual examination. If one of the options abovei is not available, the values in Table 4 can be used to establish soil bear- ing capacity by visual examination. This method provides lower capacity values than the options above. Accurate soil identification typically requires special training ore expertise. An engineer or building code official may be ablei to assist  LINE  snow or other climactic conditions. SOIL BEARING CAPACITY size or spaced farther apart.  y Soil bearing capacity. Sup- port systems on soils with bearing capacities less than 1,000 psfr must be designed by a registered engineer or registered architect and ap- proved by the LAHJ. Limitations of Pocket pene- trometers. Pocket pene- trometers do not work on sand or gravel. Use to de- termine allowable pressure for these types of soils. If youe encounter al layer of gravel, test the soil under the gravel. Do not put the penetrometer than its on stones as this will larger provide an inaccurate tip read-  allowable soil bearing capacity asi follows: 1. Select al location that will be under ai footing.  ing.  planned footing. five readings.  in classifying the soil found on the site.  17  Packet Pg. 101    Prepare the Site  2.g  TABLE 4. SOIL BEARING CAPACITY BY SOIL TYPE  Soil Classification Soil Description  ASTM D2 2487-00 or Classification D2488-00 (incorpo- Number rated by reference, see: 3285.4) GM,SM GC,SC,ML,CL CG,MH2 CH,MH2 OL,OH,PT  Blow Torque Probes 1586-99 40+  Allowable Soil Bear- Count Value* (inch- ing Pressure (psf)! ASTMD  pounds) More than 550  1 2 3 4A 4B 5  Rock or hard pan cemented sands; course gravel/cobbles; pre- 2,000 loaded silts, clays and coral Sand; siltys sand; clayey sand; silty gravel; medium dense course sands; sandy gravel; 1,500 and very stiff silt, sand clays Loose tor medium dense sands; firmi tos stiff clays and silts; alluvial fills Loose sands; firm clays; alluvial fills Uncompacted fill; peat; organic clays  4,000+  GW,GP, SW, SP, Sandy gravel and gravel; very dense and/or  24-39 351-550 18-23 276-350 12-17 175-275  1,000 1,000  Refert to 3285.202(e) 0-11  Less than175  'The values provided int this table have not been adjusted for overburden pressure, embedment depth, 2Fors soils classified: as CH or MH, without eithert torque probe values or blow countt test results, selected Thet torque test probei is ac device for measuring thet torque value of soils to assisti ine evaluating the holding capacity oft the soili in which the ground anchori is placed. The shaft musth be of suitable length for Thet torque value isa ar measure oft the load resistance provided by the soil whens subject tot the turning or Use default capacity. Use an allowable pressure of 1,500 psf, unless site-specific infor- mation requires the use ofl lower values based on soil classification and type according to Note that soilt types may vary across a home site. Int this case, the soil with the lowest bear- ing capacity should be assumed when designing thes support system. Keep a record of the soil bearing capacity value; it will be used later to design thel home's support system. Obtain the local design frost depth for footings from one of the following methods: Consult with a registered architect, registered engineer, or registered geologist.  water table height ors settlement problems. anchors must be ratedf for a 4B soil. thet full depth oft the ground anchor. twisting force oft the probe. Table 4.  FROST LINE  Thel local authority having jurisdiction (LAHJ). Use Table 4A with the site's Air Freezing Index (AFI). TABLE 4A. DESIGN FROST DEPTH FORI FOOTINGS Air-Freezing Minimum Air-Freezing Minimum  Use Figure 5AI map.  RED A  Index 50 orl lower 250 350 500 1000 1500  Depth (in) 3 9 12 16 24 32  Index 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4250  Depth (in) 40 45 52 57 62 65  7  (8  The depth ofi interior pier footings may bet taken as one half the depth required wheni interior footers are 'All ventsi ins skirting are capable of closing at outdoor temperatures below 40 degrees F. 2Skirtingi is insulated toa a minimum! R-5 when unadjusted frost depthi is upt to 45i inches and a minimum  located withina ane enclosed spacer meeting allt thei following: of R-10v when unadjusted frost depthe exceeds 45i inches. 3Ana approved ground vapor barrieri is applied.  18  Packet Pg. 102    Prepare the 2.g  FROST PENETRATION MAP (AVERAGE DEPTH OF FROST PENETRATION- INI INCHES)  SOURCE: U.S. DEPT. OF COMMERCE WEATHERI BUREAU  Figure 5A. Frost Penetration Map crete anchors? CAPACITY, (p.19).  Will this installation use auger-type ground anchors or con- YES, go to STEP 6, DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING  NO, go to Construct Foundation, (p. 35).  STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY Ifthe anchor holding strength oft the soil is unknown test thes soil per ther requirements of the an- chor manufacturer's installation instructions. Concrete anchors that arel listed and certified by a professional engineer tol have a working load capacity of 31501 Ibs may be used as as substitute for the ground anchors specified within this manual when installed in accordance with manufac- What type of support system will this installation use? For pier and ground or concrete anchor, go to Install Stabiliz- Forl load bearing perimeter wall, go to Construct Foundation,  iv Torque Probe. Ifa at torque probe is used, check with the utility companies for the location of underground ca- bles orp pipes to avoid con- tact with the probe shaft.  turer's installation instructions.  ing Systems, (p.74) (p.35)  19  Packet Pg. 103    Install Footings  2.g  Install Footings  This chapter provides instructions for the design and construction of individual footings that transfer the load from a single pier tot the ground.. A1 footing and pier together (discussed in Set the Home) is referred to as a" "support". Af footing may also be de- signed to carry thel load of multiple piers (often called' "strip" footings). This manual may be used to design unreinforced strip and slab footings. Reinforced strip and slab footings are acceptable if designed by a registered engineer or registered archi-  tect. Thei foundation systems described int this manual have not been designed for flood resistance.  Follow the Steps below:  STEP 1. DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS (p. 20)  STEP 2. DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Perimeter Blocking) (p. 23) STEP 3. DESIGN FRAME ANDI PERIMETER SUPPORTS (Homes With Perimeter Blocking) (p.25)  STEP 4. SELECT FOOTING MATERIALS (p. 30) STEP 5. SIZE FOOTINGS (p. 31) STEP 6. INSTALL FOOTINGS (p. 33) STEP 1. DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS All homes will need supports, and therefore footings, under thet frame, marriage line (for multi-section homes), exterior wall openings and other heavy point loads. All pier locations required at the mating line, perimeter and any special pier support locations, as required by these instructions, willl be identified from the factory by a pier tag, label, paint, or other means and must be visible aftert thel home isi installed. The pier designs, support loads, and footing construction shall be as indicated in the appropriate diagrams, tables, and instructions herein. Where perimeter piers are required along the exterior wall, alternate pier spacing may be usedi inl lieu of thei factory identified locations provided thei instructions oft this manual are satisfied in terms of allowable spacing, pier design, and footing size. PLEASE NOTE: The manufacturer will not be responsible for damaged or removed pier tags. Itist the responsibility of the installer to ensure that all piers are properly positioned in accord- ance with the tables & diagrams contained int thesei installation instructions. Create as sketch of the home thati includes the exterior walls, the frame I-beams and the marriage line(s), ifa a multi-section home. The sketch will be usedi int this chapter to locate each support and note the size oft the corresponding footing. Figure 6i is an example of such  ac completed support plan.  PERIMETER BLOCKING PIERS B B PORCH  DOORF PIERS  I-BEAMFRAME MEMBERS WALLI MARRIAGE PIERS FRAMEI PIERS  Figure 6. Typical point-load support locations  B a B B -   - 4 -BEAMFRAME B-   OPTIONAL CORNER PIERS  B B B E B-  B PERIMETER BLOCKING PIERS  PORCHE POSTI PIERS  -BEAMFRAME MEMBERS  DOORPIERS  20  Packet Pg. 104    Install Footi 2.g  As thel location andl loadi for each support is determined, note ito on the sketch. When select- ing locations for supports, keep in mind that increasing the spacing between supports will increase the load ont that support and the size of the required footing. Point loads exist where ab bearing/structural weight is concentrated and transferred to the foundation at a specific point. Locate as support under each point load, including thet follow- Exterior doors in side walls at both sides of each door (blockingi is not required at Other exterior wall openings four feet and greater at both sides of each opening (including multiple windows that total four feet wide or more without intermediate supports, even ifi individual windows are less thani four feet). Marriage line openings four feet or greater at both sides of each opening. Locations where through-the-rim crossover ducts penetrate the rimj joist at the mar- riage line (unless otherwise noted ins supplemental documents provided with the home or unless the home is constructed with a perimeter frame system).  DETERMINE LOCATIONS ing examples:  exterior doorsi in non-load bearing end walls).  Marriage line columns. Load-bearing porch posts.  One each side of factory installed fireplaces when located on the exterior sidewalls orr marriage walls (except when supported byt the steel header). Adjustable outriggers may only be used to replace piers below exterior door or window open- ings less than 48" and belowi factory installed fireplaces located on the exterior sidewalls or marriage walls. Adjustable outriggers may only be used att these locations when they are in- stalled according to the manufacturer's installation instructions. Adjustable outriggers are not an acceptable replacement for perimeter supports on homes requiring perimeter blocking. Factory installed outriggers and crossmembers may also replace piers below exterior door or window openings less than 48". Additional factory installed floor joists may replace piers be- low openings larger than 48" ifr noted on other supplemental documents. Mark the required point load support locations ont the sketch. Supports are not required where ther manufacturer has reinforced thet floor (such as with additional outriggers or floor joists) ands so noted int the documentation provided with the home.  DOOR OR OPENING LESS THAN 481 IN. INV WIDTH- RIDGEBEAM SPANC  COMBINED SPAN (A+B)  COLUMN POST ORI WALLI LESS1 THAN1 161 IN. IN WIDTH SPANA  Figure 7. Typical point-load support locations along the marriage line.  SPANB  -MAIN I-BEAM  FOOTING TABLE7 CALCULATE LOADS  FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING TABLE5 TABLE7 TABLE5 PER TABLE5  FOOTING SIZEDF FOR SPANAPER TABLE5  SIZEDA AND SIZEDFOR SIZEDAND SIZEDFOR SIZEDI FOR SPACEDI PER SPANCPER SPACEDI PER SPANBPER SPANA+B  Use Tables 5-5c to determine the loads on point load supports (columns). For each support, find the table with the appropriate section width. Then, find the row with the appropriate roofi load: zone and the column corresponding to the span (see Figure 71 for guidance on determining spans - if as support is shared by spans on both sides, add ther respective loads together to arrive at thet total  load under that point). The number in the intersecting cell is the load. Note ther required loads next to each point load support on the sketch.  21  Packet Pg. 105    Install Footings  2.g  TABLES.POINTI LOAD ON FOOTINGS ATI MARRIAGEI LINE OPENINGS (LBS)  20ft Max. Home Width Maximum Openingi in Marriage Line (ft)  Roofl Live Load (PSF) 4 20 30 40 60 80 100 120  8 12 14 16 18 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 1000 1600 2200 2500 2800 3100 3400 4000 4600 5200 5800 6400 7000 7600 2000 2800 3600 4000 4400 4800 5200 6000 6800 7600 8400 9200 10000 10800 2400 3400 4400 4900 5400 5900 6400 7400 8400 9400 10400 11400 12400 13400 3200 4600 6000 6700 7400 8100 8800 10200 11600 13000 14400 15800 17200 18600 4000 5800 7600 8500 9400 10300 11200 13000 14800 16600 18400 20200 22000 23800 4800 7000 9200 10300 11400 12500 13600 15800 18000 20200 22400 24600 26800 29000 5600 8200 10800 12100 13400 14700 16000 18600 21200 23800 26400 29000 31600 34200  TABLE 5a. POINTI LOAD ONI FOOTINGS. ATI MARRIAGE LINE OPENINGS (LBS) 24ft Double! Section /36ft Triple Section Max. Home Width  Roofl Live Load (PSF) 4 20 30 40 60 80 100 120  Maximum Openingi in Marriage Line (ft)  8  12 14 16 18 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48  1120 1840 2560 2920 3280 3640 4000 4720 5440 6160 6880 7600 8320 9040 2320 3280 4240 4720 5200 5680 6160 7120 8080 9040 10000 10960 11920 12880 2800 4000 5200 5800 6400 7000 7600 8800 10000 11200 12400 13600 14800 16000 3760 5440 7120 7960 8800 9640 10480 12160 13840 15520 17200 18880 20560 22240 4720 6880 9040 10120 11200 12280 13360 15520 17680 19840 22000 24160 26320 28480 5680 8320 10960 12280 13600 14920 16240 18880 21520 24160 26800 29440 32080 34720 6640 9760 12880 14440 16000 17560 19120 22240 25360 28480 31600 34720 37840 40960  TABLE! 5b.F POINTI LOAD ONF FOOTINGS ATI MARRIAGE LINE OPENINGS (LBS) 28ft Double Section /42ft Triple Section Max. Home Width  Roofl Live Load (PSF) 4 20 30 40 60 80 100 120  Maximum Openingi in Marriage Line (ft)  8  12 14 16 18 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48  1240 2080 2920 3340 3760 4180 4600 5440 6280 7120 7960 8800 9640 10480 2640 3760 4880 5440 6000 6560 7120 8240 9360 10480 11600 12720 13840 14960 3200 4600 6000 6700 7400 8100 8800 10200 11600 13000 14400 15800 17200 18600 4320 6280 8240 9220 10200 11180 12160 14120 16080 18040 20000 21960 23920 25880 5440 7960 10480 11740 13000 14260 15520 18040 20560 23080 25600 28120 30640 33160 6560 9640 12720 14260 15800 17340 18880 21960 25040 28120 31200 34280 37360 40440 7680 11320 14960 16780 18600 20420 22240 25880 29520 33160 36800 40440 44080 47720  AGRICUTURE  8  22  Packet Pg. 106    Install Footi 2.g  TABLE! 5c. POINTI LOAD ONF FOOTINGS ATI MARRIAGE LINE OPENINGS (LBS) 32ft Double Section /481 ft Triples Section Max. Home Width  Roof Live Load (PSF) 4 20 30 40 60 80 100 120  Maximum Opening in Marriage Line (ft)  8 12 14 16 18 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 1330 2260 3190 3655 4120 4585 5050 5980 6910 7840 8770 9700 10630 11560 2880 4120 5360 5980 6600 7220 7840 9080 10320 11560 12800 14040 15280 16520 3500 5050 6600 7375 8150 8925 9700 11250 12800 14350 15900 17450 19000 20550 4740 6910 9080 10165 11250 12335 13420 15590 17760 19930 22100 24270 26440 28610 5980 8770 11560 12955 14350 15745 17140 19930 22720 25510 28300 31090 33880 36670 7220 10630 14040 15745 17450 19155 20860 24270 27680 31090 34500 37910 41320 44730 8460 12490 16520 18535 20550 22565 24580 28610 32640 36670 40700 44730 48760 52790  Determine from the data plate and/or labels along the perime- Ifp perimeter blocking is NOT required, go to STEP 2, DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Perimeter Blocking), (p.2 23). Ifp perimeter blocking is required, go tos STEP3 3, DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS (Homes With Perimeter Blocking),  ter if the home requires perimeter blocking.  (p.25).  STEP 2. DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Perimeter All homes require regularly spaced supports along all main frame I-beams. Select spacing between supports and sketch them ont the support plan. Keepi in mind that frame supports under homes with 8" deep I-beams may be no moret than eight feet apart. Those under homes with 10" or 12" deep I-beams may be no more than 10f feet apart. Generally, greater distances between supports will require larger footings. Figure 8 shows typical frame sup-  Blocking) DETERMINE LOCATIONS  v Spacing frame supports. There must be as support pier located near the end ofe each I-beam such that therei is no more than 24 inches as measured from the outside edge oft the floor tot the center of the pier. Figure 8. Typical support locations for homes not re- quiring regularly spaced perimeter supports 14  port locations.  DOORF PIERS  I-BEAM FRAME MEMBERS MARRIAGE WALLI PIERS REQUIRED. AT OPENINGS - 4FEETA ANDI LARGER FRAME PIERS  a B  B B B- - B B  E B- B- B- B- B  B   B B B- B1B B B  -BEAMFRAME B B B B B B  PORCH  AGRICU)  I-BEAM FRAME MEMBERS  PORCHI POSTI PIERS  18  DOORPIERS  23  Packet Pg. 107    Install Footings  2.g  DOOR OR OPENINGI LESS THAN4 481 IN.I INWIDTH RIDGEBEAM SPANC  COMBINED SPAN( (A+B)  Figure 8A. Typical mar- riage line support locations for homes not requiring pe- rimeter supports  COLUMNI POST OR WALL, LESS THAN 161 IN. INV WIDTH SPANA  SPANB  MAIN I-BEAM FOOTING FOOTING SIZEDF FOR SIZEDF FOR SPANBPER SPANA+B TABLE5 PERT TABLE5  FOOTING SIZEDI FOR SPANCPER TABLE5  FOOTING SIZEDFOR SPANAPER TABLE5  CALCULATE LOADS  Use Tables 6-6c to determine thel loads on1 frame supports. Find the chart witht the appro- priate sidewall eave overhang. Then, findt the column witht the appropriate roof load: zone and section width. Findt the row corresponding tot the selected support spacing. The number Loads on alli frame supports can be assumed to be equal if support spacing is equal. How- ever, if different support spacings are used then eachs support with a different spacing Interpolation between values is permitted. Loads for piers installed at 5,7, and 91 feet on- center can be estimated by adding the loads for the higher and lower spacing and dividing in half (eg. the load for piers installed at 71 feet on-center for a 16 wide with a 1-1/2" overhang ina2 20 psf Roofl Load Zone would be: 45101 Ibs + 5666 Ibs = 10176 Ibs/ 12=5 5088 Ibs. Note thel location andl load required ofe each support ont thes sketch. (Width listed in each column of thef following charts is the overall width oft the home. Eg. 16ft is as single section, 32ftis a double section and 481 ftis at triple section).  int thei intersecting cell is thel load. should be calculated separately.  AGRICUTURE  TABLE6 6. LOAD ONF FRAMEI PIERF FOOTINGS FORI HOMES NOT REQUIRING PERIMETERI BLOCKINGI EXCEPT AT OPENINGS (LBS)  Roof Load Zone and Max. Home Width (1-1/2" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang)  South (20 psf)  Middle (30 psf)  North (40p psf)  Pier Spacing 10_ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10_ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft Upto4 2195 2519 2843 3140 3410 2400 2764 3128 3462 3765 2605 3009 3413 3783 4120 >4'to6' 3093 3579 4065 4510 4915 3400 3946 4492 4993 5448 3708 4314 4920 5475 5980 >6'to8' 3990 4638 5286 5666 6420 4400 5128 5856 6523 7130 4810 5618 6426 7167 7840 >8'to10 4888 5698 6508 7250 7925 5400 6310 7220 8054 8813 5913 6923 7933 8858 9700 TABLE6 6a. LOAD ON FRAME PIERI FOOTINGSI FORI HOMES NOT REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING EXCEPTA AT OPENINGS (LBS)  Roof Load Zone andI Max. Home Width (6" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang)  South (20 psf)  Middle (30 psf)  North (40 psf)  Pier Spacing 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft Upto4' 2240 2564 2888 3185 3455 2460 2824 3188 3522 3825 2680 3084 3488 3858 4195 >4'to6' 3160 3646 4132 4578 4983 3490 4036 4582 5083 5538 3820 4426 5032 5588 6093 >6'to8' 4080 4728 5376 5750 6510 4520 5248 5976 6643 7250 4960 5768 6576 7317 7990 >8'to10' 5000 5810 6620 7363 8038 5550 6460 7370 8204 8963 6100 7110 8120 9046 9888  24  Packet Pg. 108    Install Footi 2.g  TABLE 6b. LOAD ONF FRAME PIERI FOOTINGS FOR HOMES NOT REQUIRING PERIMETERI BLOCKING EXCEPT AT OPENINGS (LBS)  Roof Load Zone and Max. Home Width (12" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang)  South (20 psf)  Middle (30 psf)  North (40 psf)  Pier Spacing 10/20 ft 12/24ft 14/28/42ft 16/32/48ft 10/20 ft 12/24ft 14/28/42ft 16/32/48ft 10/20 ft 12/24ft 14/28/42ft 16/32/48ft  Upto4 2300 2624 2948 >4'to6' 3250 3736 4222 >6'to8' 4200 4848 5496 >8'to10' 5150 5960 6770  3191 2540 2904 3268 4587 3610 4156 4702 5757 4680 5408 6136 7378 5750 6660 7570  3541 2780 3184 3588 5112 3970 4576 5182 6682 5160 5968 6776 8253 6350 7360 8370  3891 5637 7382 9128  TABLE 6c. LOAD ONF FRAMEI PIERE FOOTINGS FORI HOMES NOTI REQUIRING PERIMETERI BLOCKINGI EXCEPT ATC OPENINGS (LBS) Pier Spacing 20_ft 24ft 28/42ft 32/48ft 20ft 24ft 28/42ft 32/48ft 20ft 24ft 28/42ft 32/48ft Upto4 2420 2744 3068 3311 2700 3064 3428 3701 2980 3384 3788 4091 >4'to6 3430 3916 4402 4767 3850 4396 4942 5352 4270 4876 5482 5937 >6'to8' 4440 5088 5736 6222 5000 5728 6456 7002 5560 6368 7176 7782 >8'to10 5450 6260 7070 7678 6150 7060 7970 8653 6850 7860 8870 9628 Use Table 6d to determine thel loads on supports below openings int the sidewall when perimeter blocking is not required. Find ther row with the appropriate opening span. Then, find the column with the appropriate floor width. The number in the intersecting celli is the load.  Roof Load Zone: and Max. Home Width (24" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang)  South (20 psf)  Middle (30 psf)  North (40 psf)  Calculate Loads  TABLE 6d. LOAD ONI PIERI FOOTINGS AT OPENINGS ALONG THE SIDEWALL (LBS) Roofl Load Zone: andl Max. Home Width (24" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang)  South (20 psf)  South (20 psf)  Pier Spacing 10/20 ft 12/24ft 14/28/42ft 16/32/48ft 18f ft Pier Spacing 10/20ft 12/24ft 14/28/42ft 16/32/48ft 18ft  Upto3 1025 1100 1175 >3'to4' 1150 1240 1330 >4'to5' 1275 1380 1485 Upto3 1200 1300 1400 >3'to4' 1360 1480 1600 >4'to5' 1520 1660 1800 Upto3' 1375 1500 1625 >3'to4 1570 1720 1870 >4'to5' 1765 1940 2115  1244 1306 1413 1488 1581 1669  >5'to6 1400 1520 1640 >6'to8 1650 1800 1950 >8'to10 1900 2080 2260 >5'to6 1680 1840 2000 >6'to8 2000 2200 2400 >8'to10 2320 2560 2800 >5'to6 1960 2160 2360 >6'to8 2350 2600 2850 >8'to10 2740 3040 3340  1750 1850 2088 2213 2425 2575 2147 2280 2583 2750 3020 3220 2543 2710 3079 3288 3615 3865  Middle (30 psf)  Middle (30psf)  Pier Spacing 10/20 ft 12/24ft 14/28/42ft 16/32/48ft 18ft Pier Spacing 10/20ft 12/24ft 14/28/42ft 16/32/48ft 18ft  1492 1575 1710 1810 1928 2045 1740 1844 2008 2133 2275 2421  North (40p psf)  North (40 psf)  Pier Spacing 10/20 ft 12/24ft 14/28/42ft 16/32/48ft 18ft Pier Spacing 10/20ft 12/24ft 14/28/42ft 16/32/48ft 18ft  go to STEP 4. SELECT FOOTING MATERIALS (p.30)  STEP 3. DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER_SUPPORISHomes  With Perimeter Blocking)  RED EN  DETERMINE LOCATIONS perimeter support  Depending on design and location, some homes require regularlysp  eter's supe  ports along all of the sidewalls and marriage walls in addition toifyame supports. ifrequired, sidewalls and marniagewalls and noted on the Datal Plate. ApergpeAup at  locations identified will be  hv There must be as support  byl labels attached long the-bottem,oft the ME (8 Spacing frame supports.  25    Packet Pg. 109    Install Footings  2.g  each oft thel label locations. Additionally, perimeter support locations may! be identified bya a white stripe or mark beneath thel home on the! bottom board material. Perimeter blocking Ifrequired, perimeter supports are only needed on bearing walls. For 20 psf roof live load, perimeter support is only required at exterior doors and other openings 48" and larger, un- less noted otherwise. Supports may be added at each corner ofe each endwall for leveling purposes, but are not required. Bearing walls are those walls that support the ends of roof trusses or rafters (typically sidewalls and marriage walls butr not end walls ofr main units or To minimize the number of required perimeter supports, space them evenly between point load supports as shown in Figure 9 and Figure 10 (but not under open spans). These fig- ures identify typical support locations for homes requiring perimeter supports.  pier located near the end ofe each I-beam such that therei is no more than 24 the inches outside as measured edge oft the from floor tot the center of the pier.  supports must be placed no further than 8f feet on-center.  sidewalls oft tag units).  PERIMETER BLOCKING PIERS a B -B B - B- a -E PORCH  DOORPIERS  Figure 9. Typical support lo- cations for homes requiring perimeter supports  I-BEAM FRAME MEMBERS WALLF MARRIAGE PIERS FRAMEI PIERS  OPTIONAL CORNER PIERS  B B - - 01B B I-BEAMFRAME e B B  PORCHPOSTI PIERS  PERIMETER BLOCKING PIERS  I-BEAM FRAME MEMBERS  DOORPIERS  Figure 10. Typical marriage line support locations for homes requiring perimeter supports  DOOR OR OPENINGI LESS THAN4BIN.INWIDTH RIDGEBEAM  COMBINED SPAN(A+B)  COLUMNI POST ORI WALLI LESS THAN1 161 IN.INV WIDTH SPANA  SPANC  SPANB  -MAIN I-BEAM  FOOTING TABLE7 CALCULATE LOADS  FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING FOOTING TABLE5 TABLE7 TABLE5 PER1 TABLE5  FOOTING SIZEDI FOR SPANAPER TABLE5  SIZED/ AND SIZEDF FOR SIZED AND SIZEDI FOR SIZED FOR SPACEDF PER SPANCPER SPACEDI PER SPANBPER SPANA+B  Use Tables 7-7c to determine the loads on frame and perimeter supports for homes requir- ing perimeter blocking. Find the chart with the appropriate sidewall eave overhang. Then, responding tot thes selected support spacing. The values ini thei intersecting cells are the loads for the frame, perimeter and marriage line supports respectively. Loads on supports of a given type (frame, perimeter or marriage) can be assumed tol be support with a different spacing should be calculated: separately. Loads for piers installed at 5, 7 and 91 feet on-center can be estimated by adding thel loads  v installed within 41 feet of col- umn supports and the corner oft thel home whent the home is designated for perimeter Tables 5 for homes greater than 20 psfr roof load include  find the column with the appropriate roofl load and section width. Find the group of rows cor- Ap perimeter support must be equal ifs support spacing is equal. However, if different support spacings are used then each blocking. The loads listedi in  26  Packet Pg. 110    Install Footi 2.g the additional 41 foots span.  fort the higher andl lower spacing and dividingi in half (eg. thel loadi fori frame piers installed at 71 feet on-center for a 16 wide with a 1-1/2" overhang in a 20 psf Roofl Load Zone would be: 2823 Ibs + 36301 Ibs = 64531 Ibs/2=3 3227 Ibs). Note thel location and load required ofe each support ont thes sketch. (Width listed in each column of thet following charts is the overall width oft the home. Eg. 16ft isas single section, 32ftis a double section and 481 ftis ai triple section).  TABLE7.LOAD ONF FRAME ANDI PERIMETER PIERI FOOTINGS FORI HOMES REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING (LBS)  Roof Loadz Zone andI Max. Home Width (1-1/2" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang)  Pier  South (20 psf)  Middle (30psf)  North (40 psf)  North (60p psf)  Spacing Location 10_ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10_ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft Upto4' Frame 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 Upto4' Sidewall 1175 1295 1415 1525 1625 1380 1540 1700 1847 1980 1585 1785 1985 2168 2335 1995 2275 2555 2812 3045 >4'to6' Frame 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 >4'to6' Sidewall 1563 1743 1923 2088 2238 1870 2110 2350 2570 2770 2178 2478 2778 3053 3303 2793 3213 3633 4018 4368 >6'to8' Frame 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 >6'to8' Sidewall 1950 2190 2430 2650 2850 2360 2680 3000 3293 3560 2770 3170 3570 3937 4270 3590 4150 4710 5223 5690 >8'to10' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863  Pier  North (80 psf)  North (100p psf)  North (120 psf)  Spacing Location 10 ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10 ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10 ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft Upto4' Frame 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 Upto4' Sidewall 2405 2765 3125 3455 3755 2815 3255 3695 4098 4465 3225 3745 4265 4742 5175 >4'to6' Frame 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 >4'to6' Sidewall 3408 3948 4488 4983 5433 4023 4683 5343 5948 6498 4638 5418 6198 6913 7563 >6'to8 Frame 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 >6'to8' Sidewall 4410 5130 5850 6510 7110 5230 6110 6990 7797 8530 6050 7090 8130 9083 9950 >8'to10' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863  AGRICUITURE 00109. OF TEN  27  Packet Pg. 111    Install Footings  2.g  TABLE 7a. LOAD ONF FRAME ANDI PERIMETERI PIERE FOOTINGS FORH HOMES REQUIRINGI PERIMETER BLOCKING (LBS)  Roof Load Zone and Max. Home Width (6" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang)  Pier  South (20 psf)  Middle( (30p psf)  North (40 psf)  North (60p psf)  Spacing Location 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10f ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft Upto4 Frame 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 Upto4 Sidewall 1220 1340 1460 1570 1670 1440 1600 1760 1907 2040 1660 1860 2060 2243 2410 2100 2380 2660 2917 3150 >4'to6 Frame 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 >4'to6' Sidewall 1630 1810 1990 2155 2305 1960 2200 2440 2660 2860 2290 2590 2890 3165 3415 2950 3370 3790 4175 4525 >6'to8' Frame 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 >6'to8 Sidewall 2040 2280 2520 2740 2940 2480 2800 3120 3413 3680 2920 3320 3720 4087 4420 3800 4360 4920 5433 5900 >8'to10' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863  Pier  North (80 psf)  North (100 psf)  North (120p psf)  Spacing Location 10 ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10 ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 10 ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft Upto4 Frame 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 1420 1624 1828 2015 2185 Upto4' Sidewall 2540 2900 3260 3590 3890 2980 3420 3860 4263 4630 3420 3940 4460 4937 5370 >4'to6 Frame 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 1930 2236 2542 2823 3078 >4'to6' Sidewall 3610 4150 4690 5185 5635 4270 4930 5590 6195 6745 4930 5710 6490 7205 7855 >6'to8 Frame 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 2440 2848 3256 3630 3970 >6'to8' Sidewall 4680 5400 6120 6780 7380 5560 6440 7320 8127 8860 6440 7480 8520 9473 10340 >8'to10' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863 2950 3460 3970 4438 4863  AGRICUIURE  (8  28  Packet Pg. 112    Install Footi 2.g  TABLE 7b. LOAD ONF FRAME ANDI PERIMETERI PIERI FOOTINGSI FORI HOMES REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING (LBS)  Roofl Loadz Zonea and Max. Home Width (12" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang)  Pier  South (20 psf)  Middle (30 psf)  North (40 psf)  North (60p psf)  Spacing Location 20f ft 24/36ft 28/42ft 32/48ft 20 ft 24/36ft 28/42ft_ 32/48ft 20ft 24/36ft 28/42ft 32/48ft 20 ft/24/36ft2 28/42ft 32/48ft Upto4' Frame 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 Upto4' Sidewall 1280 1400 1520 1610 1520 1680 1840 1960 1760 1960 2160 2310 2240 2520 2800 3010 Upto4 Marriagewall 1760 2000 2240 2420 2160 2480 2800 3040 2560 2960 3360 3660 3360 3920 4480 4900 >4'to6' Frame 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 >4'to6' Sidewall 1720 1900 2080 2215 2080 2320 2560 2740 2440 2740 3040 3265 3160 3580 4000 4315 >4'to6 Marriagewall 2440 2800 3160 3430 3040 3520 4000 4360 3640 4240 4840 5290 4840 5680 6520 7150 >6'to8' Frame 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 >6'to8' Sidewall 2160 2400 2640 2820 2640 2960 3280 3520 3120 3520 3920 4220 4080 4640 5200 5620 >6'to8' Marriagewall 3120 3600 4080 4440 3920 4560 5200 5680 4720 5520 6320 6920 6320 7440 8560 9400 >8'to1 10' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353  Pier  North (80 psf)  North (100 psf)  North( (120 psf)  Spacing Location 20f ft 24ft 28/42ft 32/48ft 20 ft 24ft 28/42ft_ 32/48ft 20ft 24ft 28/42f ft 32/48ft Upto4" Frame 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 Upto4' Sidewall 2720 3080 3440 3710 3200 3640 4080 4410 3680 4200 4720 5110 Upto4 Marriagewall 4160 4880 5600 6140 4960 5840 6720 7380 5760 6800 7840 8620 >4'to6' Frame 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 >4'to6' Sidewall 3880 4420 4960 5365 4600 5260 5920 6415 5320 6100 6880 7465 >4'to6' Marriagewall 6040 7120 8200 9010 7240 8560 9880 10870 8440 10000 11560 12730 >6'to8' Frame 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 >6'to8' Sidewall 5040 5760 6480 7020 6000 6880 7760 8420 6960 8000 9040 9820 >6'to8' Marriagewall 7920 9360 10800 11880 9520 11280 13040 14360 11120 13200 15280 16840 >8'to10' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353  AGRICUIURE  (8  29  Packet Pg. 113    Install Footings  2.g  TABLE 7c.L LOAD ONF FRAME ANDI PERIMTERI PIERE FOOTINGS FORI HOMES REQUIRING PERIMETERI BLOCKING (LBS)  Roofl Load Zone and Max. Home Width (24" Max. Sidewall Eave Overhang)  Pier  South (20 psf)  Middle (30 psf)  North (40 psf)  North (60 psf)  Spacing Location 20f ft 24/36ft 28/42ft 32/48ft 20 ft 24/36ft 28/42ft 32/48ft 20ft 24/36ft 28/42ft 32/48ft 20f Ft/24/36 28/42ft 32/48ft Upto4' Frame 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 Upto4 Sidewall 1400 1520 1640 1730 1680 1840 2000 2120 1960 2160 2360 2510 2520 2800 3080 3290 Upto4 Marriagewall 1760 2000 2240 2420 2160 2480 2800 3040 2560 2960 3360 3660 3360 3920 4480 4900 >4'to6' Frame 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 >4'to6' Sidewall 1900 2080 2260 2395 2320 2560 2800 2980 2740 3040 3340 3565 3580 4000 4420 4735 >4'to6' Marriagewall 2440 2800 3160 3430 3040 3520 4000 4360 3640 4240 4840 5290 4840 5680 6520 7150 >6'to8' Frame 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 >6'to8 Sidewall 2400 2640 2880 3060 2960 3280 3600 3840 3520 3920 4320 4620 4640 5200 5760 6180 >6'to8' Marriagewall 3120 3600 4080 4440 3920 4560 5200 5680 4720 5520 6320 6920 6320 7440 8560 9400 >8'to1 10' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353  Pier  North (80 psf)  North (100 psf)  North (120p psf)  Spacing Location 20 ft 24ft 28/42ft 32/48ft 20 ft 24ft 28/42ft 32/48ft 20 ft 24ft 28/42ft 32/48ft Upto4 Frame 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 1420 1624 1828 1981 Upto4 Sidewall 3080 3440 3800 4070 3640 4080 4520 4850 4200 4720 5240 5630 Upto4' Marriagewall 4160 4880 5600 6140 4960 5840 6720 7380 5760 6800 7840 8620 >4'to6' Frame 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 1930 2236 2542 2772 >4'to6 Sidewall 4420 4960 5500 5905 5260 5920 6580 7075 6100 6880 7660 8245 >4'to6 Marriagewall 6040 7120 8200 9010 7240 8560 9880 10870 8440 10000 11560 12730 >6'to8' Frame 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 2440 2848 3256 3562 >6'to8 Sidewall 5760 6480 7200 7740 6880 7760 8640 9300 8000 9040 10080 10860 >6'to8' Marriagewall 7920 9360 10800 11880 9520 11280 13040 14360 11120 13200 15280 16840 >8'to10' Frame 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353 2950 3460 3970 4353  AGRICUITURE  21518  STEP 4. SELECT FOOTING MATERIAL Select one oft the products and materials from Table 81 for thet footings.  TABLE 8. FOOTING MATERIALS  Material Poured concrete Pre-cast concrete ABS plastic  Appropriate Use All soil types All soil types Instructions Consult system manufac-  Specification  Minimum 6" thick poured-in-place concrete pads, slabs, or ribbons with atl leasta a 28 day compressive strength of3,000 psi. Cast-in-place concrete footings may also require reinforcing steel based on acceptable engineering practice, the design Minimum 4"t thick nominal precast concrete pads meeting or exceeding ASTM C 90-02a, Standard! Specification for Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units, without reinforcement, with atl least a 28 day compressive strength of 1,200 psi use int the soil classification att the site, listed orl labeled for the required load capac-  loads, and site specific soil conditions.  Per Pad Manufacturer's Use in accordance with the pad manufacturer's instructions. Must be certified for  ity. May! be placed directly on soil or concrete. Consult system manufacturer 30  Proprietary systems turer  Packet Pg. 114    Install Footi 2.g  Will footings be concrete? the Home (p.38). STEP 5. SIZE FOOTINGS ofe each footing as follows:  YES, go tos STEP 5, SIZE FOOTING, (p.31).  NO, see footing system manufacturer's instructions, then go to Set  Once thel load ont the footing and thes soil bearing capacity are known, calculate the size 1. From Table 9 determine ift the pier is to be of single stack blocks (8 inch x16 2. Locate the group of columns in Table 10 with the soil bearing capacity deter- minedi in Prepare the Site, STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL BEARING CAPACITY ANDI FROST LINE (p. 17). Use the next lowest value ift the exact value does 3. Find the row corresponding tot the pier capacity required by Tables 5,6 6or7. Then, read across thet table to determine the minimum required footing area for the corresponding pier capacity and soil bearing capacity. 4. The required footing size and pier capacity may be changed by selecting differ-  inch) or double stack blocks (16i inch x 16 inch).  not appear.  ent support spacing. TABLE 9. PIER CONFIGURATION Pier Con- Height figuration Single Stack Less than: 36i in* Double Stack 67" Max. Triple Stack 67" Max. Reinforced Double 108" Max. **  Maximum load (Ibs) Without With Mortar Mortar  Configuration  Single stack! blocks with longs side perpendicular tot framel I-beam or 6,500 7,680 parallel top perimeter rail (rimj joist) Double, interlocked blocks Triple, interlocked blocks Double, interlocked blocks  13,000 15,360 19,500 23,034 NA  39,500  S Single stack piers may! be constructed upi to 54" max. height only wheni installed as pe- ** Cross reference maximum allowable pier height with maximum floor height listedi in frame tiedown charts. If maximum height listed inf frame tiedown charts is exceeded then designs must be provided by a registered professional engineer or registered architect.  rimeter and marriage line support piers.  AGRICUTUKE  31  Packet Pg. 115    Install Footings  2.g  TABLE 10. FOOTING DIMENSIONS  Note: To calculate a square or rectan- gular footer: Length (in) x Width (in): = Area Example: 16inx20i in: =: 320 inches To calculate a round footer: 3.14x. .25 x Diameter (in)> xI Di- ameter (in): = Area Example: Fora a 22" diameter footing 3.14x-25x22inxz 22in=380 sq. inches  Pier Capacity (Ibs) 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 3900 4000 4100 4200 4300 4400 4500 4600 4700 4800 4900 5000 5200 5400 5600 5800 6000 6200 6400 6600 6800 7000 7200 7400 7600 7800 8000 8500 9000 9500 10000 10500 11000 11500 12000 12500 13000 13500 14000 14500 15000 15500 16000  SoilE Bearing Capacity (PSF) Required Footing Area (square inches) 144 128 128 128 128 173 128 128 128 128 202 134 128 128 128 230 154 128 128 128 259 173 130 128 128 288 192 144 128 128 317 211 158 128 128 346 230 173 138 128 374 250 187 150 128 403 269 202 161 134 432 288 216 173 144 446 298 223 179 149 461 307 230 184 154 475 317 238 190 158 490 326 245 196 163 504 336 252 202 168 518 346 259 207 173 533 355 266 213 178 547 365 274 219 182 562 374 281 225 187 576 384 288 230 192 590 394 295 236 197 605 403 302 242 202 619 413 310 248 206 634 422 317 253 211 648 432 324 259 216 662 442 331 265 221 677 451 338 271 226 691 461 346 276 230 706 470 353 282 235 720 480 360 288 240 749 499 374 300 250 778 518 389 311 259 806 538 403 323 269 835 557 418 334 278 864 576 432 346 288 893 595 446 357 298 922 614 461 369 307 950 634 475 380 317 979 653 490 392 326 1008 672 504 403 336 1037 691 518 415 346 1066 710 533 426 355 1094 730 547 438 365 1123 749 562 449 374 1152 768 576 461 384 1224 816 612 490 408 1296 864 648 518 432 1368 912 684 547 456 1440 960 720 576 480 1512 1008 756 605 504 1584 1056 792 634 528 1656 1104 828 662 552 1728 1152 864 691 576 1800 1200 900 720 600 1872 1248 936 749 624 1944 1296 972 778 648 2016 1344 1008 806 672 2088 1392 1044 835 696 2160 1440 1080 864 720 2232 1488 1116 893 744 2304 1536 1152 922 768 32  Round Footer  1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 4000 Diameter  128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 130 133 137 140 144 148 151 155 158 162 166 169 173 176 180 187 194 202 209 216 223 230 238 245 252 259 266 274 281 288 306 324 342 360 378 396 414 432 450 468 486 504 522 540 558 576  sq.  1 8 n C h  2 4 i n C h  AGRICUITURE 201 09  3 0 i n  Packet Pg. 116    Install Footi 2.g  Design individual or unreinforced strip footings to comply with the following additional To keep footings directly under I-beams and other support points, size them slightly larger than the minimum required areai to allows slight adjustment of the Design footings with at footing extension (projection beyond the base oft the pier) no greater than thet footing thickness (Figure 11). Increase footing thick-  requirements (does not apply to unreinforced slab design):  pier location during home installation. ness ifr necessary.  Figure 11. Maximum footing extensions  16"BLOCK "eL 24" 16" 16" NO 16" YES- 45 16"BLOCK PRECAST ORF POUREDF FOOTER WHICHEXTENDSI PAST/ ALLOWABLE PROJECTIONI MAY! NOTI BE INCLUDEDI INFOOTER/ AREA  FOOTINGI EXTENDS NO! EXTENDSBY YESBY IS1 THICKNESS ORLESS  MORE THANITS 24" THICKNESS 44 SPLIT FOOTING TYPI NO EXTENDSI MORE THANC ONE THIRD ITSV WIDTH  TYPL  45  SPLITFOOTING YES EXTENDSLESS THANC ONE THIRD ITSWIDTH  The footing sizes shown arei for square pads and are based on the surface ar- ea (square inches). Design non-square footings such that the area and thick- ness is equal to or greater than the area oft the square footing shown in Table 10 and the distance from the edge of the pier to the edge of the footingi is not more than the thickness oft thet footing. Footers may be either 4-inch precast or poured or a combination of both with a combined thickness complying with the  requirements of Table 10A. TABLE 10A. FOOTER THICKNESS Pouredi in Place Footing for Single Stack Pier Min. Footer Max Footer (in) (inxin) (sq.in) 6 28x20 8 32x24 10 36x28 12 40x32  Poured in Place Footing for Double Stack Pier Min. Footer Max Footer (in) (inxin) 6 28x28 8 32x32 10 36x36 12 40x40 14 44x44 16 48x48  Thickness Dimension Max. Area Thickness Dimension Max. Area  (sq.i in) 784 1024 1296 1600 1936 2304  560 768 1008 1280  AGRICUITURE  -  STEP 6. INSTALL FOOTINGS Construct thei footings as follows: spacing and tabulated spacing.  Maintain the distance between adjacent piers to within 10% of thet tabulated Whenever possible, place pier supports directly under the required locations. If plumbing, electrical or mechanical equipment interferes, place supports no more than 6i inches ine either direction oft the support point. Recess perimeter pier supports no more than 10 inches from the edge of the floor with added support as shown in Figure 12.  sot the  y Placing Concrete anchors. Ifanchors will be placed in concrete followi instructions inl Install Stabilizing Sys- tem (p. 74)to determine anchor layout. Either place anchors immediately after the concrete has been poured or drill themi in after the concrete has set.  average distance between piers is equal to or less than the  33  Packet Pg. 117    Install Footings  2.g  TYPICALFLOOR JOIST  Figure 12. Perimeter sup- ports  WALL EXTERIOR  WOODI WEDGES PRESSURE TREATED OR HARDWOOD 4x4 OR1 TWO CAPI BLOCK 2x4's! NAILED TOGETHER ONE EDGE. MUST SPANA MINIMUMO OF1 TWOFLOOR JOISTS. 10"MAXIMUM SETBACKF FROM EDGE OF FLOOR  FLOORF RIM- JOIST  BLOCKSI PARALLEL WITHE EDGE OFF FLOOR  BLOCKS PARALLEL ANDF RECESSED BACK FROMI EDGE OF FLOOR  Iffootings are rectangular, orient them so that thel long side is perpendicular to Place the bottom ofi footings on undisturbed soil or fill compacted to at least Int freezing climates protect footings from the effects ofi frost heave in accord- ance with any! LAHJ requirements (see Prepare the Site, p. 15). Place thel bot- tom of the footings below the frostl line. Insulated foundations or other frost pro- tection options are acceptable when designed by a registered engineer. Mono- lithics slabs are allowed above frost depth when designed by a registered engi- neert to resist the effects of frost heave. Anchorage requirements must be in- cluded with each registered engineer design when the anchorage require- ments listedi in this manual cannot be accommodated. Make sure the top surface oft thet footing is level, flat and smooth.  the home's -beam.  90% of its maximum relative density.  Excavation. If excavation is required, mark thet footing locations on the ground with stakes before beginning to dig.  go to Set the Home (p.38)  34  Packet Pg. 118    Construct Founda  2.g  Construct Foundation (FOR HOMES WITHI LOAD BEARING PERIMETER WALL)  This chapter provides guidelines and recommendations for the design and construction of al basement or crawispace foundation using a load bearing perimeter wall. AI load bearing perimeter wallf foundation system uses a wall along the outer edge of the home to support the home's outside walls. This perimeter support works with interior supports such as piers, columns and cross beams that support the home's frame and, if multi-section, marriage line.  Follow the Steps below:  STEP 1. OBTAIN AI FOUNDATION DESIGN (p. 35)  STEP 2. EXCAVATE (p. 35)  STEP 3. CONSTRUCT THE FOOTING OR SLAB (p. 35) STEP 4. CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL (p. 35) STEP 5. INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS (p.37) STEP 6. WATERPROOF FOUNDATION WALL (p. 37) STEP 7. BACKFILL AND GRADE (p. 37)  STEP 1. OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN  Ifal load bearing perimeter wall foundation design has not been provided by thel home manufacturer, itis the responsibility of the retailer and/or home owner to provide a de- sign approved by an engineer or architect, licensed int thes state where the home willl be installed. The approved design must comply with the LAHJ regulations fori foundation Thet foundation perimeter bearing wall must be supported with a concrete slab or continuous strip footing around the perimeter of the home. Interior piers must be supported by a slab ori footings. Ifi footings are used underi interior piers, they may be designed asi in Design Frame and Perimeter Supports, Slabs must extend tot the edges of thel home. IMPORTANT: Verify the di- mensions of the actual floor width (eg. a 28' wide home does not meas- Footings and slabs must be protected from the effects ofi frostl heave by ex- tending thef footings to or below thet frost line or by using ai frost protected  v Using engineered designs. This section is NOT intend- ed to provide a complete design for a buildable foun- dation. A complete design must be obtained thati is suitable for the local area and sealed by a professional engineer or registered archi- tect, licensed int the state. Alternate foundation designs must be approved by the manufactururer and DAPIA. Priort to obtaining an alterna- tive design contact thel home building facility for available approved alternative de- signs ori instructions for submitting an alternative de- sign.The manufacturer is capable of providing limited model specific foundation designs upon request. Foundation ready home. Make sure that homes to be installed on al basement or a crawlspace have been or- dered with ar recessed frame or as al basement-ready frame system, where the  design, waterproofing and drainage, and the following:  p.25.  ure 281 feet in width). shallow foundation design. STEP 2. EXCAVATE backfill or site grading purposes.  Excavate for the foundation, properly disposing of the earth that is not needed for STEP 3. CONSTRUCT THE FOOTINGS OR SLAB Construct the foundation according to the approved design, including the perimeter foundation wall, drainage system, footing(s) and/or slab. STEP 4. CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL Unless the approved design requires otherwise, construct the perimeter wall with mor- tared and reinforced concrete blocks or reinforced poured-in-place concrete. Install re- inforcement according to the approved design orl LAHJ. Install ventilation and access openings according tot the approved design, ori ifr not specified, according to the re- quirements in Complete Under the Home, STEP 31 INSTALL SKIRTING (p. 113).  35  Packet Pg. 119    Construct Foundation  2.g  Where open slatted deck boards are used at recessed entries and porches, provisions must be made to ensure wateri is not permitted to draini into the area under the condi- tioned portion of the home. Any perimeter type skirting or foundation wall should bei in- stalled tot follow the exterior oft the wall oft the! home and permit the areal beneath the When constructing pockets for a cross beam system, measure the beam depth and lo- cate the pockets carefully. Iti is critical that the home's frame rests oni top of the cross beam and the perimeter of thet floor rests squarely on thet foundation wall sill plate (Figure 13). Leave roomi for at two-inch nominal, hardwood spacer on top of the wall pockets (to prevent corrosion, the steel beams must not bei in direct contact with con- crete). Leave atl least one inchi fori thermal expansion at the ends oft the beams and maintain a minimum oft twoi inches of bearing area for the beams int the pockets (yield- ap pressure treated wood sill plate (minimum 2x X 6)t tot thet top of thet foundation wall. Ift the home's siding cannot be nailed through, use a2x1 10 sill plate that extends into thef foundation 1-1/4 inches (Figure 14). The home can then be connected tot the foundation byf fastening the sill plate intot thet floorj joists from below. Connect the home tot the foundation according tot the approved design (See Step 1).  frame is designed to avoid interference with thet founda- tion wall. Checking the water table. For basements, check for a high water table. The water table may vary seasonally or based on weather condi- tions. A geologist can per- form an algae test to de- termine the water table lev- el. Thet foundation design must account for al high wa- ter table. Level the wall. Make sure thet foundation is level and straight with no more than a 1/4 inch vertical variation over the entire foundation and no more than 1/8 inch vertical variation over any two-foot length. Check for Plates. When us- inga a cross beam system, check and compensate for reinforcement plates that add thickness to the chas- sis beam at axle locations. 13. Cross beam in- Figure stallation  porch to drain water awayi from the! home.  ing ar minimum pocket depth of three inches).  Bolt  FLOOR MAINIBEAM CROSSBEAM  FLOOR MAINI I-BEAM- CROSSBEAM  STEELF PLATE SPACER(S)  8"x8"x16" CONCRETE BLOCKORPOURED WALL  Figure 14. Connection using 2x1 10 sill plate  FLOORJOIST 2X10SILL PLATE FASTENER FOUNDATION WALL 36  Packet Pg. 120    Construct Founda  2.g  STEP 5. INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS  Install piers, columns and cross beams to support thei interior of thel home according to  the approved design.  Footing heights. Pour foot- ings toa al height that willr re- duce the need to cut blocks or shim when building pe- rimeter walls and piers. v Backfilling. Backfill against basement walls only after the home is connected to thet foundation or the basement walls may deflect inward or collapse.  STEP 6. DAMP PROOF FOUNDATION WALL  Damp or water proof foundation walls as necessary according to localj jurisdiction re-  quirements.  Is this a basement foundation? YES, go to Set the Home, (p. 38).  NO, go tOSTEP7. BACKFILL AND GRADE, (p. 37)  STEP 7. BACKFILL AND GRADE  Backfill against the foundation wall tot the height oft the damp proofing.Take care to not damage the drainage system. Grade thef fill as per Prepare the Site (p. 15). Does the approved foundation design call for ground anchors?  YES, go to Install Stabilizing Systems, (p. 74). NO, go to Set the Home, (p. 38).  37  Packet Pg. 121    Set the Home  2.g  Set the Home tion) onto thef foundation.  This chapter describes the process of installing the firsts section of the home (for single section homes this is the only sec-  Follow the Steps below: STEP 1. PREPARE FOR SET (p. 38) STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION (p. 38) STEP 3. LIFT HOME (p. 38) STEP 4. CONSTRUCT PIERS (p. 40) STEP 1. PREPARE FOR SET Before beginning thel home set, complete thet following:  Confirm thatt the site is properly cleared and graded (see Prepare the Site,p p. Ensure that the footings are in place and properly located. Install any utilities that will be difficult toi install (e.g. those below grade be- neath the home) after the! home isi in place. Secure or remove from the! home and properly store all ship loose items (refer tos shipping documents fori items shipped with the! home). Inspect the homei interior, exterior and all provided materials, appliances and equipment. Immediately report any damage or shortages to the manufacturer. Check thatt the actual length and width of the home matches the foundation Check that the two main diagonal measurements of the foundation are equal. Check that the foundation walls and other support points are within 1/4 inch of level overall and within 1/8i inch of level within anyf four foot distance. For multi-section homes, check that each pair of diagonal measurements for each portion of the foundation corresponding to a home section are equal. For multi-section homes, findt the electrical bonding lugs on thet front or rear outriggers. Reverse them tot thei inside of the outrigger so they will be access- If using a cross beam system, remove thet frame's shackle hanger ifity willi in-  v Clearances under the home. After the homei is leveled, the resulting dis- tance between the bottom oft the entire chassis main frame beam and the ground must be nol less than 12 inches. Utilize proper cribbing. Homes weigh several tons. No one should be under the home (whether itis moving or stationary) unless proper cribbingis in place (Figure 15). Fail- ure to utilize proper crib- bing may resulti in serious injury or death.  15.  For perimeter bearing wall foundations:  walls.  ible after the home is placed on the foundation walls. terfere with proper placement of the! beam. STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION  Leveling During Jacking. Keep the home's floor as level as possible during jacking. Twisting or warping the floor can dam- age thes structure and finish- ing. Use as many jacks as necessary to keep the floor flat and level.  Position thel home section in its final location (ifp possible, move the heaviest section of the homei into place first). Then place materials needed to construct support piers near their final locations under the home as determined inl Install Footings, (p.20). There are three primary methods available top place the home ont the foundation: jack- ing, rolling and craning. Jacks, often withr roller systems, are typically used for pier and anchor foundations; roller systems are commonly usedi for crawispace foundations with load bearing perimeter walls; and cranes are most commonly used for basement foun- Ifj jacks are to be used, comply with all jacking safety precautions and the procedure below. Lifting thel home withj jacks involves potential risks and must be done with ut-  STEP 3. LIFT HOME  dations. JACKS  38  Packet Pg. 122    Set the Hc 2.g  most care and caution. Failure to follow jacking warnings and procedures may result in seriousi injury or death. Please read the. Jacking Safety Precautions before lifting the  home with jacks.  JACKING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  No one should be under the home's I-beams while thej jacks are being operat- Usej jacks only for raising the home. Do not rely on the jacks to support the Ifp possible, raise the home only on one: side so thatt the other sidei is in contact with the ground. Leave thel hitch connected to the vehicle or other stabilizing Make sure adequate safety cribbing (Figure 15)i is in place whenever the Use a minimum of two commercial quality jacks, each with a rating of at least Jack only on the main chassis I-beam, centering jacks directly under the Dor notj jack on a seam (joint between flanges of twin I-beams). To distribute the concentrated loads from jacks to I-beam, place a minimum 3/8-inch thick steel plate, a C-channel, a 1%-inchi thick hardwood block or a commercial, jacking plate, between the main chassis I-beam and thej jack head. Locate the jack base ont firm ground. Never jack ont freshly disturbed soil or where an underground sewer pipe may be located. Use af firm support under the jack base to prevent tipping or settling of thej jack. Ar minimum 16" X 16" or larger wood or rigid fiberglass padi is recommended. Never use concrete blocks as a support for aj jack. Never use jacks that are leaking or are in need of repair. Follow the jacking sequence outlined below to avoid overstressing structural members: 1. Block wheels. Block the wheels so the house does not roll. 2. Install cribbing. Install safety cribbing (Figure 15)  ed or while the home is supported only on thej jacks.  home. equipment. Obey all OSHA regulations. homei is placed on jacks. 121 tons. beam.  Figure 15. Stack 4"x 6"by 5' long timbers as shown tot form safety timbers. Place safety timbers under home behind axle area and under hitch.  0 C  3. Level lengthwise. Locate onej jack at the hitch and level the section leng- thwise (such that thet front and rear oft the section are at the same height). 4. Locate frame jacks. Place a minimum of one jack ini front oft thet first spring hanger and another just behind the last spring hanger oft the I-beam on the side oft the home thati is lowest (making sure not to place jacks where the piers will go). Place jacks no moret than 20 feet apart and no more than 201 feet from 5. Lift the home. Operating thej jacks simultaneously (or sequentially in very small increments), lift the home section until iti is slightly higher than the final  each end oft the I-beam. desired pier height.  39  Packet Pg. 123    Set the Home  2.g  ROLLER SYSTEMS thef following sequence:  When using a roller system, comply with the equipment manufacturer's directions and 1. Establish staging area. Establish a staging area directly adjacent to one or 2. Setup rollers. Set upi ther roller system according to the equipment manufac- 3. Fasten bump blocks. Temporarily fasten wooden bump blocks on the sill plates at the ends of the foundation to stop the home from rolling at the de- 4. Roll home. Roll the home into place over the foundation. 5. Remove bump blocks. Remove the blocks before installing the next section  both sides of the foundation. turer's directions. sired location. ofan multi-section home. When using a crane, follow these guidelines:  v No one: should be under the home while iti is suspended. Never put your hands be- tween thel home and the pe- rimeter walls.  CRANES  Position the home section(s) and crane (taking thel boom reach into consider- ation) such that they do not have to ber repositioned duringt the set. Use enough properly sized straps to maintain balance oft the home and to Place straps under walls orp posts, including temporary posts used to support the opening. Do not position lifting straps under marriage wall openings. Use ap properly sized spreader bar to maintain a vertical lift, to avoid placing compression forces on the eaves andt to reduce any tendency to slip. Connect a ropet to atl least one point on the home soi it can be controlled while Make provisions to retrieve the straps/cables after the home is set. If usinga a cradle system, notch the sill plate where the straps will fall. For a sling sys- tem, notch and reinforce thel home's rimj joist tol keep the strapi from slipping and allow thes strap to! be removed after the home is set. Always sett thel home section farthest from the crane first so that subsequent section(s) need not be lifted over previously set sections. Have the interior foundation supports already been designed and installed as part of an approved load bearing perimeter YES, go to Complete Multi-Section Set, (p. 44) or go to Connect Utilities, (p. 95) for single section homes. NO, go to STEP 4. CONSTRUCT PIERS, (p. 40).  prevent damage tot the structure.  aloft.  wall foundation?  STEP 4. CONSTRUCT PIERS  For the side of the home section thati is up on jacks, place piers on footings or pads fol- lowing the home manufacturers blocking plan (ort tags). Ifr no plan was provided, use thes support plan developed inl Install Footings (p. 20). Start at one end of the home section and work toward the other noting the required pier material specifications and Construct piers so as to provide a stable foundation for the home using materials listed int the: specifications boxb below and based on the location of the pier and its height as measured from the top of the footing, pad or grade tot the top of the cap. The pier height can be measured from thel lowest surrounding grade toi thet top of the cap when grade level is above the top oft the footing. See Table 121 forp pier construction require-  vy Designing piers. Incorrect size, location or spacing of piers may resulti in serious structural damage to the home. Install piers at all re- quired locations. Failure to do so mayl lead tos sagging floors, walls and roofs, and could void the home's war- ranty.  procedure described below.  ments.  40  Packet Pg. 124    Set the Hc 2.g  TABLE 11. PIERI MATERIAL MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS  Component Concrete Block Caps Spacers es)  Specification  Nominal dimensions ofa atl least 8") x8"x1 16"; confirming to ASTM designation C90  Solid masonry (nominal 4'x8 8"x 16" pre-cast concrete without reinforcement); treated or hardwood lumber (nominal 2" x8"x1 16"); or steel (minimum 1/2" thick, corrosion protected by a min. ofa1 10 mil coating of an Hardwood plates no thicker than 2" nominal or 4" nominal concrete block used tot filly vertical gaps. states, counties, townships, and or municipalities may require the use of hardwood or treatedI lumber shims. Other listed shims may be used ifir installed in accordance with the listing (maxl loado capacity). Available in various sizes stamped with maximum load capacity and listed orl labeled for the required verti- least equivalent tot that provided by a coating ofz zinc ons steel of. 30 oZ per sq. ftofs surface coated. Manu- factured pier heights must be selected sot that the adjustable risers dor note extend more than 2i inches.  exterior paint or equivalent)  Shims (also called wedg- Whenr required, nominal 4-inchb by 6-inch by 1-inch (max. vertical height) wood shims used inp pairs. Some Commercial metal or pre- cal load capacity, and, where required by design, for the appropriate horizontal load capacity. Metal or cast concrete piers other manufactured piersr must be provided with protection against weather deterioration and corrosion: at Pressure treated wood Witha a water borne preservative, ina accordance with AWPA: Standard U1-041 for Use Category 4B ground  contact applications  TABLE 12. PIER CONSTRUCTION  Maximum offset top to bottom Without Mortar %" 1" 1" 1" %" %"  Maximum Load (Ibs)  Pier location  Height Less than 36i in*  Configuration Single stack blocks withl long side perpendicular tof frame I-beam  With Mortar 7,680 15,360 23,034 39,500 7,680 7,680  6,500 13,000lbs. 19,500 Ibs. NA 6,500 6,500  Frame Between 36i ina and 67in Double, interlocked blocks Between 36i ina and 67in Triple, interlocked blocks Between 68i ina and 108i in Double, interlocked, rein-  forced blocks Single stack blocks with long side parallel top perimeter rail (rimj joist) Single stack blocks with long side perpendicular tot the marriage line  Perimeter 54inc orl less ** Marriage line 54 inc orl less**  Single stack piers may be constructed upi to 54" max. height only wheni installed as perimeter and marriage line support piers. Cross reference maximum allowable pier height with maximum allowable floor height listedi ini frame tiedown charts. If maximum height listed int frame tiedown charts is exceeded, then designs must be provided by a registered professional en- Maximum horizontal offset of %" allowed for pier heights up to 36" and a 1" offset allowed forp pier heights between 36" and  gineer or registered architect.  67".  1. Prepare footing surface. Make sure thet footing surface upon which the pier sits is flat and smooth. Before placing the pier on thet footing, clean dirt, rocks or other material off the surface oft thet footing. Ift thef footing surface is uneven, create a level, flats surface by mortaring on thet first block (orr manufactured pier base) or by placing the first block (orr manufactured pier base) on a layer of 2. Stack blocks. Stack concrete blocks with their hollow cells aligned vertically. When piers are constructed of blocks stacked side-by-side, orient eachl layer at right angles tot the previous one (Figure 16) and plan blocks so that split caps will be perpendicular to the blocks they rest on and perpendicular tot the  premix dry sand mortar.  AGRICUTUKE 0  main I-beam.  41  Packet Pg. 125    Set the Home  2.g  SHIM- SPACER CAP REINFORCE PIERV WITH(4) #4VERTICAL REBAR. GROUT CELLS SOLID TOFOOTING. CONCRETE FOOTING BELOWI FROST LINE. REINFORCED WITH (3)# #4 REBAR  MAINI I-BEAM- SHIM- SPACER CAP CONCRETE BLOCK TYPICAL FOOTING  MIN. DIAMETER OF BEND SHALLI BE: 3"/ AS MEASURED FROM INSIDE OF REINFORCING BARS WITHA6"! LONGI MIN.  SINGLE STACK PIER  DOUBLESTACK PIER  TRIPLESTACK PIER  EACHWAY. REINFORCED LEG.  DOUBLE! STACK PIER Figure 16. Frame pier con- struction. v Curing time of mortar. Where wet mortari is used to construct orl level piers, al- lowedi it to cure to atl least 80% of strength capacity (usually requiring 96 hours) before setting the home.  3. Cap piers. Place a cap on hollow! block piers to evenly distribute the structural load. Use caps the same length and width as the piers they rest upon. When using split caps on double-stacked block piers, install the caps with thel long dimension perpendicular to thej jointi in the blocks below and perpendicular to 4. Install shims. Use shims to level the home andi fill any gaps between the base of the I-beam and the top oft the pier cap. When required, always use shims in pairs (Figure 17). Drive them int tightly so they do not occupy more than one inch of vertical space. When the space tol be shimmed is greater than one inch andI less than the minimum thickness of available caps or con- crete blocks, use hardwood dimensional lumber (twoi inches maximum thick- ness) or 4" thick concrete block. For split caps, install shims and dimensional lumber/blocks over eachi individual cap. Two cap blocks may! be used as the cap on double block piers provided the joint between the cap blocks is per- pendicular to thej joint between the open cell concrete blocks andi is also per-  ther main I-beam.  pendicular tot the I-beam supported byt the pier.  3  Figure 17. Correct shim placement  I-BEAM- SHIMS SPACER- CAP  AGRICUITURE 00 109 OF TENA  71855  Dimensions of masonry perimeter walls. Ifusing a masonry perimeter enclosure, calculate pier heights so that the enclo- sure can be built using standard unit dimensions (without cutting).  5. Set up level. Set up a water level with the fluid level at the desired height of ther main piers. Carefullyl lower the side of the section down onto thel leveled piers, adjusting the final height with shims. USING Al WATER LEVEL A water leveli is as standard device for leveling the home. The level consists of thet following components: One container (five gallon bucket or one gallon jug). 1501 feet of 1/2 inch diameter clear plastic tubing. Fittings for container tot tubing. Valve for terminal end oft tubing. washing fluid in cold climates.  v Level the home. Thel home is adequately leveled ift therei is no more than 1/4 inch differ- ence between adjacent pier supports (frame orp perime- ter) and the exterior doors and windows oft the home do  Liquid for system: colored water in warm climates, windshield  42  Packet Pg. 126    Set the HC 2.g not bind and can be properly operated. If differences in pier heights occur, drain lines should be inspected to correct reverse slope situa- tions. Water level operation. To operate the water level properly, both ends of the system must be open to the atmosphere and there must be approximately the same amount oft fluid int the tubing at all times (within ai few inches).  Chasss  How to use av water level  a. Position level. Position the level such thati it can reach all piers. b. Place container. Place the container so that thef fluid ini the con- tainer is at the same level as the desired level of the top of the supports under the home, allowing for any bracing below the lev- Uncoil tubing. Uncoil the tubing and fill withi fluid, taking care not toir introduce bubbles into the hose. Never allow anything to crimp oro crush the tubing sO as toi impede the free flow of fluid. d. Bleed air. Hold the valve below the level of the water container; open the valve to bleed outa any air and close the valve. e. Establish height. Locate the tubing adjacent to a pier that is set to the desired final height. Position the valve above the pier and open the valve. Move the water container up or down to where the water level is at the desired final height of the pier. Maintain the water container int that position and close the valve. Level piers. Move the tubing to the next pier. Hold the valve above the pier and open it. Set the pier height to the level oft the wateri int thet tubing and close the valve. Repeat this step until all g. Note: If water leaks out oft thes system while in use, your must re- position the reservoir and begin the process again. 6. Complete the opposite side.. Jack the other side oft the section up andi install piers following thei instructions above. Att the completion of this step, the sec- tion should be level from front to rear andi from side to side. 7. Install perimeter and marriage line piers. Install perimeter piers and for multi-section homes, marriage line piers. Position marriage line piers to pro- vide equal bearing for both mating sections. 8. Remove running gear. Remove and store, recycle or properly dispose of the hitch, axles and wheels. These items arei the property of the homeowner un- less other contractual arrangements have been made. Is this a single-section home? YES, go to Connect Utilities, (p. 95). NO, go to Complete Multi-Section Set, (p. 44).  eld oft the I-beams.  piers are att the same level.  43  Packet Pg. 127    Complete Multi- Section Home  2.g  Complete Multi-Section Set  This chapter covers the preparation and installation of additional home sections, including the structural connections be- tween units, raising andi fastening hinged roofs andi fastening the home to al load bearing perimeter wall foundation.  Follow the Steps below:  STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS (p. 44) STEP 2. REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS (p.4 44) STEP 3. COMPLETE HINGED ROOF (p. 44) STEP 4. REPAIR ORI INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GASKET (p. 45) STEP 5. POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS (p. 45)  STEP 6. CONNECT FLOORS STEP 7. CONNECT WALLS STEP 8. CONNECT ROOF STEP 9. ATTACH TAG UNITS (p. 54) STEP 10. REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS (p. 55) STEP 11. FASTEN HOME TOI FOUNDATION (p. 55) STEP 12. BACKFILL AND GRADE (p. 55) STEP 13. BUILD STAIRS (p. 55)  STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS Ift thel home is in Wind Zone Il or III, install ground anchors along the marriage line now; before mating sections are) joined see Install Stabilizing System (p. 74). After in- stalling marriage line anchors return to this point in Complete Multi-Section Set. STEP 2. REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS Remove all shipping protection and associated fasteners from both! home sections to be joined, including plastic used to close up the open sides during transportation. Do not remove the temporary supports holding up the ceilings at major openings. Wind wrap (such as Tyvek or other similar product) will be installed over the exterior wall OSB sheathing and under the shipping plastic. Be careful not to damage the wind wrap Ift the home has al hinged roof that has beeni folded down for shipping, refer to Appen-  Checklists for alternate construction. Ift the serial number (see the data plate or the chassis front cross member) has thel letters "AC" before or after it, then the Alternate Construction on-site check list supplied with the home must be completed and returned to the home manufacturer in a timely manner. If the AC checklist relates tot ther roof, thent failure to do so may requirei future disassembly oft the roof and further in- spections.  when removing the shipping plastic. STEP 3. COMPLETE HINGED ROOF dix D1 for hinged truss installation information.  44  Packet Pg. 128    Complete Mulfi. Section Heme  STEP 4. REPAIR OR INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GASKET A continuous, non-porous gasket creating a permanent air barrier will bei installed on at least one side of the marriage line; along thet floor, end walls and ceiling (and marriage installed on the home or shipped loose. Ifi installed, inspect the gasket and repair any gaps ort tears. Ifr not installed at thef factory, install a continuous gasket between the home sections along the floor, end walls and ceiling. For homes with through-the-rim crossover ducts (see Connect Crossovers, p.61)i inspect and if necessary, repair gas- kets around the rimj joist duct openings using 3/4 incht thick fiberglass duct board or other material acceptable to the manufacturer. Ensure that duct openings are unob- STEP 5. POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS Follow this procedure toi install additional home sections:  lines for any tag units). The manufacturer has provided ar  line marriage gasket either  Hiy Checking through-the-rim- ducts. Ensure that through- the-rim-duct connections are secure and tight after the home sections are to- gether.  structed.  1. Remove obstructions. Remove protruding nails and staples or anything else that will keep the home sections fromi fitting together snugly. If present, cut the temporary ceiling and floor plates att the edges of marriage line openings tak- ing care nott to damage ceiling or floor coverings or displace temporary mar- riage line support posts (these supports and the plates will be removed after 2. Complete crossovers. Before moving thet two sections together, complete any crossover connections that require access from the open marriagel line, including the attic duct connection (if present) and marriage walli interior elec- 3. Position section. Position the section as closely as possible (ideally within six inches) and line up with the previously set section. If using a mechanical positioning system or crane, follow the system manufacturer's instructions or 4. Construct piers. With the outside walls of the home aligned, construct the piers for the! home section according tot thei instructions in Set the Home 5. Level section. Lower the section onto the outside piers first, inside piers last. Before releasing the mechanical positioning system, checki interior doorways and other openings for misalignments that may cause problems during trim- out. Thei floors should bet flush, level and tight and the roof section should have little, if any, gap at the top of the marriage line. Use atl least two come-a- longs to pull the sections snugly together and use the water level or other lev- 6. Exterior close up gaps are open air spaces between mating line of multi-sec- tion homes which allow exterior air to enter the home between sections. Upon completion of exterior close-up no gaps are permitted between structural ele- ments being connected. Prior to completion of exterior, gaps that don'te exceed one inch are permitted tol be shimmed with lumber to ensure that mating gas- 7. When space between structural interconnection members of multi-sections exceeds %" the space ati fasteners shall be shimmed with dimensional lumber and thet fastener length increased tor maintain fastener penetration into receiv-  Mechanical posi- tioning system. For a pier- set home, ar mechanical po- sitioning system (such as a roller system) will make the process easier and safer and be less likely to dam- age thel home. v Safety. Remember to place safety timbers under home behind axle area and under hitch. v Sealing gaps. Prior to com- pletion of the exterior close- up, gaps that do not exceed one inch are permitted be- tween structural fasteners provided that the gaps are closed before completion of close-up and the marriage gasket provides ap proper quired seal. Shims at fasteners. are only re-  the home sections have been structurally connected). trical connections (see Connect Crossovers, p.61).  the crane operator's directions. (p.38) before continuing to the: steps below.  eling device tos set all piers and shims.  keti is providing proper seal between sections.  ing member.  STEP 6. CONNECT FLOORS  Make floor structural connections according to the appropriate method described be- low. A: sealing gasket shall be present between marriage line rimj joists. Alternate 1: Toed fasteners through bottom board. Make connections according to thei fastener specifications in Table 13 and' Table 13A (Figure 18). Spacing indicatedi in Table 13 and Table 13A is on-center, both sides of marriage line. Fasteners on each side of marriage line shall be staggered and offset by twice thes spacing distance (Figure 18A). Repair any tears or holes int thel bottom board  afteri installation of fasteners.  45  Packet Pg. 129    2.g  TABLE 13. FLOOR CONNECTION FASTENING SPECIFICATIONS  Fastener Type Lag Screw  Spacing Wind Zone 1 16in.o.c.  Size 3/8"x5"  MARRIAGE LINE FLOORI DECKING 2x6F RIM. JOIST FLOOR: SEALER TOI PREVENT INFILTRATION  Figure 18. Floor connection through bottom board    BOTTOMI BOARD- - PATCH WI VINYL1 TAPE ATL LAG SCREWS 3/8" x5" MIN. LAG SCREWS @ 16"O/C (ALTERNATE SIDES AS SHOWN)- TYPICAL OUTRIGGER (MATING ANGLES NOTI REQUIRED)  FASTENER LOCATION MARRIAGE LINE SPACING 2xSPACING FROM TABLE 2x SPACING FROM TABLE  Figure 18A. Staggered off- set fastening along marriage  line  2x SPACING FROMTABLE FROM1 TABLE 2xSPACING FROMTABLE SPACING FROMTABLE  AGRICUETURE  09  46  Packet Pg. 130    Complete Mulfi- Section Hc  2.g  Alternate 2: Bolts through brackets at ends of frame outriggers  This alternate is available only ift thel brackets have been provided byt the manufacturer.  SEAL. JOINTI FORI ENTIREI LENGTH- ATI FLOOR TOI FLOOR CONNECTION WITHE EXTERIOR GRADE CAULKING ORI EQUAL1 TOF PROHIBIT, AIRAND WATERI INFILTRATION  Figure 18B. Bolts through frame outrigger brackets  DECKING -FLOOR #  CL  OUTRIGGERS  1/2"-BOLTS THROUGH MATING ANGLESAT ENDS OF OUTRIGGERS W/V WASHERS.  STEP 7. CONNECT WALLS  Make wall connections according tot the appropriate method described below.  ÇL  FIELDI INSTALL MINIMUM 2"V WIDE BATTEN CUT FROM: SAME MATERIAL AS SIDING. ATTACH WITH6 6d NAILSAT6" O/CE EACHSIDE OFCL. HORIZONTAL LAP SIDING (FACTORY INSTALLED)  ÇL  Figure 19. Endwall close-up  FIELDI INSTALL 12" LENGTH OFL LAP SIDING OVER CL INTER-I LOCKING WITHS SIDING UNDER- NEATH.  FACTORY- INSTALLED HARDBOARD OR PLYWOOD SIDING  MIN. EACH SIDE OF SEAM  ENDWALL CLOSE-UP DETAIL HARDBOARD ENDWALL CLOSE-UP DETAIL -LAPS SIDING  FACTORY INSTALLED HARDBOARD OR PLYWOOD SIDING FIELDI INSTALLED INSTALLED POLY- WOODI BATTEN WITH 8d NAILS SHEATHING AT 12" O/C CAULK OR SEALAT EDGES (TYPICAL) FACTORY INSTALLED HARDBOARD OR PLYWOOD: SIDING  Figure 19A. Wall and corner close-up  EXTERIOR WALL FRAMING FACTORY INSTALLED HARDBOARD SIDING CAULKING FIELD INSTALLED HARDBOARD BATT "Z" OR' "H" FLASHING FIELD INSTALLED HARDBOARD SIDING W/ 6d CORROSIVE RE- SISTANT NAILS AT6" O/C EDGES ANDF FIELD. FIELDI INSTALLED SKIRTING (MAY BE ONEF PIECE)  BELTRAIL REMOVE FACTORY ETHYLENE  FLOORJOISTS  AGRICUTURE  INSIDE CORNER CLOSE-UP  WALL CLOSE-UP  5  47  Packet Pg. 131    2.g  FACTORY INSTALLED EXTERIOR: SIDING- TYP.STUDS AT16"O/C-  TYPICAL WALL FRAMINGI WI STUDS AT16"O/C  Figure 19B. Endwall close-up  EXTERIOR ENDWALL CLOSE-UP  FIELD INSTALL GYPSUME BOARD (MATCHEXISTING)  FACTORY INSTALLED GYPSUM BOARD  CAULKING FIELDI INSTALLED- HARDBOARD SIDING W/6d FIELD CORROSIVE RESISTANT NAILSAT6" O/C EDGES AND FIELD.  INSTALL HARDBOARD BATTS  Figure 19C. Interior endwall close-up  TYP. STUDS AT16"O/C  TYP.TOPF PLATE TYP. BLOCKING ATA ALL GYPSUM BOARD JOINTS  ÇL  FIELDI INSTALL 5/16" GYP. BD. W/ CONT. BEAD OFI P.V.A. GLUE AT ALLI FRAM- INGI MEMBERS & ATTACH W/: 3/16'x1'x19 GA. STAPLES, AT6" O/C EDGES & FIELD ANDI NOTL LESS THAN 1/4" FROM SIDES &E ENDS OR 1/2" GYP. BD. W/# #6x 1-1/2" SCREWS OR 5d COOLERI NAILS OR. .098 - SHANKx1-1/2" LONG) x1 19/64" HEADF RING SHANK NAILS AT 7" O/C EDGES ANDI FIELD AND NOTL LESS THAN: 3/8" FROM EDGES &E ENDS.  TYP.BOTTOM- PLATE  INTERIOR ENDWALL CLOSE-UP  TYPICAL TOP PLATE TYP. STUDS AT 16" O/C- ENTIRE VOID AREAS TO BE FILLED W/ MIN." R-191 INSULATION. ENTIRE OPENING SHALL BE COVERED WI POLY- ETHYLENE SHEATHING DURING TRANSIT. AND REMOVED PRIORTO ATTACHMENT OF HARDBOARD.  OPENING IN WALL FORI FIELD INSTALLATIONOF ELECTRICAL METERI BASE, ETC.  TYP.BOTTOM PLATE WALL OPENING  All fasteners manufactured from steel wire exposed to weather shall be: zinc coated with hot-dipped galvanized zinc, mechanically deposited zinc or electrodeposited Zinc. Fasteners manufactured from aluminum alloy wire or other non-ferrous alloys exposed Ifther marriage line along the roofi is not snug, position jacks every: 20f feet or less along the outside I-beam and uniformly lift thes section until the roof areal ist tight. Check to make sure the ceiling joint ist flush before installing the connections. Ifr not, use aj jack and tee to raise whichever ceiling is low, starting att thet front and working to the rear of thel home. Fasten the roof along the marriage line using one of the methods below for  tot the weather do not require protective coatings. STEP 8. CONNECT ROOF  AGRICUETURE  09 F  either double or triple section homes.  48  Packet Pg. 132    Complete Mulfi- Section HC29  (2)LAYERS TYPE 151 FELT OR APPROVED EQUALI FIELDI INSTALLED, EXTENDING 6" MINIMUM ON EACH SIDE OF UNIT CL. (NOTI INSTALLED WITH RIDGE' VENT APPLICATION) FACTORY INSTALLED- SHINGLES (2)LAYERS 15# FELTOR- APPROVED EQUALI FACTORY INSTALLED 1/2" - BOLTS W/ WASHERS: 2"- MIN. FROM" TOP OFI RIDGE BEAM. FOR: SPACING, ANDI BOLT CLUSTERI REQUIRED OVER SUPPORT POSTS SEE TABLE (2) LAYERS TYPE 15FELTOR- APPROVED EQUALF FIELDI INSTALLED, EXTENDING 6" MINIMUM ONEACH SIDE OF UNIT CL. (NOTI INSTALLED WITHI RIDGE' VENT APPLICATION) FACTORY INSTALLED- SHINGLES (2)LAYERS 15# FELTOR- APPROVED EQUALI FACTORY INSTALLED 8dl NAILS AT6" O/C (2)2 2x3 RAFTER RAILS 1/2" - BOLTS W/ WASHERS 2" MIN. FROM' TOP ORI BOTTOM OF RIDGE BEAM OR" LAG SCREWS. FOR SPACING ANDE BOLT CLUSTERS REQUIRED OVER SUPPORT POSTS SEE TABLE  ASPHALT RIDGE SHINGLES FIELD INSTALLED WI (2) 12 GA.x11 1/4" ROOFING NAILS ATI EACH SHINGLE (NOTI INSTALLED WITHE RIDGE VENT APPLICATION) LAST COURSE OF SHINGLES FIELD INSTALLEDWI (4) 120 GA.) x11/4" ROOFI NAILS ATI EA. SHINGLE. AFTERI RIDGE BEAME BOLTING, ATTACH: 3/8"x6 6" (MIN) PLYWOOD CLOSURE STRIP WITH 6dl NAILS AT 6" O/C TOI RIDGE BEAM AND (2) 6d NAILS TOI EACH RAFTER, OR COVER 5"- - ACCESS HOLES WITH 30 GA. GALVANIZED METAL.  Figure 20. Roof connection  CL  RIDGE CLOSE- -UP DETAIL-312ROOF  ASPHALTRIDGE: SHINGLES FIELD INSTALLED WI (2) 12 GA.x11/4" ROOFING NAILS ATI EACH SHINGLE (NOT INSTALLED WITHI RIDGE VENT APPLICATION) LAST COURSE OF SHINGLES FIELD INSTALLED' WI (4) 12GA.x11 1/4" ROOFI NAILS ATI EA. SHINGLE. AFTER RIDGE BEAMI BOLTING, ATTACH 3/8"x 12" (MIN) PLYWOOD CLOSURE STRIP! WITH 6dl NAILS AT6 6" O/C1 TO2 2x3 RAFTERI RAIL AND (2) 6d NAILS TOEACH RAFTER. RIDGEBEAM  CL  RIDGE CLOSE-UP DETAIL 4:12ROOF  AGRICUETURE  09  49  Packet Pg. 133    2.g  Figure 20A. Roof connection  FIELDI INSTALL 01/2" BOLTSV WITH WASHERS AT4 48" O/C @: 20F PSF ROOF OR: 32"O/C @ 30PSF ROOF OR2 24" O/C @ 40F PSF ROOFOR 16" O/C UPT TO1 150F PSF ROOF WHEN RIDGEI BEAM 2" TO SUPPORT POSTSAREON 4"0/C ONE SIDE OF CL ONLY,A BOLT CLUSTERI ISF REQUIRED AS SHOWN. FOR QUANTITY OF BOLTS, SEET TABLE LONGITUDINAL OR TRANSVERSE RIDGE BEAMS SUPPORT POSTS TYPICAL' WALL STUDS TYPICAL FLOOR LAG SCREW SPACINGS: 30" O/C-20P.S.F. 20" O/C-30P.S.F. 14" O/C-40P.S.F. 3/8" DIA.> x5" LAG SCREW  RIDGE BEAM-  RIDGE BEAM- L  AGRICUTURE 00109 DF  RIDGE BEAM BOLT TING DETAIL  3"MIN.  CLUSTER BOLTSOR LAG SCREWSI MUST BE SECURED THROUGH RIDGE BEAMS THAT SPAN OPENINGS. CLUSTER TOE BE LOCATED OVER SUPPORTI POSTS  TII  ALTERNATE RIDGEE BEAMLAG SCREW DETAIL 20F PSF.AND3OPSE ROOF LIVE LOADONLY  CLUSTER BOLTINGATR RIDGE BEAM TRANSITIONI DETAIL  TABLE 15. ROOF CONNECTION - LAG SCREW CLUSTER (28 WIDE MAX)  MAX. SPAN OR ADJACENT SPAN  QTY OF FASTENERS (1)3/8"> x5" Lag Screw (2)3 3/8": x 5" Lag Screws (4)3/8", x5" Lag Screws (6)3 3/8"x5 5" Lag Screws (8): 3/8": x5" Lag Screws (10)3 3/8"x5"L Lag Screws  20PSF 5-0" 10'-0" 20-0" 30-0" 40'-0" 50'-0"  30PSF 3'-6" 7'-0" 14'-0" 21-0" 28'-0" 35-0"  40PSF 2-6" 5-6" 10'-10" 16-4" 21-9" 27-3"  TABLE 15A. ROOF CONNECTION- - BOLT CLUSTER (28 WIDE MAX)  MAX. SPAN OR ADJACENT SPAN  QTYOF FASTENERS (1)1/2"E Bolt (2)1 1/2" Bolts (3)1 1/2" Bolts (4) 1/2" Bolts (6) 1/2" Bolts (8)1 1/2" Bolts  20PSF 12-9" 25-6" 38-3" NA NA NA  30PSF 8-10" 17'-8" 26'-7" 35-5" NA NA  40PSF 7-1" 14'-2" 21-3" 28-4" 42-6" 56-8"  60PSF 5-0" 10'-1" 15-2" 20'-3" 30'-4" 40'-6"  80PSF 3'-11" 7'-10" 11"-9" 15-9" 23'-7" 31-6"  Lag screw and bolt cluster only required when ridge beam support posts are on one side of centerline. Spacing in cluster tol be 2" - 4" on-center. Bolts shall be 1/2" mini-  mum with washers at each end.  50  Packet Pg. 134    Complete Mulfi- Section Hc 2.g  TABLE 15B. ROOF CONNECTION - LAG SCREW CLUSTER (30 WIDE MAX)  MAX. SPAN OR ADJACENT SPAN  QTY OF FASTENERS (1)3 3/8"x5 5" Lag Screw (2)3 3/8") x 5" Lag Screws (4)3 3/8"x5" Lag Screws (6)3 3/8" x5" Lag Screws (8): 3/8": x 5" Lag Screws (10)3 3/8"x5 5"L Lag Screws  20PSF 4'-5" 8'-10" 17-9" 26-8" 35'-6" 44-5"  30PSF 3'-0" 6'-1" 12-3" 18-3" 24'-6" 30"-8"  40PSF 2-5" 4-10" 91-9" 14'-8" 19-7" 24'-6"  TABLE 15C. ROOF CONNECTION- BOLT CLUSTER (30 WIDE MAX)  MAX. SPAN OR ADJACENT SPAN  FASTENERS QTYOF (1)1 1/2" Bolt (2) 1/2" Bolts (3) 1/2" Bolts (4) 1/2" Bolts (6) 1/2" Bolts (8) 1/2" Bolts  20PSF 11'-6" 23-1" 34I-8" 46'-2 NA NA  30PSF 7-11" 15'-11" 23-10" 31'-10" 47-10" NA  40PSF 6'-4" 12-9" 19-2 25-6" 38-0" 51-0"  60PSF 4'-6" 9'-1" 13-8" 18-2" 27'-4" 36'-5"  80PSF 3'-6" 71-1" 10-7" 14'-2" 23-3" 28-4"  Lag screw and bolt cluster only required when ridge beam support posts are on one side of centerline. Spacing in cluster to! be 2"-4 4" on-center. Bolts shall be 1/2" mini-  mum with washers at each end. Alternate Roof Connection  When using 3/8" x5" lag screws to connect ther ridge beams together iti is not neces- sary to remove the factory-installed roofs sheathing prior toi installing the lag screws. Itis acceptable for the setup contractor toi install the lags through the roof sheathing. This alternate applies only to 3/12 roof pitches where the ridge beams are upi tight against thep peak of ther roof. On 4/12 and! higher roof pitches, where the ridge beams are down below the peak, iti is necessary to remove the roof sheathingi in order to gain access for  connecting the ridge beams together.  GRICUL  51  Packet Pg. 135    2.g  ALTERNATE STEP 8. CONNECT ROOF DOUBLE SECTION HOME RIDGE LINE  Make roof structural connections according tot the appropriate method described below. Iftheh home has al hinged roof, see also the section on hinge roof raising andi fastening. Make the roof connection by fastening through the roof decki intot the continuous roof edgrerail or ridgebeam (Figure 20) according to the fastener spacing and specifications Metal straps must meet the following requirements (must be used on homes  in Table 15 and the following requirements:  with continuous ridge vent application): Made of 1" wide x: 24ga galvanized steel. Spaced ar min of 48 inches O.C. ore eight (8) 0.099" x 1-1/2" nails.  Fastened to each side of thet truss with ten (10) 7/16" x 16ga. galvanized staples  RIDGE STRAPPING  SHINGLE RIDGE CAP ROOFINGI NAIL OVERLAP SHINGLE TABS ONTO OPPOSITE SIDES  Figure 20B. Roof connection  AGRICUTURE  #10x4 4-1/2" WOOD SCREWS (TOE SCREWED)! INTO ROOF EDGE RAILS OR RIDGEI BEAMS PER CHART  2xCONT. ROOF EDGEF RAIL OR RIDGE BEAM. Spacing Wind Zone 2 Wind Zone 3 NA NA NA 30°MAX.  TABLE 15. ROOF EDGE RAIL CONNECTIONS SPECIFICATIONS  Fastener Method Woods screws #10x4-1/2" Metal cap/strap #10x4-1/2" AND wood screws  Type  Windz Zone1 8in.o.c. 21in.o.c. 48in.o.c. 1-1/4"MIN.  NA NA NA  24ga Straps  Figure 20C. Gap between roof edge rail or ridgebeam  SHIM  Max. gap! between edge rails or ridge beams is 1-1/2". Exception: for marriage wall taller than 108" with 24" O.C. studs, max. gap between roof edge rails or ridge beams is 1/4". Gaps must be shimmed ate each connection with dimensional lumber. Fastener length must be increased if necessary so that 1-1/2" of penetration into main member is main- Specified screw spacing must be reduced by halfi in locations where gap occurs.  tained.  52  Packet Pg. 136    Complete Mulfi- Section Hc 2.g  This page intentionally left blank.  53  Packet Pg. 137    Complete Multi- Section Home  2.g  Do additional sections (non tag) remain to be positioned? YES, go to STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GROUND ANC-  HORS, (p.44) NO, continue below. Ist there a tag unit? NO, continue below. Is there a hinged roof?  YES, go tOSTEPS 9.ATTACH TAG UNITS (p. 54)  YES, go to STEP 3. COMPLETE HINGED ROOF, (p.44) NO, go to STEP 9. ATTACH TAG UNITS, (p.54)  STEP 9. ATTACH TAG UNITS following procedure: 1. Position and block the  After the main unit has been set on its foundation, install all tag units according to the  y Piers under tag units. Some tag units have spe- cial piering needs due to the roof and/or floor con- struction. These will be de- tailedi in supplemental pier- ing plans supplied with the home. Note that tag unit end walls are typically load bearing rather than side walls.  tag. Position the tag unit as close tot the main unit as  possible ati its intended location. Use al hitchj jack to obtain approximate leve- ling andi install pier supports according to Set the Home, STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION (p. 38). Determine whether the tag andr main unit floors are designed tol line up flush or are offset by as step and adjust thet tag pier heights 2. Level the unit. Using a water level (p.42), verify that the piers are level. The elevation of all points along thel lower flange oft the I-beam should be ano more than 3/8i inches from the desired height and should not deviate more 3. Connect floors. Ift the floor oft thet tag unit is level with main unit floor, connect thet floors together as described in STEP 6. CONNECT FLOORS (p.45). If the floors are offset, use the connection detail shown in Figure 21. 4. Connect walls. Secure the tag unit walls tot the main unit sidewall using #10x 4"s screws at 24 inches O.C. Ifp pre-drilled holes are provided secure the tag unit walls to the main unit with 5/16" x6" lags screws (see Figure 22). The sheath- ing shown int the detail may not bei included byt the manufacturer. Ifi included, the sheathing over thel last stud bay was tacked inj place at the factory for easy removal at the site. Once the wall connections are complete, re-install  accordingly.  than 3/4 inches overall.  the sheathing and complete the siding installation.  FLOOR DECKING 2xFLOOR JOIST LAG SCREW EDGE RAIL TO- BLOCKINGI PER STANDARD FLOOR CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS R-11 MIN.I INSULATION INK KNEEWALL VERT. FLOORI DECKING COVEREDI WITH EITHERI BOTTOM BOARD ORA ALUMINUMI FLASHING  MATINGI LINE 2x6 SPF! #2 BLOCKING, FLOOR DECKING 2xFLOOR JOIST  SIDEWALL: STUDS (MAIN UNIT)-  FASTENER SHEATHING (FIELDI INSTALLED) WALLS STUDS (TAGUNIT)  Figure 21. Tag unit offset floor connection Figure 22. Tag unit wall connection  MAIN UNIT  EXTERIOR SIDING  TAG UNIT  5. Connect roofs. Connect thet tag unitr rooft to the main unit roof using #10 X 4" screws at 12" on-center (8" on-center in Wind Zone 3) or #8 x4" screws at 8" on-center (5" on-center in' Wind Zone 3)t toe screwed through tag unit end truss top chordi into each main unit dormer vertical structural member location (stud or truss). Iffull depth ridgebeam headers must be connected refer to Connect Roofs. See Figure 231 for flush roof connections and Figure 241 for roof connections with an offset greater than twoi inches. Roof connections with  an offset less than two inches do not require screws.  54  Packet Pg. 138    Complete Mulfi. Section Heme Figure 23. Tag unit flush roof connection Figure 24. Tag unit offset roof connection  SHINGLE X FASTENER TAG UNIT  INSTALLI FLASHING MAIN LAYER OF UNDERLAYMENT) FLATOVER. JOINT MAIN UNIT  UNDERLAYMENT (OR ADDITIONAL  UNIT ROOF DECKING METALFLASHING (OR1 TOP COURSE ROOF OFV VINYL: SIDING) DECKING TAG FASTENER  SHINGLES METALFASCIA SHINGLES UNIT  BEE  BEE  STEP 10. REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS Oncei the homei is properly supported and the marriage line connections are completed, remove the temporary ridge beam supports and wall/ceiling plates used to brace the ridge beam during shipment. Take care not to damage the ceiling. Is the home supported on a load bearing perimeter wall? YES, go to STEP 11. FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION, (p. 55) NO, go to Complete Roof and Exterior Walls (p.56). STEP 11. FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION Fasten the! home tot thet foundation according to thet fastening schedule provided in Construct Foundation, STEP 1. OBTAIN AI FOUNDATION DESIGN (p.35). Is the home supported on a basement foundation? YES, go to STEP 12. BACKFILL AND GRADE, (p. 55) NO, go to Complete Roof and Exterior Walls (p. 56).  v When to backfill. Backfill against basement walls on- lya after the home is con- nected tot thet foundation or thel basement walls may deflect inward or collapse. Cutting the chassis. Do not cut, notch, bend or alteri in any manner beams, cross- members and other parts of the steel chassis.  STEP 12. BACKFILL AND GRADE damage the drainage system. SITE (p.16).  Backfill against thet foundation wall tot thel height of the waterproofing, taking care tor not Grade thes site as described in Prepare the Site, STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE Construct thel basement stairs in compliance with the local building code. Take care that adequate headroom is maintained under beams and that there is sufficient landing  STEP 13. BUILD STAIRS space att thel bottom oft the stairs.  go to Complete Roof and Exterior Walls (p. 56).  55  Packet Pg. 139    Complete Multi- Section Home  Southern Energy  2.g  Complete Roof and Exterior Walls This chapter covers closing up and weatherproofing the home by completing the roofing and siding.  Follow the Steps below: STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF (p.56) STEP 2. COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF (p.58) STEP 3. COMPLETE SIDE WALLS (p. 60)  STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF RIDGE CLOSEUP  For multi-section homes, thei first step in completing the exterior is sealing ther roof along ther ridge line (Figure 25). For homes with asphalt shingles, followt the procedure below. For homes with metal or other roofing materials, follow thei instructions that come with thes  AGRICUTURE e@5 Shinge  roofing materials or provided as a supplement to this manual.  CAP SHINGLE UNDERLAYMENT  SHINGLEAND UNDERLAYMENT  y Weatherproofing. It is vital- lyi important to close up the home quiçkly to protect the interior from damage due toi inclement weather. Removing shipping protec- tion. Remove shipping pro- tection from ther roof prior to holes in shingles resulting from shipping protection re- mended that the top layer of shingles be lifted and the sealant applied to any holes in the second layer of shin- gles. Refer to Warning on following page for ac- ceptable types of sealants. Figure 26.Shingle fastener locations for Wind Zone I (left) and Wind Zones lland II(right).  SHEATHING  1. Install underlayment. Sheathing must be fastened with an 8d nail at 3i inches on-center along the edges and 3i inches on-center int the field. Seams off field in- stalled sheathing must be offset 16i inches from thes seams on factory installed covering all exposed sheathing and overlapping sheathing joints by at least five inches on each side. Fasten using 1"x 1"x16 ga galvanized: staples. For Wind 2. Install shingles. If shingles have been left off att the ridge line for site installation, install them now using 12 ga> x 1-1/4" long, 3/8" diameter head roof nails. For Wind Zone I, fasten at 5/8i inch above each tab cutout slot and one ate each end of the shingle one inchi int from the edge (four fasteners for at three-tab shingle) (Figure 26). For Wind Zones Ila and III, use twof fasteners 5/81 inch above and on either side oft the tab slots and one ate each end of the shingle one inchi in from the edge (six fasteners for at three-tab shingle). Do not fasten through the shingle  sheathing. Install 15# felt or equivalent continuously along thel length of ther ridge, completing roofing. Seal all Zones Ila and III, also apply a six inch wide strip of roofing cement along each side moval. Iti is also recom-  ofr ridge under the underlayment.  tar line. 36" SHINGLE  36" SHINGLE  12"*-  12"  FASTENER LOCATIONS  3. Install underlayment. Install 15#1 felt or equivalent underlayment thati is at least 10 inches wide continuously: along the ridge. Fasten with 1"x1"x1 16 ga galvanized staples. For Wind Zones Ila and III, also apply as six inch wide strip of roofing ce-  56  Sy  Packet Pg. 140    Complete Roof and  2.g  Exterior Was  ment on both sides of the ridge under the underlayment.  4. Install shingle cap. Starting att the opposite end oft the home from the prevailing wind, install ridge caps shingles provided by the manufacturer or use 12"x12" shingles (36" shingles cuti intot three equal pieces) (Figure 27). Install using 12ga X1-1/4" long, 3/8" diameter head roofing nails spaced 5-5/8 inches from bottom edge and 1/2i incht to 1-1/2i inches ini from both edges. Cover the exposed fasten-  ers with tar or cement.  CUT SHINGLE INTO THREE PIECES AS SHOWN BY DOTTEDLINE 1 2 3  Figure 27. Shingle cut into thirds  5. Ridge Vent. For proper alignment - prenail through ridge vent holes ate ends of each section. Thet felt paper underlayment should bef folded back onto ther roof decking and trimmed along the edge of the roof decking at the peak so thati it does not obstruct the opening at the mate line. When using standard flat 3-tab plying vent to dimensional or architectural shingles on new construction, caulk between low areas of shingle andi flange of vent. Before fastening vent, make sure filter is secured between shingles and vent. When installing venti in cold weather, leave an 1/8" gapl between sections to allowi for warm weather expan-  Installing a ridge vent. Ifa ridge vent is to be installed, follow the ridge vent manu- facturer's instructions pro- an addendum tot this manual in lieu of underlayment over ridge line and shingle cap. Figure 28. Ridge vent instal- vy CONES ARE NOT TOBE USED. This type of silicone will weaken or melt asphalt shingles. The Alcoxy or Neu- tral Curet type silicones will not melt asphalt and are the proper silicones tol be used in roof applications. All sea- lants used in shingle and roof applications, excluding underlayment securement, must be an Alcoxy or Neu- tral Curet type silicone OR meet the ASTM D 4586 standard. Asphalt/Asbestos based sealants, such as Black Tar, must meet the ASTM D4 4586 standard. Shingle underlayment sea- lants are required in Wind Zone Il and III applications 3019 standard.  shingles, caulking is not required under thet flange oft the ridge vent. Prior to ap- vided with the material or as  sion.  STOPF ROOF SHEATHING: SHORT OFE EDGE RAILI FOR VENTILATION., ALT: SHEATHING TOE EXTEND TOE EDGE OF TOP CHORD WHENE EDGE RAILI ISL LOWERED2 NAIL @E EACH" TRUSS WITH2" GALVANIZED ROOFINGI NAILS.  lation  FILTERAREA CAPS SHINGLES LOWF PROFILE  RIDGEVENT ACETOXY TYPE SILI-  HINGE ROOF CLOSE-UP  For homes with hinged roofs, complete roofing underlayment and shingles along the  hinge line pert the requirements listedi in Appendix D. COMPLETE TRIPLE SECTION ROOFS lowing methods based on the construction oft the home. Method 1: Dual ridge beams  Complete roofing along triple section home marriage lines according to one oft thet fol- 1. Install underlayment. Fold down the underlayment of the outer section roof and apply ar minimum sixi inch wide strip of roofing cement tot the sheathing. tice tipf for optional metal flashing). Then apply a minimum six inchy wide strip of roofing cement to the outer section underlayment andi fold down the center 2. Install shingles. Install missing row(s) of shingles, securing them per the shingle manufacturer's installation instructions (refer tot thes shingle wrapper).  Lay the underlayment of the outer section on top of the cement (see Best Prac- and must meet the ASTM  section roof underlayment over this cement.  57  Packet Pg. 141    Complete Roof And Exterior Walls  2.g  CENTER: SECTION/OUTER: SECTION  Figure 29.Triple section roof connection. Method 1  FACTORY-INSTALLED! UNDERLAYMENT-  FACTORYINSTALLED: SHINGLES FIELD-NSTALLED SHINGLES FACTORY-NSTALLED SHINGLES ASPHALTROOFING: CEMENT BETWEEN! LAYERS OF UNDERLAYMENT MIN 6"V WIDE  Installing metal flashing. Install optional metal flashing over the roof decking before applying roofing cement. Fold back the underlayment and fas- ten 30 ga> x6" wide mini- mum galvanized metal with roofing nails or 16 gax1" crown staples of sufficient length to penetrate the roof sheathing. Space fasteners four inches O.C. or less near the edge of ther metal. Overlap ther metal by at least two inches atj joints.    METAL (OPTIONAL)  FASTENER  Method 2: Field installed sheathing  1. Install underlayment. Fold down the underlayment of the outer section roof and fold up the underlayment on the center section roof. Apply tot the lower roof underlayment: ar minimum: six inch wide strip of roofing cement centered on thes sheathing! joint. Cover with the shipped loose underlayment. Apply another minimum six inch wide strip of roofing cement tot the shipl loose underlayment centered on the upper roof sheathing joint. 2. Install shingles. Install missing row(s) of shingles per thes shingle manufactur- er's installation instructions (refer to the shingle wrapper).  FACTORY INSTALLED SHINGLES  Figure 30.Triple section roof connection Method2  FIELDI INSTALLED SHINGLES FIELD INSTALLED SHEATHING FIELD INSTALLED UNDERLAYMENT ASPHALTROOFING: CEMENT BETWEEN LAYERS OF UNDERLAYMENT MIN.6 6"WIDE  FACTORY INSTALLED UNDERLAYMENT  FACTORYI INSTALLED SHINGLES FACTORY INSTALLED  B8  FACTORY SHEATHING INSTALLED NAILER  STEP 2. COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF  Ift the home has at tag unit, complete roofing for this unit now. The process for complet- ing ther roof is different for flush and offset roofs. Followt the instructions in the appropri- Fori flush roofs, complete roofing alongt the marriage line and at the valleyl line as follows  ate section below. FLUSH ROOFS (see Figure 31):  58  Packet Pg. 142    Complete Roof and  2.g  Exterior Wars Figure 31. Tag unit flush roof connection  SHINGLE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALL FLASHING (OR ADDITIONAL LAYEROF VNOERLATEMDPATOVER JOINT MAIN UNIT  FASTENER- TAG UNIT  Marriage line  Method 1: Install metal flashing (minimum 30 ga> X minimum 6" wide) overt thej joint between the main roof dormer and tag unitr roof. Secure the flashing to the roof decks on both dormer and tag unit roofs with roofing nails or 16 ga staples with a one inch crown andl longe enough to fully penetrate the roof decks. Space fasteners maximum twoi inches 0.C. near the edge oft the flashing. Overlap seams int the metal by at least two inches. After flashing is complete, install shingles per shingle manu- facturer instructions and ridge cap/vent according to STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF Method 2: Install two layers of roofing underlayment or equivalent over thej joint be- tween the main roof dormer andt tag unit roof lapping the factory installed under- layment ar minimum of sixi inches on each side and fully cemented at thel laps. In- stall shingles per shingle manufacturer instructions andr ridge cap/vent according to Along the bottom of the valley, shingles and one or morel layers of roll roofing may needt tol be installed. Iff fastened to the roof at the factory, unrollt the roofing, overlap thet tag roof and trim the roofing tot the roof edge. If shipped loose, install the rollr roof- ing at the valley, lapping it under thet factory installed roll roofing a minimum of 12 inches andf fully cement ther roofing at thel lap. Complete shingles at the valley either byi interweaving them or byt trimming back approximately four inches from the valley line andi fully cementing the exposed shingle edges. Fasteners must not be installed Ift there is ag gap between the main unit dormer overhang and thet tag unit roof of less than two inches, fold upt the main unit dormer fascia, slide the underlayment andi flash- ing from thet tag unit roof behind the fascia, and bend the fascia back down and secure  (p.56).  STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF (p. 56).  Valley line  within 6" oft the centerline oft the valley.  OFFSET ROOFS  into subi fascia with metal screws (Figure 32).  MAIN UNITF ROOF  Figure 32. Tag unit roofing connection with less than two inch height difference  FACTORY INSTALLED FLASHING FASCIA SHINGLES  UNDERLAYMENT CARRIED UPI INTO DORMER SUB-FASCIA  (SHINGLES NOT SHOWN ON MAIN UNITI FOR CLARITY) MAIN UNIT DORMER  DRIPEDGE FASCIA FACTORY INSTALLED FLASHING TAGUNIT  UNDERLAYMENT X DISTANCE BETWEEN MAIN UNIT DORMER. AND' TAGI UNITI ROOF MAYV VARY (MIN. * TON MAXOF2") TAG UNIT TRUSS MAIN UNITI DORMER TRUSS  D UNDERIAYMENT  R3  UNDERLAYMENT OVER ROLLED ROOFING CARRIED ROOF UPI INTODORMER SUB-FASCIAMIN.3  59  Packet Pg. 143    Complete Roof And Exterior Walls  2.g  Ift the gapl between the main unit dormer overhang and thet tag unit roof is twoi inches or more, bend up thei inside corner trim ati the dormer overhang and main unit sidewall, fold up thet factory installed flashing on the tag unit roof, fold the inside corner trim back down and secure into dormer wall with metal screws (Figure 33).  MAIN UNIT ROOFD DECKING METALI FLASHING (OR1 TOP COURSE OF VINYL SIDING) FASTENER-  SHINGLES FMETALI FASCIA SHINGLES TAGUNIT  Figure 33. Tag unit offset roof connection  4X  ROOF DECKING  STEP 3. COMPLETE SIDE WALLS tot this manual) and to complete the exterior  Siding necessary to complete the exterior has been provided with the home. Follow the siding manufacturer's instructions (found on or with the packaging or as an addendum 1. Remove shipping protection. Remove temporary shipping protection from 2. Complete crossovers. Complete any crossover connections int the walls, in- cluding: electrical, stereo speaker, doorbell, telephone and intercom wires. 3. Install siding. Fasten siding only at stud locations, avoiding electrical wires 4. Fasteners. Fasteners must be installed as described int the manufacturer's in- stallation instructions or DAPIA approved test reports fort the siding. 5. Install close-up strips. If siding has beeni installed on the end walls at the fac- tory, fasten close-up strips securely along both edges and seal the edges with 6. Install trim. Install any matching trim required to complete the installation. 7. Seal penetrations. With a waterproof sealant, seal any penetrations int the sid- ingt that may have been caused by temporary shipping protection.  as follows: siding  iv Covering the HUDI label. Dor not cover the HUDI la- bel on the exterior oft the home. Removing shipping pro- tection. Remove tempo- rary shipping protection from walls before siding or serious moisture installing damage may result. Wind wrap (such as Tyvek or other similar product) will be installed over the exte- rior wall OSB sheathing and under the shipping plastic. Be careful nott to damage the wind wrap when removing thes ship- ping plastic.  walls.  that are present int the walls.  av waterproof sealant.  go to Connect Crossovers (p. 61).  60  Packet Pg. 144    Connert Crossovors  2.g  Connect Crossovers waste, gas, telephone and cable TV connections. Follow the Steps below: STEP 1. CONNECT DUCTS (p.61)  This chapter covers crossover connections between units of multi-section homes, including ducts and electrical, water,  STEP 2. CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS (p. 64) STEP 3. INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING (p. 67) STEP 4. CONNECT WATER LINES (p.6 67) STEP 6. CONNECT GAS LINES (p. 70)  STEP 5. CONNECT DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT LINES (p. 69) STEP 7. CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING (p.71)  STEP 1. CONNECT DUCTS  There are three main types of duct crossover connections. Based ont the location oft the  duct, follow thei installation steps on the pagei indicated below:  iv Qualified personnel. Use only qualified personnel to make crossover connec- tions. Consult thel LAHJ1 for licensing or any additional crossover connection re- quirements. Access for service. When- ever possible maintain ac- cess to connection areas fori future maintenance. Make tight connections. Permanent, durable and tight crossover duct con- nections are critical tot the proper performance of the home. Leaky ducts can re- sult in severe moisture problems int the home, dis- comfort from rooms notr re- ceiving the proper amount of conditioned air and high utility bills from wasted heating and/or cooling en- ergy. Figure 34. Furnace over trunk duct, two home sec- tions  Under thei floor (p.6 61). Int the roof cavity (p. 62). Inf floor, through-the-rim, joist (p.6 63)  To prevent air leakage, seal all ductwork connections, including duct collars using one or Galvanized metal straps in combination with galvanized sheet metal screws. For rigid air ducts and connectors, tape and mastics listed to UL 181A. Forf flexible air ducts and connectors, tape and mastics listedt to UL 181B. When heating or cooling equipment isi installed int thel home, thet flexible crossover duct isp provided by ther manufacturer. In all cases the crossover ducti must be listed for exte- rior use and should be wrapped with insulation of at least R-8 under a vapor barrier with There are four common configurations of under floor crossover ducts depending on the number of home sections and the furnacelair handler location. See Table 16 tol locate  more of the following materials:  UNDER FLOOR FLEXIBLE CROSSOVER DUCT ap perm rating of not greater than one. the appropriate figure. Furnace location Furnace over trunk duct Furnace offsetf from trunk duct  TABLE 16. UNDER FLOOR DUCT CONFIGURATIONS  Two home sections See Figure 34 See Figure 34A  Three home sections See Figure 34B See Figure 34C  FURNACE/AIR HANDLER BSECTION FLOOR  ASECTION  HEATDUCT- TAP-OUTCOLLAR- FIELD-INSTALLED FLEXDUCT  FLEXDUCTS SUPPORTS STRAPS  61  Packet Pg. 145    Connect Crossovers  2.g  FURNACE/AIR HANDLER BSECTION FLOOR  Figure 34A. Furnace offset from trunk duct, two home sections  ASECTION  HEATDUCT- TAP-OUTCOLLAR- FELD-NSTALEDFIEX- DUCT ASECTION  FLEXDUCTSUPPORT STRAPS VBOKUNDERFURMACE CSECTION FLOOR FLEXDUCTSUPPORT STRAPS CSECTION FLEXDUCTS STRAPS SUPPORT  FURNACE/AR HANDLER BSECTION  Figure 34B. Furnace over trunk duct, three home sec-  tions  HEATDUCT- TAP-OUTCOLLAR- FELD-NSTALIEDRLEX- DUCT  V-BOXUNDER FURNACE BSECTION  FURNACE/AIR HANDLER  Figure 34C. Furnace offset from trunk duct, three home section  ASECTION HEATDUCT- TAP-OUTCOLLAR- FELD-NSTALIEDFLEX- DUCT  V-BOXUNDER- FURNACE  IN-LINE'V-BOX  For underi floor flexible crossover ducts follow the steps below:  1. Locate collars. Locate the metal crossover collars (or V-box) connected toi the main trunk duct (or furnace) under the home and remove temporary shipping 2. Install inner duct. Apply mastic completely over inner liner and collar/V-box. Slide the crossover ducti innerl liner over the crossover collar/V-box as far asi it will go. Install al large nylon zip tie over the inner liner just above the "ridge" around the crossover collar/V-box.. Apply mastic completely over inner liner and 3. Connect duct insulation. Bring the duct insulation up over the zip tie and above the home's bottom boardi into the floor cavity. Temporarily duct tape it 4. V-box Insulation.' Verify thatt the V-box has been insulated with R-8 minimum. 5. Pull duct wrap. Pullt the crossover duct outer wrap over the top oft thei insula- tion and temporarily secure it to the trunk duct/V-box with duct tape. 6. Install zip tie. Feel for the nylon: zip tie that was installed over the inner liner. Place another nylon zip tie) just under the first one to permanently secure the crossover duct insulation and outer wrap, making sure all oft the insulation is in- 7. Trim duct. Trim the crossover duct to length such that the installed duct will be 8. Connect other end. Follow the same procedure (steps 11 through 5) to connect the opposite end of the crossover duct and any other crossover ducts. 9. Seal joints. Seal the joints between the bottom board and the crossover duct 10. Support duct. Support the crossover duct(s) above the ground using nylon or galvanized metal straps ands saddles spaced every 48 inches O.C. or less. Choose straps at least 1/2 inch wider thant the spacing oft the metal spirals en- casing the crossover duct. Install the straps so they cannot slip between spi-  protection.  Securing the crossover. Between Step 5 and Step 6, drill three or more 1/16 inchl holes an equal distance around and just below the bottom edge of the nylon zip-tie. Install #12 pan! head screws in these holes, through the flexible duct and into the metal crossover collar/V- box. The screw heads should be against the zip- tie. v Cover exposed metal. Completely cover all ex- posed metal connectors with insulation. Apply seal- ants and tapes only to sur- faces that are drya andi free of dust, dirt, and grease. Avoid ground contact. In- stalled crossover ducts must not be in contact with the ground. Unobstructed airflow. Ex- cess length, kinks and bends int the crossover duct will restrict airflow and degrade the home's HVAC system performance. Compressed Duct. Support the duct without compress- ing the insulation and re-  collar/V-box.  against the base oft the trunk duct/V-box.  side the outer wrap.  straight with nol kinks or unnecessary bends.  with bottom board repair tape.  rals. Secure metal straps with galvanized: screws. For ducts installed int ther roof cavity, follow the steps below: remove any temporary shipping protection.  ROOF CAVITY CROSSOVER DUCT  1. Access the duct. Access the crossover location through an access panel in the ceiling or the open sides of the home before the sections are joined and 2. Join ducts. Using the provided flexible duct, join the distribution boxes ine each section of the home as shown inl Figure 35, cutting off any extra duct length to keep the duct as straight as possible. The duct must be joinedi in the center  62  Packet Pg. 146    Connert Crossovors  2.g  with the provided connecter.  stricting airflow.  3. Fasten ducts. Ate each connection point between ducts and distribution boxes oro connectors, secure thei inner duct liner with a nylon strap, apply mastic com- pletely over the connection area, pullt the ducti insulation and outer liner over the connection area and secure them with a second nylon strap. 4. Reinstall panel. Reinstall and secure the access panel, ifa applicable.  FLEXDUCT DISTRIBUTION BOX  Figure 35. Duct crossover located in the roof  DISTRIBUTION BOX  cavity  CEILING  IN THE FLOOR CROSSOVER DUCT Through the rim joist  Where one or more crossover ducts are built into the home's floor system, connect them either through or under the rimj joist depending ont the design of the home. With at through ther rimj joist design, the duct ine eachi floor section terminates at an open- ingi int the marriage line rimj joist. Fixed through-the-rim crossovers employing ar marriage line gasket such as in Figure 36 were completed in Complete Multi-Section Set, STEP 4.F REPAIR ORI INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GASKET (p. 45) and require no additional work here. Connect other through-the-rim joist ducts using one oft thet following methods Method 1: Metal or Duct board through rimj joist without sleeve Connect ducts that pass through ther rimj joist (Figure 36) as follows: 1. Align Crossover duct locations. Verify that when both halves oft the home are installed thatt the crossover duct locations will align properly. 2. Air tight Seal. Verifyt thatt the gasket or duct board used to seal between both halves oft the home isi in good condition and will properly seal the duct system. 3. Connect the Units. Connect the floors usingt the procedure for connecting the  based on the design of the home.  floors (p. 45).  MARRIAGE WALL DECKING DUCT  Figure 36. In-floor duct con- nection through the rimj joist without metal sleeve  DUCT K  63  Packet Pg. 147    Connect Crossovers  2.g  Method 2: Duct board with sleeve  Join duct board ducts with ar metal sleeve as follows (Figure 37): 1. Open bottom board. On thes section oft the home with thet furnace, cut the bot- tom board along the center line oft the twoi floor joists on either side of the cross over duct starting at ther marriage line and extending approximately three feet 2. Open duct. Create an opening in the duct by cutting the duct board as shown 3. Insert sleeve. Insert the provided metal sleeve, centeringi it on the marriage 4. Seal duct. Close the bottom oft the duct and seal it with tape specially made for 5. Seal floor. Replace thet floor insulation toi its original position and seal the bot- tom board tightly with tape specially made for that purpose.  toward the center of the: section. inl Figure 37. linej joint.  that purpose (may be provided).  MARRIAGE WALL  MARRIAGE WALL DUCT VA DUCT La  Figure 37. In-floor duct with crossover using metal sleeve  FLOOR DUCT D CUT BOARD OPEN  FLOOR-  DUCT E SLEEVE  (3INSERT METAL SEAL 5SEALI BOTTOMI BOARD  DUCT  BOTTOM OCUTDUCTOPEN  STEP 2. CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS Multi-section homes may! have one or more electrical crossovers located in the wall(s) Two types of connections may be present att these locations--snap connectors and junction boxes. Identify matching circuits ifr multiple circuits exist at a single crossover lo- cation. These will be coded for identification. Connect snap connectors according tot the connector manufacturer's installation instructions, including fastener requirements. Pull wires. Pull circuit wires intot thej junction box, sliding them through a romex connec- 1. Strip wires. Remove the outer jacket that holds the circuit wires together pro- viding a minimum oft four inches off free wire int the box. 2. Connect wires. Connect wires together matching like colors, using appro- priately sized wire nuts. Use the ground wire to ground thej junction box and/or cover plate(s), ifr metal. Junction boxes may contain single or multiple 15 or20 amp circuits, or a single 240 volt appliance circuit. 3. Replace cover. Reposition thej junction box cover and secure using machine  and/or floor(s) along the marriage line(s).  Hiy Use qualified electricians. Alle electrical work must be performed by a qualified electrician and comply with the 2005 NEC. Disconnect power to the power. home before making connections. Proper use of GFCI cir- cuits. Ensure Ground Fault Circuit Interrupted (GFCI) circuits are con- nected to the proper GFCI protected circuits from the power supply.  JOINING WIRES  Turn off  Connect wires inj junction boxes asi follows (Figure 38): tor and secure snugly. (Figure 38) Dor not over-tighten.  (not sheet metal) screws.  64  Packet Pg. 148    Connert Crossovors  2.g  Figure 38. Types ofj junction box wiring connections  APPROVED CONNECTORS  APPROVED CONNECTORS  APPROVED Q PLASTIC OR METAL BOX (TYPICAL) CLAMPS PERTYPE BOXU USED (TYPICAL)  WHI BLACK GROUND GROUND GROUND WH GROUNDI LUG (METALI BOXES ONLY) DOUBLE 15 OR20A AMP CIRCUITS  WHITE GROUND  CK WHITE GROUND - BLAÇK GROUNDI LUG (METALI BOXES ONLY) 240VA APPLIANCE CIRCUIT  GROUNDI LUG (METAL BOXES ONLY) SINGLE 15 OR2 20 AMP CIRCUIT FLOOR CROSSOVER scribed below:  When making electrical connection(s) int the floor, use one oft the wiring options de- 1. Access wires. Find the crossover location(s) and remove the access panel(s) ifa attached. If access panel openings are not provided, cut through bottom 2. Route wires. Pass the wires through predrilled holes or notches ini the rim joist orift there is a single bumped-out access panel as inl Figure 40, then connect 3. Connect wires. Connect wires via aj junction box or snap-connector(s) as de- 4. Secure wires. Secure wires with staples to adjacent joists or studs within eight 5. Install smash plates. For notched perimeter joists, install steel wire protectors 6. Seal bottom board. Replace insulation and re-install access panels and/or sealt thel bottom board with tape specially made fort that purpose (may be pro- vided). The access panel(s) may bet temporarily installed near the crossover lo-  Method 1: Access panel  Hiy Using snap connectors. Do not use oversized nails or drive nail heads into snap connectors. Some connectors are designed for one-time use only -a new connector must be usedi ift become they rated. Protect cables. Cover all cables with conduit or oth- ers suitable weather- resistant and protective material.  board to expose the wiring (Figure 39).  under the rimj joists. scribed above. (smash plates).  sepa-  inches ofj junction box or snap-connectors).  cation or shipped loose with the home.  HOLE1 THROUGH RIM. JOIST  Figure 39. Electrical cros- soveri floor wires with flush access panels  MM N    IFJ JOISTS ARE NOTCHED, STEEL PROTECTORS MAYI BE PROVIDEDI WITHTHEI HOME ACCESSI PANELI MAY BEI PROVIDED  JUNCTION BOX ORSNAP CONNECTOR  Figure 40. Floor electrical crossover wires with bumped-out. access panel  JUNCTIONI BOXC OR SNAP CONNECTOR  PROTECTIVE COVER (IF NOT PROVIDED, PATCHBOTTOMI BOARD)  65  Packet Pg. 149    Connect Crossovers  2.g  Method 2: Junction box with conduit junction box covers.  1. Access boxes. Ifj junction boxes are note exposed, access themi inside thet floor by cutting the bottom board or by removing the access panel(s). Remove the 2. Connect wires. Ifv wirei is coiled inside one junction box, insert iti intof flexible conduit and pass it under the rimj joists to the opposing box andi makei the con- nection as described above. Ifr no coiled wire is provided, install conduit with wire making connections in both boxes (Figure 40). 3. Cover boxes. Replace and secure covers on junction boxes. 4. Seal floor. Replace any displaced insulation and replace access panel or seal the! bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose (may be provided). Variation to Method 2: Aj junction box may bei installed only on one: side with the other side containing conduit behind an access panel. Bring the conduit to other  side and make one connection in the junction box.  Figure 41. Under: the rim joiste electrical crossover connection with conduit  JUNCTION! BOX (MAY BEL UNDER ORA ALONGSIDE FLOOR. JOIST)-  FOR CROSSOVER MAYBEC COILEDI INSIDE JUNCTIONBOX  FLEXIBLE CONDUIT  RE  WALL CROSSOVERS and/or partition and end walls.  Connect electrical, phone, cable television and stereo speaker wires in marriage walls Ifaccess panels into the marriage walls are not provided, then the connection should have been made prior to bringing the home sections together. If access panels are provided in marriage, end or partition walls, remove the panels, joint the wires as described above using the provided snap-connector, junction box or at a receptacle, and re-attach the access panel (Figure 421 for marriage walls and Figure 43 for  v Avoid damaging crossov- er wires. Carefully fold marriage wall crossover wires sot they stay within a single bay and are not sandwiched between studs when the sections are pulled together. Figure 42. Inside marriage wall crossover connection  partitions and end walls).  CONNECT WIRES AT. JUNCTION BOX, RECEPTACLE OR SNAP-CONNECTOR  OPTIONAL ACCESS PANEL  - BOXI INSIDE HOME  Figure 43. Inside partition or end wall electrical crossover connection  ENDWALL ACCESS TO. JUNCTION ENDWALL  SIDE'A' FLOOR  SIDE' 'B'  FACTOR/-NSTALLED WIRE PROTECTORS  MARRIAGE LINE  66  Packet Pg. 150    Connert Crossovurss  2.g  STEP 3. INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING  To ensure all metal parts are effectively grounded, electrically bond all chassis together 1. Find lugs. Determine ifs solderless ground lugs are provided ont thet front or rear 2. Attach wire. Iflugs are provided, uncoil the bonding wire (#8 minimum bare copper wire) from one: side of the home and connect it to the lug provided on the opposing side using ap paint penetrating star washer, tighten the set screw firmly on the wire and repeat for any additional home sections. Torque thes set  as follows (Figure 44):  frame outriggers or headers.  screw per the manufacturer's requirements.  MARRIAGEI LINE  Figure 44. Electrical bond- ing ofr multi-section homes  FLOOR 1  SOLDERLESSLUG EACHHALF OF HOME  REAR OUTRIGGER #81 MIN. COPPER ATI MARRIAGEI LINE GROUNDI WIRE  3. Attach strap. If ground lugs and copper wire are not provided, attach the pro- vided fouri inch bonding strap to each pair of adjacent chasses with two #8 x  3/4" self-tappingr metal screws (one screw each side).  STEP 4. CONNECT WATER LINES  Connect water linesi inside the floor through access panels or below the bottom board as 1. Remove panels. Remove access panels from each home section. 2. Remove caps. Remove shipping caps from ends of water lines, if present. 3. Pull lines. Pull water lines through holes in rimj joist or attach shipped loose 4. Connect pipes. Connect threaded water lines using flexible pipe or a rigid connector line (if provided). and connector fittings (do not use lubricants or sea-  follows: WATER LINES  y Applying cement. Follow cement manufacturer's in- structions with and respect to application drying time. Allow cement tot fully cure before filling pipes with water.  ACCESSED THROUGH PANELS  flex connectors, if applicable (Figure 45). 5. Test. Test connections for leaks.  lants).  6. Seal floor. Securely replace insulation and access panels.  Figure 45. Water line cros- sover with access panels  v Choosing cement type. Uset the proper cementi for water lines as itr may differ from the cement used for thel DWV system.  67  Packet Pg. 151    Connect Crossovers  2.g  WATER LINES DROPPED BELOW BOTTOM BOARD sure pipe ends are clean and smooth. sealants) (Figure 46). 3. Test. Test connections for leaks.  1. Remove caps. Remove protective shipping caps from ends of pipes and make 2. Connect pipes. Connect threaded water lines usingf flexible pipe or a rigid connector line (if provided) and connector fittings (do not usel lubricants or 4. Protect pipes. Wrap water lines with insulation and bottom board shipped loose with home or otherwise protect to prevent freezing. Tape bottom board using tape specially made for that purpose (may! be provided) and staple with 7/16" x 1/2" staples at fouri inches O.C. around bottom board using a divergent (stitch): stapler or equivalent. Generally, only insulation isr necessary to protect water supply lines fromi freezing when the home is skirted. Some homeowners may desire to protect their water supply lines with al heat tape. This tape must be approved for manufactured home use by ar nationally recognized testing agency and bei installed in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. An electrical outlet has been provided under the home for the heat tape. This out- let is protected by a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter and should not be used for  any other purpose.  MARRIAGEI LINE RECEIVING: SIDE  SUPPLY SIDE (SIDE WITHWATER! HEATER) WATERLINE  Figure 46. Water line cross- over through bottom board  WATERI LINE PROTECTIVE CAP  CAPTOBE REMOVED ON-SITE DIRECTION OF FLOW -  WATERI LINE ANDI ELBOWS SHIPPEDL LOOSE TOBE ADDED ONS SITE  68  Packet Pg. 152    Connert Crossovors  2.g  STEP 5. CONNECT DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT LINES Complete portions oft the drain, waste and vent (DWV) system that are below thef floor  as follows: 1. Remove Remove caps. burrs.  iv Providing required clear- ances. Provide the drain outlet with a minimum clearance oft threei inches in any direction from all parts of the structure or any appurtenances and with not less than 18i inch- es unrestricted clearance directly int front of the drain outlet. Provide any clea- nouts with a minimum clearance of 12 inches di- rectly in front ofi its open- ing. Figure 47. Drain crossover connection  shipping covers from pipes extending through the bot-  tom board; inspect pipes and fittings and clean them of dirt, obstructions and 2. Assemble pipes. Using the drain schematic drawing provided with the home, begin assembling the DWV system starting at the location farthest from the sewerlseptic connection and working towards the outlet, fastening the pipe with cement or adjustable screw-clamp connectors, if provided (Figure 47). As the system is assembled, support the piping with temporary blocking. Unless oth- erwise noted on thes schematic diagram, provide a minimum 1/4 inch per foot slope towards the sewerlseptic using a plumber's level. Where as slope of 1/4 inch perf foot cannot be maintained, use a minimum slope of 1/8 inchp perf foot andi install ofa a full-size clean-out at the uppermost point oft the run (Figure 48).  CEMENT COUPLING  FLOOR  FLOOR  SUPPORT STRAPS  FASTEN PIPINGWITH CLAMPS  DIRECTION OFFLOW COUPLING CONNECTIONF PIPE COUPLER  DIRECTION OFFLOW  Figure 48. DWV system  3  FLOOR PIPE SUPPORTS SLOPE DOUBLEELL  DRAIN DROPOUT DUST COVER  DRAIN DROPOUT DUST ÇOVER SLOPE (SUBSTITUTE FORI ELBOW ANDI PROVIDE. AFULL SIZE CLEAN OUTWHEN REQUIRED) LONG TURNI ELL  DRAIN DROPOUT DUST COVER 1 LONG TURNI ELL PLUG  SLOPE_ LONGT TURN ELL TOSEWER /SEPTIC  LONG TURN TEE WYE_  CLEAN-OUT  SANITARY TEE WYE  3. Test. After all drain lines have been connected, conduct at two-part leakage test Part 1. With all fixtures connected, and all tub and shower drains plugged, fillt the system with water to the rim of thet toilet bowl through al higher fix- ture. Release all trapped air, replace tub and shower plugs, backfill fix- tures, and allow the system tos stand at least 15 minutes. Check for leaks. Drain thes system. IfI leaks are found, repair and retest. Part 2. Plug all fixtures, sinks, showers, and tubs andi fill with water. Re- lease the water in all fixtures simultaneously to obtain the maximum possi- ble drain piping flow. As wateri is draining, check for leaks. If any are found, 4. Connect to outlet. Connect the main drain line to the site sewer/septic hook- up, using an approved elastomer coupling (Figure 49).  ont the completed drainage system as follows:  y Choosing glues. Use only solvents and glues com- patible with the pipe (ABS or PVC). Follow manufac- turer's instructions.  repair and retest.  69  Packet Pg. 153    Connect Crossovers  2.g  Figure 49. DWV connection tosewer/septic  FLOOR  EXAMPLES OF d CONNECTION PIPEA AND FITTINGS (NOT SUPPLIED BYTHEI MANUFACTURER)  FLOW SUPPORT STRAP ATAMAX. OF4FEET ON CENTER CAP AND CHAIN APPROVED COUPLER SITE SEWER HOOKUP  5. Install supports. Install permanent drain line supports ata a distance of four feet O.C. orl less (see Figure 50). Alternate DWV pipe support may be usedi ifa ap-  proved byt the local authority having jurisdiction.  DRAIN PIPING SUPPORTS INSIDE OFN MAINE BEAM  DRAIN PIPING SUPPORTS OUTSIDE OF MAIN BEAM  CROSSMEMBER TYPICAL BOTTOM BOARD MIN. 1x3TOBE  FLOORI RIMI RAIL FLOOR. JOIST (TYP) BOTTOMI BOARD DRAINI PIPEV WITH MINIMUM1 1/4" SLOPE  Figure 50. DWV pipe sup- port options iv Protect pipes from freez- ing. If the home is to be left unheated in cold weather, pour antifreeze solution into all drain traps, including sinks, tubs and toilets. Be sure that the an- tifreeze is safe for thet fix- tures and P-traps. Installing quick discon- nect fittings. Do not use tools, lubricants or sealants with disconnect fit- quick tings. Gas test precautions. Do not connect to gas service until tests described in Connect Utilities been successfully com- pleted.  PLUMBERS' TAPE, PLASTIC STRAPPING OR OTHER: SUITABLE MATERIAL(YP) PROCEDURE:  PLUMBERS TAPE, PLASTIC MAINE BEAM SUITABLEI MATERIAL BOARD (TYPICAL)  PAINTED, COATED, STRAPPING ORC OTHER  DRAINP PIPE WRAPPED, OR  WITHMAX. PROTECTED FROM FASTENED TOF FLOOR 1/4" SLOPE DETERIORATION JOIST THROUGHI BOTTOM  1)ADDA MINIMUM 1x3 LUMBERI BETWEEN FRAME CROSSMEMBERSI DIRECTLY ABOVE DRAINI PIPING BYF PUSHINGI UP ON1 THEI BOTTOMI BOARD/ ANDF RESTING" THEI LUMBER ONT TOP ORI INSIDE OF1 THE 2)V WRAP SUPPORT: STRAPPING AROUNDI PIPING AND 1x FRAMINGI MATERIAL. FASTEN STRAPPING1 TO 3)OTHERI METHODS TOI PROVIDE SUPPORT MAYE BEL USED1 TOI MAINTAIN! MIN. PIPE SLOPE REQUIREMENTS WITHT THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL/ AUTHORITY HAVING. JURISDICTION. ELECTRICAL WIRINGI MAYE BE SECURED1 TOI WIDEI FACE OF FLOOR. JOISTS THAT ARE OUTSIDE OF BEAM. MAKE SURE FASTENERS! SECURING: STRAPPINGI PENETRATE! BOTTOMI EDGE OF  CROSSMEMBERI LEG ASS SHOWN. SUPPORT, AS SHOWNI BELOW. CAUTION THEI MAINI STRAPPINGI MAY ALSOBE INSTALLEDI DIRECTLYTOTHE STEEL CHASSIS WITH SELF-TAPPING SCREWS.  4)LUMBERI MATERIAL TOE BEF PROTECTED FROMI MOISTURE. JOISTS TOE ELIMINATE POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHORTS.  FLOORI DECKING 2x6FLOORJ JOIST WHEN PIPEI RUNS BETWEEN. JOISTS ADD1x31 WI Q7/8'4212x16GA STAPLES OR( (2).131x3" NAILS EACHI END (MAY BE1 TOE-NAILED) 2x3 OR2x4V WI (2)7/16"x 2-1/2") x1 16 GA. STAPLES OR( (2).131x x3"NAILS SUPPORT STRAPS @ 48" O/C MAXA ATTACHED! WI (2)7/16" x1-1/4"x166 GA. STAPLES OR .131.x3" NAILSA ATE EACHEND OF STRAP  have  FLOORD DECKING 2x6FLOOR JOIST( (TYP.) (2)7/16"x1 1/4"x1 16 GA. STAPLES OR (2) .131x3"! NAILSA AT EACHE END OF STRAP STEEL STRAPS AT4 48" O/CN MAX  ALTERNATE  ADD/ ADDTIONAL STRAP WITHIN 12" OF WHERE PIPET TURNS VERTICAL.  ADD ADDTIONAL BLOCKI WITHIN: 24" OFV WHERE PIPE TURNS VERTICAL.  6. Insulate. Replace all insulation and repair anyt tears or openings in bottom board.  70  Packet Pg. 154    Connert Crossovurss  2.g  STEP 6. CONNECT GAS LINES  The gas crossover connection may use quick disconnect fittings or threaded connectors. Find the connection location below the floor at ther marriage line and gather the connec- For quick disconnect fittings (Figure 51), remove any dust caps and then with one hand, pull back on the quick disconnect device, snapi it over the quick disconnect adaptor and For threaded connectors, remove the black cap and nipple (or any other plugs, such as ab black iron plug) from both the supply and receiving sides and screw the connector Check for leaks before connecting to gas service (see Connect Utilities, STEP3 3.  tors (they may be shipped loose ifr not present under thel home).  release itt to complete the connection. onto thes supply and return pipes as necessary. CONNECT GAS SERVICE, p. 100).  SHUT-OFF VALVE INSTALLED ON INLET SIDE  Figure 51. Gas crossover connection  FLEX CONNECTOR FACTORY INSTALLED  iy Gas Crossover. A quick disconnect may be installed ont the gasl line crossover, buti it may not replace the shut-off valve. A shut-off valve is required on thei inlet side oft the gas line crossov-  OR  FEMALE CAP  er.  MALECAP  DIRECTION OF GASI FLOW  STEP 7. CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING Install telephone and cable television wiring ina accordance with the requirements of the LAHJ, thel NEC and NFPAI No.70-2005. When making crossover connections ori instal- lingt telephone or cablet television wires, do not run them in the same raceway as, ori in  v Installing wiring. Wheni in- stalling telephone and ca- blet television wires, do not damage electrical wires, plumbing lines or ducts. Serious personal injury or death could resulti from damage to electrical wires.  close proximity to, high voltage electrical conductors or cables. Wires should only be installed by trained professionals.  go to Complete the Interior (p. 72)  71  Packet Pg. 155    Complete the Interior  2.g  Complete the Interior  This chapter covers the completion of thel home's interior finishes including finishing walls, ceilings, flooring, trim and mis-  cellaneous items.  Follow the Steps below:  STEP 1. ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS (p. 72) STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD (p. 72) STEP 3. COMPLETE CARPET (p.72) STEP 4. COMPLETE TRIM (p. 73) STEP 5. INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ITEMS (p. 73) STEP 1. ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS Align and secure walls at marriage line openings as follows: 1. Align walls. Align walls and clamp in place. 2. Fasten walls. Secure walls together when necessary.  3. Fill gaps. Fill any remaining gaps over 1 inch with wood ors sheathing materi- Does the home require patching and finishing gypsum board walls or ceil- YES, go to STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD, (p.72) NO, go to STEP3. COMPLETE CARPET, (p.72)  al. ings?  STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD Finish all unfinished gypsum board walls and ceilings as follows:  1. Install panels. Install ship loose gypsum panels using a 1/4 inch diameter bead of polyviny! acetate (PVA) adhesive on all framing members and mini- mum 1-1/2i inchl long drywall screws, nails or staples at six inches O.C. along panel edges and 12i inches O.C. int the fieldi into framing members. Adhesive is not required when installing gypsum pieces usedf for trim or close-up materi- 2. Mud seams. Mud and tape all seams and corners, filling all fastener depres- 3. Paint. When the final coat of mud is dry, sand, prime and paint all unfinished gypsum board to match existing paint color and finish texture.  v Fastening gypsum. When attaching gypsum board, depress, but do not break the paper face with thei fas- tener. Breaking the paper will weaken the connection. Using alternative materials. Obtain the home manufac- turer's approval before us- ingi interior finish materials other than those provided with the home. y Installing carpet. Only ex- perienced carpet installers should install carpet. Fail- ure tot followt the carpet manufacturer's directions may void the carpet war- ranty.  als.  sions. Follow mud manufacturer's directions.  STEP 3. COMPLETE CARPET Install and seam ship loose or rolled carpet as follows: at the marriage line seams as  1. Prepare floor. Clean the floor of all dirt and debris ands smooth the floor deck 2. Lay pad. Lay down the carpet pad, if provided. Seal seams with pad tape. 3. Preparing carpet for cutting. Do not release stay nails. Let the carpet sec- tions overlap. Using NON STAINING CHALK, snap al line on the top edge across the length of the seam. Make sure the line overlaps both sides oft the  to ensure al level and smooth  necessary  sur-  face.  Staple pad tot floor about 6i inches from the seam.  72  Packet Pg. 156    Complete,the  2.g Inte  tions overlap. Using NON STAINING CHALK, snap a line on the top edge across the length of the seam. Make sure thel line overlaps both sides of the 4. Making the guide cuts. Make 1 inch long cuts through BOTH pieces of car- 5. Making the seam cut. Flip the carpet edges face down. Place a straight edge on the backing lined up with the guide cuts. Cutt the carpet along this line. Re- 6. Sealing the seam. Using liquid latex carpet sealer or specifically designed hot glue sticks (for carpet sealing) apply at thin bead of the sealer tot the raw edges of both sides of the carpet. Carpet seam sealers contain an ultraviolet marker 7. Starting the seam. Sett the seaming iron to 2or3 3. Center the seaming tape under the pieces of carpet. Place the iron on the seaming tape. Leave itin place until the adhesive softens. When the adhesive has softened the iron will 8. Completing the seam. Slide thei iron untili its back edge slightly overlaps the place where itsi fronte edge was. Press the edges of the carpet together in the softened adhesive. Rollt the Seam Tractor over the section tot further press the backing into the adhesive. The Seam Tractor should be of the solid roller type, as a Star Wheeled Tractor can damage the! hot carpet fibers. Place the NON- HEAT-CONDUCTIVE (plastic or wood) weight over the completed seam. Check the next section of the seaming tape tos see thati it has softened. Ifso, repeat this step until all seams have been completed. Continue moving the 9. Blending the seam. Roll thes seam tractor slightly across the: seam tol blend the carpet fibers. Carpet should be cool before tractoring. 10. Keep scraps. Retain reasonable size carpet scraps to protect carpet and Using fine gauge wire staples or pin nails install ship loose molding and wainscot pane- lingt to finish trimming out ceilings, marriage line walls, front and rear end walls and Remove all strapping, blocking and packaging from appliances, windows and doors. Install any drapes, mini-blinds, mirrors, door stops, closet shelves and hardware per  may void the carpet war- ranty.  carpet. pete every 21 feet.  Stagger seams. Stager all seams. For ex- ample, locate the carpet left pad of seam threei line inches and to the marriage inches carpet seam threei right of marriage line. y Carpet Manufacturers will not warranty their producti if carpet seam sealer is not used at the seam.  peat for each piece of carpet.  that glows when exposed to al blacklight. slide easily, butt there will be no smoke.  to  weight as your move. flooring during move-in. STEP 4. COMPLETE TRIM passageway doors where necessary.  STEP 5. INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ITEMS the product manufacturer's installation instructions. Proceed based on the foundation type:  Pier and ground anchor, go to Install Stabilizing Systems, (p. 74) Load bearing perimeter wall, go to Connect Utilities (p. 95).  73  Packet Pg. 157    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  Install Stabilizing Systems  This chapter covers the design and installation of the stabilizing system which secures the home against lateral and up- wardi forces caused by wind. The: system covered here uses earth (or ground) anchors and steel straps connected to the home's longitudinal steel beams and/or exterior walls. Stabilizer plates may also be used to prevent the anchor headi from moving laterally ini the ground. An anchor, strap and stabilizer plate (ifu used) together are referred to as at tie down.  Follow the Steps below:  STEP 1. DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS (p. 74) STEP 2. DETERMINE TIEDOWN CONFIGURATION (p. 89)  STEP 3. SELECT. ANCHORS (p. 89) STEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS (p. 90) STEP 5. INSTALL STRAPS (p. 91) STEP 6. TIGHTEN AND ADJUST STRAPS (p. 94) STEP 1. DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS  Create as sketch of the home plan showing the exterior walls, marriage line(s) (if any) andi frame I-beams (this will be similar to thel base sketch created inl Install Footings, See Table 171 for al list of anchor locations, types and wheret they are required. Page numbers where the requirements are provided are noted int thel last column. As each anchor location is determined, mark ito on thes sketch, noting important dimen- sions such as spacing between anchors. When complete, this willl be the home's tie  page 20).  v Need for as stabilizing sys- tem. The home must be: se- cured against the wind by the use of an anchor as- sembly foundation or an system. alternative Where site or other conditions pro- hibit the use oft the manufac- turer's instructions, a regis- tered engineer or registered architect must design the stabilizing system. Alternate foundation designs must be approved byt the manufac- tururer and DAPIA. Refer to page 81 for directions for ob- taining available approved desgns.  down plan Figure 52 and Figure 53. TABLE 17. ANCHOR LOCATION TYPES  Location Sidewall Longitudinal Marriage line Tag Unit Porch Post Offset Unit  Type Frame Vertical Frame Vertical Vertical Frame Vertical Vertical  Wind Zonel Wind Zones II Yes No Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes  See page 75 87 87 89 89 89 89  and III Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes  1-Installr marriage line anchors prior tor movingt thel home over thet top oft the anchorl locations and then return to Set the Home or Complete Multi Section Set respectively.  74  Packet Pg. 158    Install Stabilizing  Systess  Figure 52 and Figure 53 illustrate typical anchor locations for a double section home in  Wind Zone I and' Wind Zones Ila and III respectively.  Flood and seismic forces. Thes stabilizing system re- quirements int this chapter do not consider flood or seismic loads and are not intended for use ini flood or seismic hazard areas. In those areas ar registered ing system. Alternate foun- dation designs must be ap- proved by the manufac- tururer and DAPIA. Figure 52. Typical anchor lo- cations for a double section home in Wind Zonel  NEAR BEAM TIEDOWNAREA  MULTI-SECTION engineer or registered archi- FLOOR SHOWN tect must design the stabiliz-  SEPARATED FORCLARITY  NEARANDI FARI BEAM TIEDOWNAREA  FRAME TIEDOWNS MAYE BE SECURED TOI BOTH NEAR ANDI FAR BEAMS (WIND: ZONE 1 ONLY) ORE EITHER NEAR ORF FARI BEAMS (WIND: ZONE2AND: 3)A AS REQUIRED BY TABLES 18, 19AND20.  NEARI BEAM TIEDOWN AREA  LARGE OPENING 48" ORMORE  Figure 53. Typical anchor lo- cations fora a double section home in Wind Zones llor III  I-BEAMS LARGE OPENING  LARGE OPENING  DOUBLEI WIDE FLOOR: SHOWN SEPARATED FORCLARITY >I-BEAM  COLUMN' VERTICAL TIEDOWN, - -  7  SMALL OPENING  NEARI BEAM FARI BEAM TIEDOWN AREA NEAR BEAM A=S STANDARD SIDEWALL "G= MARRIAGEWALL FRAME 9éLONGITUDINAL TIEDOWN =SIDEWALL FRAME TIEDOWN  TIEDOWN AREA SYMBOLI LEGEND VERTICAL TIEDOWN SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHORS  TIEDOWN. AREA'  TIEDOWN  Use Tables 18, 19 and 201 to determine the spacing between anchors for Wind Zones I, lland III, respectively. Spacing requirements will vary depending on the type of home (single or multi-section), the slope of the roof, the width oft thet floor fore each section, the sidewall height, I-beam spacing and the height from the ground to the strap attachment point. Determine the values for thel home. Using thet tablet for the appropriate wind: zone, determine the column and row that corresponds tot the characteristics oft thel home. The value on the tables is the maximum distance between anchors. Keep in mind that sidewall frame tie downs must be located no more than two feet from each end of  v Maximum spacing require- ments. The LAHJ may have anchor spacing requirements that supercede the values provided int this manual.  home.  75  Packet Pg. 159    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING Wind Zone 1 Tiedown Spacing Table 18 Single Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. Table 18a Multi Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. Table 18b Triple Secton Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. Table 18c Multi Section Roof Pitch5 5/12 Max. Table 18d Triple Section Roof Pitch 5/121 Max. Table 18e Multi Section Roof Pitch6 6/12 Max. Table 18f Triple Section Roof Pitch 6/121 Max. Table 18g Multi Section Roof Pitch 7/12 Max. Table 18h Triple Section Roof Pitch 7/121 Max. Table 19 Single Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. Table 19a Multi Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. Table 19b Single Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. Table 19c Multi Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. Table 19d Multi Section Roof Pitch5 5/121 Max. Table 19e Multi Section Roof Pitch! 5/121 Max. Table 19f Multi Section Roof Pitch 6/12 Max. Table 19g Multi Section Roof Pitch 7/12 Max. Table 20 Single Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. Table 20a Multi Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. Table 20b Single Section Roof Pitch4 4.36/12 Max. Table 20c Multi Section Roof Pitch 4.36/12 Max. TIEDOWN LIMITATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS plied ata a minimum 30 degree angle from horizontal.  Page No. 78 78 79 79 80 80 80 81 81 82 82 83 83 84 84 84 85 85 85 86 86  Wind Zone 11 Tiedown Spacing - High Pitch Truss  Wind Zone 21 Near I-Beam Tiedown Spacing Wind Zone 2F Far I-Beam Tiedown: Spacing  Wind Zone 21 Nearl -Beam Tiedown Spacing -High Pitch Truss Wind Zone 2F Far I-Beam Tiedown Spacing - High Pitch Truss  Wind Zone 3 Near I-Beam Tiedown Spacing Wind Zone 3F Farl I-Beam' Tiedown Spacing  Anchors shall be certified for site conditions including soil typet for design capacity of 3150 Ibs. with resistant pull load ap- Anchors may bei inset fromt the edge of the sidewall 6" maximum for a near beam set and 10" minimum for af far beam set.  Thet floor widths listedi int the following charts include the following ranges of widths:  10 Wide = 120" 12' Wide = 136" - 144" 14 Wide = 156" - 168" 16 Wide: = 180" - 190" 18 Wide = 204"- -210" 20 Wide =1 120" 24 Wide = 136"- - 144" 28 Wide =1 156" - 168" 32 Wide = 178" - 186"  The maximum overhang allowed for a single section is 6" and the maximum overhang allowed for a multi section is 24". Thet following frame tiedown charts list the maximum floor height measured from the top of the grade to the connection point of thet tiedown strap tot thel I-beam. Cross reference the maximum allowable pier height (Table 9 and Table 12) with maximum allowable floor height listed int thet frame tiedown charts. If maximum height listed int frame tiedown charts is ex- ceeded, then designs must be provided by a registered professional engineer or registered architect. Contact the manufacturer if the home you are attempting to set has a floor width, I-beam spacing, wall height or roof pitch that is not shown in any of thet following charts (or listed as NA). The * listed after anyt tiedown spacing signifies that a 60 degree angle has been exceeded and an additional strap must Ground anchors must not be spaced closer than the minimum spacing permitted by the listing or certification. Verify that sidewall vertical tiedown bracket spacing meets the requirements for Wind Zone 2&3 3 homes. Bracket spacing may be in-  be added to thet far beam.  creased or additional brackets may be added as required.  76  Packet Pg. 160    Install Stabilizing  Systens:  Figures 54  FLOOR  + NEARI I-BEAM NEARI BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN 60° MAX. STABILIZER PLATE GROUND. ANCHOR  FAR I-BEAM  6"MAXI INSET FORI NEAR BEAM1 TIEDOWN 10" MINI INSET FORI FARI BEAM TIEDOWN  FAR BEAMI FRAME TIEDOWN INSTALLED WHENI NEARI BEAM TIEDOWN EXCEEDS 60° GROUND LEVEL  Wind Zone 1 Frame Tiedown: When the angle of the near beam frame tiedown strap exceeds 60 degrees the far beam frame tie-  down strap isi installed in addition to the near beam strap.  SIDEWALL VERTICAL TIEDOWN- 6'MAXINSET FORI NEAR BEAM TIEDOWN 10" MINI INSET FORI FARI BEAM TIEDOWN  FLOOR  1 NEARI I-BEAM NEAR BEAM FRAME 60° TIEDOWN MAX. STABILIZER PLATE GROUND ANCHOR  FARI I-BEAM  GROUNDI LEVEL  Wind Zone 2 & 31 Near Beam Frame Tiedown  When the angle oft the near beam frame tiedown strap exceeds 60 degrees thet tiedown strap must be installed tot the far beam frame  as shown below.  SIDEWALL VERTICAL TIEDOWN- 6" MAXI INSET FORI NEAR BEAM TIEDOWN 10" MIN INSET FORI FARI BEAM TIEDOWN  FLOOR  I NEARI I-BEAM  FARI-BEAM  FARI BEAMI FRAME TIEDOWN INSTALLED WHEN NEARI BEAM TIEDOWN EXCEEDS 60° GROUND LEVEL  STABILIZER PLATE GROUND. ANCHOR  AGRICUTURE  Wind Zone 2 &3F Far Beam Frame Tiedown  77  Packet Pg. 161    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  TABLE18.: SINGLESECTION- -WIND: ZONE1F FRAME1 TIEDOWNS SPACING (FT)-MAX. ROOF PITCH4.36/12 Max. Max. 10ftr Max. Width 12ft Max. Width 14ftMax. Width 16ft Max. Width 18ftMax. Width Wall Floor I-Beam! Spacing I-Beams Spacing I-Beam Spacing I-Beams Spacing I-Beam Spacing Height Height 95.5" 99.5" 95.5" 99.5" 95.5" 99.5" 95.5" 99.5" 25" 6-0"* 4'-0"* 12-0" 12'-0" 12-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12-0" NA NA 9-2"* 8'-3"* 12-0" 12'-0" 12-0" 12'-0" NA NA 4'-7"* 41-1"* 7-2"* 6'-8"* 9'-3" 9'-0" NA NA NA NA 6-2"* 5-8"* 8-2"* 7-10"* 25" 5'-0"* NA 12-0" 11-10" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" 12'-0" NA NA 7-9"* 7-0"* 12-0" 11'-6" 12-0" 12'-0" NA NA 41-1"* NA 6-4"* 6'-0"* 8'-3" 8'-0" NA NA NA NA 5'-6"* 5'-1"* 7-3"* 7'-0"* 25" 41-5"* NA 11-1" 10'-3" 12-0" 12'-0" 12-0" 12'-0" NA NA 6'-8"* 6'-0"* 10'-4" 9'-10" 12'-0" 12'-0" NA NA NA NA 51-9"* 5'-5"* 7'-5" 7'-2" NA NA NA NA 4'-11"* 4-7"* 6'-6"* 6'-3"*  99.5" 12'-0" 12'-0" 10'-9" 9'-7" 12'-0" 12'-0" 9'-6" 8'-6" 11-2" 12'0" 8'-7" 7'-8"  48" 7ft 67" 80" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  TABLE18a.! MULTISECTION-WIND: ZONE1 1 FRAME1 TIEDOWN SPACING (FT)-MAX. ROOF PITCH4.36/12 Max. Max. 20ft Max. Width 24ft Max. Width 28ft Max. Width 32ftMax. Width  Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 7ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 12'-0"* 12'-0"* 91-8"* 9'-6"* 12-0"* 12'-0"* 8'-7"* 8'-6"* 12'-0"* 12'-0"* 7-1"* 6-2"*  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 12-0" 12'-0"* 91-5"* 9'-4"* 12'0" 12'-0"* 8'-4"* 8'-4"* 12'-0" 12'-0"* 8'-8"* 71-9"*  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 12'-0" 12'-0" 91-2"* 9'-2"* 12'-0" 12'0" 8'-2"* 8'-2"* 12'-0" 12'-0" 9-10"* 8'-11"*  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 12'-0" 12'-0" 9'-0" 91-0"* 12'-0" 12'-0" 8'-0" 8-1"* 12'-0" 12'-0" 7'-2" 9'-10"*  FESSIONA CHARLES PORTER l/ic/22 32159 ORLAHOM  The" listed after any tiedown spacing signifies that a 60 degree angle has been exceeded and an additional strap must  be added to the far beam.  78  Packet Pg. 162    Install Stabilizing  Systess  TABLE18b. MULTISECTION- WIND: ZONE1F FRAME1 TIEDOWN SPACING (FT)-MAX. ROOF PITCH4.36/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 7ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  36ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 12'-0" 12'-0"* 91-5"* 9'-4"* 12'-0" 12'-0"* 8-5"* 8'4"* 12'-0" 12'-0"* 7'-6"* 7-6"*  42ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 12'-0" 12-0" 9-2"* 91-2"* 12-0" 12-0" 8'-2"* 8'-2"* 12-0" 12'-0" 71-5"* 7-4"*  48ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 12'-0" 12'-0" 9'-0" 91-1"* 12-0" 12'-0" 8'-0" 8'-1"* 12-0" 12'-0" 7'-2" 7-3"*  TABLE18c. MULTISECTION- WIND: ZONE1 1F FRAME TIEDOWNS SPACING (FT)-MAX. ROOF PITCH5/12 Max. Max. 20f fti Max. Width 24ft Max. Width 28ft Max. Width 32ftN Max. Width Wall Floor I-Beam Spacing I-Beam! Spacing I-Beam Spacing I-Beam Spacing  Height Height 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  95.5"-99.5" 12'-0"* 10'-0"* 5'-3"* 4-7"* 12'-0"* 91-0"* 4'-10"* 4-3"*  95.5"-99.5" 8'-3" 11'-4"* 6'-1"* 5'-4"* 7'-6" 10'-2"* 5'-8"* 5'-0"*  95.5"-99.5" 11-0" 7'-5" 6'-5"* 5'-10"* 9'-11" 6'-9" 6'-1"* 5'-6"*  95.5"-99.5" 12'-0" 9'-1" 4'-6" 6'-2"* 10'-11" 8'-3" 4'-2" 5'-9"*  ROFESSIONA CHARLES PORTER (msg, de Ph OFLAHOHE  The' *. listed after any tiedown spacing signifies that a 60 degree angle has been exceeded and an additional strap must  be added to the far beam.  79  Packet Pg. 163    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  TABLE 18d. MULTI SECTION WINDZ ZONE1FRAME TIEDOWN! SPACING (FT)- MAX. ROOF PITCH5/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  36ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 8-3" 11'-9"* 51-5"* 4'-11* 71-6" 10'-7"* 5-2"* 4-7"*  42ft Max. Width I-Beam! Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 10'-9" 7'-4" 5'-7"* 5'-1"* 9'-9" 6-7" 5'-4"* 4'-10"*  48ft Max. Width I-Beam! Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 11'-7" 8'-9" 5-7"* 5'-3"* 10'-7" 8-0" 5'-4"* 5-0"*  TABLE1 18e. MULTIS SECTION- -WIND ZONE1 1 FRAME1 TIEDOWN SPACING (FT)- -MAX. ROOF PITCH 6/12  Max. Max. 20ftN Max. Width 24ft Max. Width Wall Floor I-Beam Spacing I-Beams Spacing  28f ft Max. Width 32ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 9'-9" 6'-7" 6'-0"* 5'-5"* 9'-0" 6'-0"* 5'-8"* 5'-2"*  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 10'-7" 8'-0" 4'-1"* 5'-8"* 9'-9" 7'-4" 5'-9"* 5'-4"*  Height Height 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  95.5"-99.5" 12-0"* 9-2"* 4-11"* 4'-3"* 11-1"* 8'-4"* 4'-7"* 4'-0"* 36f ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 7'-1" 10'-1"* 5'0"* 4'-6"* 6'-6" 91-3"* 4'-9"* 4'-3"*  95.5"-99.5" 7'-6" 10'-2"* 5'-8"* 5'-0"* 6'-9" 9'-3"* 5'-4"* 4'9"*  TABLE1 18f. MULTI SECTION- WINDZ ZONE 1FRAMET TIEDOWNS SPACING (FT)- MAX. ROOF PITCH6/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  42f ft Max. Width I-Beam! Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 9'-2" 6'-2" 5-1"* 4'-8"* 8'-5" 5'-8"* 4'-10"* 4'-5"*  48f ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 9'-9" 7'-4" 5'-1"* 4'-9"* 9'-0" 6'-9" 4'-10"* 4'-6"*  ROFESSION CHARLES PORTER (msg,  de  The" * listed after any tiedown spacing signifies that a 60 degree angle has been exceeded and an additional strap must  be added to the far beam.  80  Packet Pg. 164    Install Stabilizing  Systess  TABLE: 18g. MULTISECTION- WINDZ ZONE: 1FRAME TIEDOWN: SPACING (FT)- -MAX. ROOF PITCH7/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  20ft Max. Width 24ft Max. Width 28ftN Max. Width 32ft Max. Width  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 11'-3"* 8'-5"* 41-8"* 4'-0"* 10-3"* 7'-8"* 4'-4"* NA  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 6-10" 91-3"* 51-4"* 4'-9"* 6'-3" 8'-6"* 5'-0"* 4'-5"*  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 8'-10" 6'-0" 51-7"* 5'-1"* 8'-1" 5'-6" 5'-4"* 4'-10"*  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 9'-6" 7-2" 5'-8"* 5'-3"* 8'-9" 6'-7" 5'-4"* 5'-0"*  TABLE 18h. MULTI SECTION WIND: ZONE 1F FRAME1 TIEDOWN: SPACING (FT)-MAX. ROOF PITCH7/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  36ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 6-3" 8'-10"* 4-7"* 4'-2"* 5'-9" 8-2"* 41-5"* 4'-0"*  42f ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 7'-11" 5'-4" 41-9"* 4'-3"* 7'-4" 5'-0" 4'-6"* 4'-1"*  48ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 8'-4" 6'-4" 41-7"* 4'-4"* 7'-9" 5'-11" 4'-5"* 4'-2"*  FESSION CHARLES PORTER l/ic/22 32159 ORLAHOM  The" listed after any tiedown spacing signifies that a 60 degree angle has been exceeded and an additional strap must  be added to the far beam.  81  Packet Pg. 165    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  TABLE: 19. SINGLE SECTION- WIND: ZONE: 21 NEARI I-BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT)- MAX. ROOF PITCH4.36/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 7ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  12ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5" 99.5" 71-3" 6'-9" 4'-4" 4-0" NA NA NA NA 6-4" 5-10" NA NA NA NA NA NA 5-7" 5'-1" NA NA NA NA NA NA  14ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5" 99.5" 9'-3" 9'-3" 6'-9" 6'-5" 4'-1" NA NA NA 7-11" 7-11" 5'-10" 5'-6" NA NA NA NA 6'-11" 6'-11" 5'-1" 4'-10" NA NA NA NA 28ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5" 11'-5" 9'-0" 4'-1" NA 10'-0" 7'-6" NA NA 8'-9" 6'-4" NA NA  16ft Max. Width I-Beam! Spacing 95.5" 99.5" 9'-7" 9-7" 8'-6" 8'-3" 5'-4" 5'-2" 4'-8" 41-6" 8'-3" 8'-3" 7'-4" 7'-2" 4'-9" 41-7" 4'-2" 4-0" 7'-2" 7'-2" 6'-5" 6-3" 4'-3" 4-1" NA NA  18ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 99.5" 9-11" 9'-1" 6-2" 5'-6" 8'-6" 7-10" 5'-6" 4-10" 7'-5" 6'-10" 4'-11" 4'-5"  TABLE 19a. MULTISECTION- WIND: ZONE: 21 NEARI I-BEAMI FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT)- MAX. ROOF PITCH4.36/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 7ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67' 80"  24ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5" 9'-5" 5'-8" NA NA 7'-10" 4'-9" NA NA 6'-9" 4-0" NA NA  32ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5" 9-2" 10'-10" 5'-4" 4'-8" 9'-10" 9-6" 4'-9" 4'-2" 8'-10" 8'-3" 4'-3" NA  99.5" 8-9" 5'-1" NA NA 7'-3" 41-3" NA NA 6"-3" NA NA NA  99.5" 11'-4" 8'-7" NA NA 10'-0" 7-1" NA NA 8'-9" 6-0" NA NA  99.5" 9'-6" 10'-9" 5'-2" 4'-6" 9'-11" 9'-6" 4'-7" 4'-0" 8'-10" 8'-0" 4'-1" NA  PFESSION CHARLES PORTER l/ic/22 32159 OKLAHOM  82  Packet Pg. 166    Install Stabilizing  Systens:  TABLE: 19b. SINGLE SECTION- WINDZ ZONE: 2FARI I-BEAMI FRAME TIEDOWN: SPACING (FT)- MAX. ROOF PITCH4 4.36/12  Max. Max. 10ft Max. Width Wall Floor I-Beam Spacing Height Height 25" 48" 7ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  12ft Max. Width 14ft Max. Width 16ft Max. Width 18ft Max. Width I-Beam! Spacing I-Beam Spacing I-Beam Spacing I-Beam Spacing  95.5"-99.5" 5'-9" 5'-9" 5'-9" 5'-9" 4'-9" 4'-9" 4'-9" 4'-9" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 20ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 8'-5" 10'-5" 7'-10" 7-7" 7'-8" 9'-5" 7'-0" 6'-9" 6'-11" 8'-3" 6'-3" 6'-1"  95.5"-99.5" 5'-11" 5'-11" 5'-11" 5'-11" 5-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 5-0" 4'-2" 4-2" 4'-2" 4'-2"  95.5"-99.5" 6-1" 6'-1" 6-1" 6'-1" 5'-2" 5'-2" 5'-2" 5'-2" 4'-5" 4'-5" 4'-5" 4'-5"  95.5"-99.5" 6'-2" 6'-2" 6'-2" 6-2" 5'-4" 5'-4" 5'-4" 5'-4" 41-7" 4-7" 41-7" 4'-7" 28ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 6'-5" 7'-2" 7'-9" 7-7" 6-0" 6-11" 7'-0" 6-10" 5'-8" 6'-8" 6'-4" 6'-2"  99.5" 6-4" 6'-4" 6-4" 6-4" 5'-5" 5'-5" 5'-5" 5'-5" 4'-9" 4'-9" 4'-9" 4'-9"  TABLE: 19c. MULTI SECTION- WINDZ ZONE: 2FARI I-BEAMI FRAME1 TIEDOWN! SPACING (FT)- MAX. ROOF PITCH4 4.36/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height_ Height 25" 48" 7ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 8ft 67' 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  24ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 71-3" 8'-6" 7'-10" 7-7" 6'-9" 8'-1" 7'-0" 6'-10" 6'-3" 71-7" 6'-4" 6'-2"  32ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 5'-8" 6'-2" 7'-7" 7-6" 5'-5" 6'-0" 6-11" 6'-9" 5'-2" 5'-10" 6'-3" 6'-2"  PFESSION CHARLES PORTER l/ic/22 32159 OKLAHOM  83  Packet Pg. 167    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  TABLE1 19d. MULTIS SECTION -WINDZ ZONE2 21 NEARI-BEAMI FRAME1 TIEDOWN: SPACING (FT)-MAX. ROOFF PITCH5/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  281 fti Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5" 5'-2" NA NA NA 4'-9" NA NA NA 20ft Max. Width I-Beam! Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 4-10" 5'-7" 4'-7" 41-5" 4'-4" 5'-1" 41-3" 41-1" 20f ft Max. Width I-Beam! Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 4'-5" 5'-2" 41-3" 41-2" 4'-0" 4'-9" 4'-0" NA  32ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5" 5'-1" 4'-3" NA NA 4'-9" NA NA NA  99.5" 5'-0" NA NA NA 4'-8" NA NA NA 24ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 4'-4" 5'-4" 4'-4" 4'-3" 4'-0" 4-11" 4'-1" 4-0" 24ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 4-0" 4'-11" 4-1" 4-0" NA 4'-6" NA NA  99.5" 5'-1" 4-1" NA NA 4-9" NA NA NA  TABLE1 19e. MULTI SECTION WINDZ ZONE 2FARI I-BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN: SPACING (FT)- -MAX. ROOF PITCH5/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height_ Height 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  28ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 4-0" 4'-10" 4'-2" 41-1" NA 4-6" NA NA 28f ft Max. Width I-Beam! Spacing 95.5"-99.5" NA 41-6" NA NA NA 4-2" NA NA  32ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" NA 4'-4" 41-0" 4'-0" NA 4'-1" NA NA 32ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" NA 4'-0" NA NA NA NA NA NA  TABLE: 19f. MULTIS SECTION- WIND: ZONE 2FARI I-BEAMI FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT)- MAX. ROOF PITCH6/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height_ Height 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  OFESSIONN CHARLES PORTER l/ic/22 32159 OKLAHOM  84  Packet Pg. 168    Install Stabilizing  Systess  TABLE1 19g. MULTISECTION- -WIND: ZONE2F FARI I-BEAM FRAME1 TIEDOWN SPACING (FT)-MAX. ROOF PITCH7/12  Max. Max. 20ft Max. Width 24ft Max. Width 28ft Max. Width  32ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" NA NA NA NA  Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" Max. Max. Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 7ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 4'-1" 4-10" 4'-0" NA 12ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5" 99.5" 5-10" 5'-4" NA NA NA NA NA NA 5'-1" 4'-8" NA NA NA NA NA NA 41-6" 4'-2" NA NA NA NA NA NA  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" NA 4'-6" NA NA  I-Beam! Spacing 95.5"-99.5" NA 4'-1" NA NA  TABLE 20. SINGLE SECTION- WIND: ZONE: 31 NEARI-BEAMI FRAME TIEDOWN SPACING (FT)- MAX. ROOF PITCH4.36/12  14ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5" 99.5" 7'-3" 7'3" 5'-4" 5'-1" NA NA NA NA 6'-3" 6'-3" 4'-8" 4'-5" NA NA NA NA 5'-6" 5'-6" 4-1" NA NA NA NA NA 28ftMax. Width I-Beam! Spacing 95.5" 8'-3" 6'-8" NA NA 7'-4" 5'-8" NA NA 6'-7" 4'-10" NA NA  16ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5" 99.5" 7'-6" 7-6" 6'-9" 6'-7" 4'-5" 4'-3" NA NA 6'-6" 6'-6" 5-10" 5'-8" NA NA NA NA 5'-8" 5'-9" 5'-2" 5-0" NA NA NA NA  18ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 99.5" 7-9" 7'-1" 5-1" 4-6" 6'-8" 6-2" 4-7" 4-0" 5'-11" 5'-5" 4-1" NA  TABLE 20a. MULTIS SECTION- WIND: ZONE 31 NEARI I-BEAMI FRAME TIEDOWN: SPACING (FT)- MAX. ROOF PITCH 4.36/12  Max. Max. Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 7ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  24ftMax. Width I-Beam! Spacing 95.5" 7'-1" 4'-3" NA NA 6'-0" NA NA NA 5'-3" NA NA NA  32ft Max. Width I-Beam! Spacing 95.5" 6'-5" 7'-9" 4'-5" NA 6'-9" 7'-0" NA NA 6'-6" 6'-3" NA NA  99.5" 6'-7" NA NA NA 5'-7" NA NA NA 4'-10" NA NA NA  99.5" 8-3" 6'-5" NA NA 71-4" 5'-4" NA NA 6-7" 4'-7" NA NA  99.5" 6-7" 7-9" 41-3" NA 7-1" 7-0" NA NA 6'-6" 6'-1" NA NA  ( CHARLES ELIER PORTER I0/22 32159 %  CKLAHOME  85  Packet Pg. 169    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  TABLE20b. SINGLESECTION- -WIND: ZONE3 3FARI-BEAM FRAME TIEDOWN: SPACING (FT)-MAX. ROOF PITCH4.36/12 Max. Max. 10ftN Max. Width 12ftr Max. Width 14ftr Max. Width 16ft Max. Width 18ft Max. Width Wall Floor I-Beam Spacing I-Beam Spacing I-Beam Spacing I-Beam Spacing I-Beam! Spacing  Height Height 95.5"-99.5" 25" 48" 7ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 8ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  95.5"-99.5" 4'-6" 4'-6" 4'-6" 4'-6" NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA  95.5"-99.5" 4'-8" 4'-8" 4'-8" 4'-8" 4'0" 4'-0" 4'0" 4'-0" NA NA NA NA  95.5"-99.5" 4'-9" 4'-9" 4'-9" 4'-9" 4'-1" 4'-1" 4'-1" 4'-1" NA NA NA NA  99.5" 4-10" 4-10" 4-10" 4'-10" 4'-3" 4'-3" 4'-3" 4'-3" NA NA NA NA  4'-5" 4'-5" 4'-5" 4'-5" NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA  TABLE20c. MULTISECTON-WIND: ZONE3F FARI-BEAMI FRAME1 TIEDOWN SPACING (FT)-MAX. ROOF PITCH4.36/12  Max. Max. 20ft Max. Width Wall Floor Height Height 25" 48" 7ft 67" 80" 25" 48" 8ft 67' 80" 25" 48" 9ft 67" 80"  24ft Max. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 5'-1" 5'-10" 6'-2" 6'-0" 4'-9" 5'-7" 5'-7" 5'-5" 4'-5" 5'-3" 5'-0" 4'-11"  28ftN Max. Width I-Beams Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 4'-6" 5'-0" 6'-1" 6'-0" 4'-3" 4-10" 5'-6" 5'-5" 4'-1" 41-8" 5'-0" 4'-11"  32ftMax. Width I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 4'-0" 4'-5" 5'-9" 5'-10" NA 4'-3" 5'-5" 5'-4" NA 4'-2" 5'-0" 4-11"  I-Beam Spacing 95.5"-99.5" 5'-9" 6-11" 6'-3" 6'-0" 5'-3" 6'-6" 5'-7" 5'-5" 4-10" 6'-0" 5'-0" 4'-10"  0 FES SSION CHARLES PORTER, I2/2A2 3215% OKLAHOME  86  Packet Pg. 170    Install Stabilizing  Systens:  SIDEWALL VERTICAL ANCHORS  Homes designed for Wind Zones Ila and Ill also require vertical tie downs along the sidewalls (Figure 63). The vertical tie down brackets will bet factory installed. Vertical and frame sidewall tie downs may connect to one double-headed: anchor or eacht toi its own dedicated anchor per the spacing requirements listedi in Tables 19 and 20. Ifa addi- tional brackets are required to be added ore existing brackets are required to be relocat- ed due toi interferences or site conditions, install Mastercraft #5705 or steel angle Use Table 21 to determine the number of longitudinal frame anchors required ate each end of thel home. Thel longitudinal frame anchors may! bet factory installed, site installed Friction is assumed to contribute tot the resistance int thel longitudinal direction when piers are no more than 64" high. Friction from as single block pieri is assumed for piers less than 44" high. Friction from a double block pieri is assumed for piers between 44"  o AGRICUTURE  brackets and straps as shown inl Figure 63. LONGITUDINAL FRAME ANCHORS  or connected to a crossmember within 3" oft the main I-beam.  NOTE: and 64" high.  TABLE21. WIND: ZONE 11 LONGITUDINAL FRAME TIEDOWN QUANTITIES( QUANTITYEACHI END OFH HOME)  Singles Section (18ft Max. Floor Width) Minimum Unitl Lengths  Multis Section (32f ft Max. Floor Width) Minimum Unitl Lengths  Triples Section (48ft Max. Floor Width) Minimum Unit Lengths  Max. Max. Roof Pier  Pitch Height 36' 42' 48' 54' 60' 66' 72' 80' 36' 42' 48' 54' 60' 66' 72' 80' 36' 42' 48' 54' 60' 66' 72' 80' 24" 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 36" 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 3 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 4 4 3 3 2 2 4.36 44" 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 52" 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 64" 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 4 3 3 2 1 1 0 0  1  24" 36" 44" 52" 64" Max. Max. Max. Home Width Wall Roof Single Section Multi Section Triple 7ft 4.36 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 7.5ft 4.36 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 7 4.36 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 7 5 NA NA NA NA NA 3 3 4 4 5 7 8ft 6 NA NA NA NA NA 3 3 4 5 5 8 7 NA NA NA NA NA 3 4 4 5 6 8 4.36 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 7 5 NA NA NA NA NA 3 4 4 5 6 8 9ft 6 NA NA NA NA NA 3 4 4 5 6 8 7 NA NA NA NA NA 3 4 5 5 6 9 4.36 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 8 5 NA NA NA NA NA 3 4 4 5 6 8 10ft 6 NA NA NA NA NA 3 4 5 5 6 9 7 NA NA NA NA NA 3 4 5 6 6 9 87  3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 4 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 6 5 4 4 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 0 0  2 0 0  3 2 2 2 1  0 0 5 4 4 3 3 2  PIERI HEIGHT GREATER THAN 64"- WIND: ZONEILONGTUDINAL FRAME TIEDOWN QUANTITIES( QUANTITY! EACH END OF HOME) Height Pitch 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 20ft 24ft 28ft 32ft 36ft 48ft  Packet Pg. 171    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  TABLE: 22. WIND: ZONE: 2L LONGITUDINAL FRAME TIEDOWN QUANTITIES (EACHE END OFI HOME) 10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 20ft 24ft 28ft 32ft  Max. Max. Wall Roof Height Pitch 3 7ft 4.36 3 7.5ft 4.36 3 4.36 8ft 5 6 7 3 4.36 5 6 7 3 4.36 5 6 7 Max. Max. Wall Roof Height Pitch 3 7ft 4.36 3 7.5ft 4.36 3 4.36 8ft 5 6 7 3 4.36 5 6 7 3 4.36 5 6 7  Max. Home Width Single Section Multi Section Triple 36ft 48ft 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 5 6 8 9 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 6 6 9 10 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 9 11 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 9 10 2 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 10 11 NA NA NA NA NA 4 5 6 7 10 12 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 7 8 11 12 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 7 8 12 13 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 7 10 11 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 7 8 11 13 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 7 8 12 13 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 7 9 12 14 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 7 8 11 13 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 7 9 12 13 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 8 9 12 14 NA NA NA NA NA 5 7 8 9 13 15  9ft  10ft  TABLE: 23. WIND: ZONE: 3L LONGITUDINAL FRAME TIEDOWN QUANTITIES (EACH END OFI HOME)  Max. Home Width Single Section Multi Section Triple 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 7 10 11 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 11 13 3 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 7 9 12 13 NA NA NA NA NA 5 6 8 9 12 14 NA NA NA NA NA 5 7 8 9 13 15 NA NA NA NA NA 6 7 8 10 14 16 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 8 9 12 13 3 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 NA NA NA NA NA 6 7 8 9 13 15 NA NA NA NA NA 6 7 9 10 14 16 NA NA NA NA NA 6 7 9 10 15 17 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 13 14 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 9 10 14 15 NA NA NA NA NA 6 7 9 10 14 16 NA NA NA NA NA 6 8 9 11 15 17 NA NA NA NA NA 6 8 10 11 16 18 REL AGRICUATUR.  10ft 12ft 14ft 16ft 18ft 20ft 24ft 28ft 32ft 36ft 48ft  9ft  10ft  88  Packet Pg. 172    Install Stabilizing  Systens:  MARRIAGE LINE VERTICAL ANCHORS (WIND ZONES IIA AND III ONLY) In Wind Zones Il and III, marriage line anchors are required at each column along the There may be manufacturerinstalled brackets indicating required tie down locations (may be identified by tags or paint). If brackets are not present, then an alternative ac- ceptable connection method, such as steel angles (provided by the manufacturer) must be used (Figure 63). Ifr necessary to avoid interference with piers, thet tie down location may be offset horizontally from the column by a maximum of 12i inches. Tag unit anchoring is not covered ini this manual. The required anchoring details will Each post that requires an anchor willl have at tiedown bracket attached from thet factory and be designated by a pier label. Homes with roof pitches of 4.36/12 or less do not require frame tiedowns below af full width endwall porch. Required frame and vertical tiedowns in Wind Zone 2 and 31 may begin on-center spacing at the corner porch post/endwall location. This will also satisfy the Sidewall Frame Anchor requirement of locating one "no more than twoi feet from each end of home" stated on page 75. Homes with roof pitches above 4.36/12 must also contain frame tiedowns below endwall porches and can be combined with vertical tiedown brackets at porch posts. Anchors installed on offset units will bei installed pert thes standard tiedown charts unless otherwise instructed by details thata accompany thel home. STEP 2. DETERMINE TIEDOWN CONFIGURATION Tiedown spacings have been provided when the tie down strap is connected tot the near I-beam and/or when the strap is connected to thet far I-beam.  marriage wall.  y When toi install marriage line anchors.. Anchors along the marriage line must be installed prior to thes sec- ond half ofa a multi-section home being set.  TAG UNIT FRAME AND VERTICAL ANCHORS accompany homes with tag units. PORCH POST ANCHORS  OFFSET UNIT ANCHORS  STEP 3. SELECT ANCHORS  Use the torque probe results from Prepare the Site, STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY (p. 19) and the anchor manufacturer instructions se- lectt thet type and length of anchor to use. The installed ground anchor size (length) Make sure the anchori is of sufficient length such that thet top of thel helixi is belowt the frost line. Select a shaft diameter sufficient to resist excessive torsion, "ring-off" (when the! helix or anchor head separates from shaft) or shaft splitting. Consult the anchor Review all of STEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS (p. 90) and STEP 5. INSTALL STRAPS (p.91) before making final anchor selections to determine when single headed VS. double headed anchors should be used. Follow the specifications in Table 24 when se-  must be listed (i.e. approved) fort the soil class.  supplier for guidance.  lecting stabilizing system components. TABLE 24. ANCHOR TYPES  Anchor type Helix soil anchor Rock anchor Concrete anchor  Anchor (soil) class 2,3,4A 1(for usei in solid rock only) Concrete ONLY  AGRICUTURE 00 OF  89  Packet Pg. 173    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  TABLE 25. ANCHOR SYSTEM MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS  Component Anchors Straps Stabilizer plates  Specification  Anchors must bet testeda andl listedt tor resista a minimum ultimate load of4 4,7251 Ibs and a minimum allowable working! load of3,1501 Ibs or ultimate and corresponding working load limited by soil conditions and anchor length. The working! load ist the maximum load the designer can use. Ground anchors must be provided with protection against weather deterioration and corrosion: atl leaste equivalent tot that provided by a coating Straps must be minimum 1-1/4"x 0.035" zinc-coated (0.030 oZ per sq ft)s steel strapping conforming to ASTMD D3953-97, Type 1, Grade 1, Finish Bv with a minimum allowable working load capacity of 3,1501 Ibs and a minimum ultimate load of4,7251 Ibs. Slit or cut edges ofz zinc-coated strapping dor not need tot be: zinc The size and type ofs stabilizer plate, ifrequired byt the ground anchor manufacturer, will be specified int the anchor manufacturer's instructions. Stabilizer plates must be provided with protection against weather deterioration and corrosion atl least equivalent tot that provided by a coating ofz zinc on steel of not less than 0.30 oZ pers sq ftofs surface coated. Alternatively, ABS stabilizer plates may be used when listeda and certi-  ofz zinc ons steel ofr notl less than 0.030 oZ pers sq fto of surface coated.  coated.  fied for such use.  STEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS  Before beginning anchori installation, check for obstructions under the home such as piers and frame members that mayi interfere with the tie down strapping. Check with utility companies to determine thel location of underground utilities, such as electrical and phone lines, and water, sewer and gas pipes, that may! bel buried in potential an- chor locations. Also check for homeowner-instaled wires andp pipes, such as those connecting exterior lighting or sheds to the home. These must also be avoided. Frame anchors can be installedi int two ways, in-line and against a stabilizer plate. The Thei in-line configuration (Figure 55) for homes can be used in Wind Zone only. Typi- cally, in-line anchors are used under high homes where the anchors can be installed from under the home after the home is set. Inline anchors can also be installed before the home is set, however precisely aligning the anchor with the home both vertically and horizontally is difficult. Using swivel connectors for thes strap to beam connection Toi install in-line frame anchors, drive the anchor into the ground at an angle and loca- tions such that as straight line can be drawn from the tip oft the anchor through the anchor  Grading area around anchors. Anchor heads should not resti in sunken spots. Grade the ground sot that water does not collect around anchor heads, but runs away from the anchor and outf from un- dert the home. Do not bury anchor heads.  FRAME ANCHORS twor methods are discussed below: In-Line Configuration  can provide some horizontal flexibility.  head and tot the connection point on the I-beam (Figure 55).  Figure 55. In-line anchor con- figuration Figure 56. Stabilizer, plate v Anchor alignment. Properly aligning the anchor is critical top performance.  FRAME TIEDOWN STRAP GROUND ANCHOR  FRAME TIEDOWN GROUND, ANCHOR WISTABILIZER PLATE  h MAINE BEAM STRAP PIER  E MAINE BEAM configuration  PIER  Stabilizer Plate Configuration  Stabilizer plate configurations (Figure 57) are suitable for homes in all wind zones. An- chors may be installed after the home is set. As stabilizer device, typically an ABS or metal plate, is used to prevent thet top oft the anchor from slicing through the soil when the load is applied. Stabilizer plates are available ina a variety of widths. Choose the widest plate that can be driven intot the soilt tor maximize resistance to movement. The  LAHJ may have stabilizer plate requirements.  90  Packet Pg. 174    Install Stabilizing  Systens:  Install anchors with stabilizer plates as follows:  1. Measure. To determine thes stabilizer plate location, measure from thet top of thel I-beam to the ground directly under ita and then use the same measure- ment directly away from that point under the beam (Figure 57). The anchor and plate must be under the! home, but within six inches oft the exterior wall for ar near beam set andt teni inches minimum from the exterior walli for ai far beam set. Be careful not to place in al location that willi interfere withs skirting.  Figure 57. Determining anc- hor and: stabilizer plate loca-  tion  STRAP (LOOSE)  STRAP (PROPERLY TENSIONED) STABILIZER PLATE GROUND ANCHOR  STABILIZER PLATE GROUND ANCHOR  10°  2. Install anchor. To assure that the anchor attachment point wille end up at the stabilizer plate, start the anchor insertion approximately 12i inches back from from the desired location if using a 48 inch long anchor, or approximately 16 inches if using a 60i inchl long anchor. Install the anchor at about 10 degrees off vertical, with the head tilted away from thel home. Install the anchor toa 3. Drive stabilizer plate. Drive the stabilizer plate into the ground toi its full depth 4. Complete anchor installation. Screw the anchor the rest oft the way into the ground. The finished anchor must be installed toi its full depth. When the anc- hor strap is properly tensioned it will pull the anchor head and shafti into the Toi install vertical anchors, screw the anchor into the ground directly under the strap at- tachment point on the home until thel bottom of the anchor headi is flush witht the ground Follow the instructions below to connect straps from the home to sidewall frame, end Always protect straps ats sharp corners including around I-beams with radius clips or other methods (Figure 58). Radius clips may bet fabricated from galvanized steel strap  depth of approximately one halfi its length. at the point determined in Step 1.  stabilizer plate. VERTICAL ANCHORS  or no more than onei inch above grade. STEP 5. INSTALL STRAPS wall frame and vertical anchors. formed to fit around corners.  91  Packet Pg. 175    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  Figure 58. Radius clips  LONGITUDINAL BRACKET -  PROTECTTOP ANDBOTTOM OFE BEAMIF_ STRAPIS WRAPPED AROUND BEAM  I-BEAM  SPLICING STRAPS  Splicing may be required when a pre-cut strap is ofi insufficient length. Splices must be made by overlapping the straps by 12 inches, applying one splice clipt from above and the other from below; use a crimping tool tot tightly seal the splice clips (Figure 59). Do  not run any portion of the splice through an anchor head bolt.  APPLY SPLICE CLIPS IND DIRECTIONOF ARROWS STRAP-  59. Tie down Figure splice  strap  APPROX. 12"  FRAME ANCHORS  Install straps tot frame anchors as follows:  1. Connect strap to home. Connect one end of the strap to thet top of thel I- beam using approved buckles or clips (swivel or hook clip preferred). When frame ties are connected tot the bottom of the beam itr must be within 3" ofa  crossmember.  Figure 60. Strap to beam connection  WRAP STRAP/ AROUND MAIN BEAM  CONNECT HOOKT TOTOPC OFI MAIN BEAM/ AND CONNECT OTHERE ENDO OF STRAP1 TO ANCHORI HEAD.  2. Connect strap to anchor. Connect the other end oft the strap to thes split bolt int the anchor. Leave enough strapl length to be able tor make three complete turns,or minimum required per manufacturer's installation instructions, around the! bolt! before it becomes tight (approximately 2-1/2 inches per turn or 13 inches total). Fewer than threet turns, or required per manufacturer's installa- tion instructions, and thes strapr may not hold ontot the bolt wheni forcei is ap- plied. Conversely, too many turns may noti fit within the U-channel of the anc- hor head. Follow thep procedure outlined in Figure 61.  92  Packet Pg. 176    Install Stabilizing  Systess  WRAPSTRAP AROUND MAINBEAM  CONNECTI HOOKTOTOP OFMAIN BEAM AND CONNECT OTHERE ENDOF STRAPT TOA ANCHORHEAD.  INSERT THE1 TENSIONE BOLTINTO PLACE THE STRAP1 THROUGHTHE LOOSELY ATTACH1 THEH HEXNUT. BOLTA ANDE BENDI UP1 TO90".  THE ANCHORH HEADA AND  SLOTTED SHANK OF THE TENSION  USINGA A 15/16" SOCKET ONCE TENSIONED1 TOT THE POINT OR OPENE ENDV WRENCH, THAT COUNTERCLOCKWISE WRAPPING THE STRAP OPENI ENDI WRENCH1 TOHOLD1 THE AROUND1 THE TENSION SQUAREI NECKI WHILE  ONCE FULLY1 TENSIONED, ALIGN IF APPROVEDI BY1 THE MANUFACTURER, THE SQUAREI NECK OF1 THE BOLT DOUBLEI HEAD ANCHORSI MAYE BE WITH1 THE SQUARE RECESS INTHE USEDI FORI BOTHI DIAGONALAND ANCHORH HEAD AND1 TIGHTENT THE VERTICAL TIE-DOWNS STRAP HEXNUT. THIS WILLI DRAW1 THE TENSIONING." TENSION1 THED DIAGONAL TWO1 TOGETHER ANDI LOCK1 THE TIE-DOWN STRAPI FIRST. FOLLOW  ROTATE CLOCKWISE, BOLT.  RESISTANCE APPEARS, USEA A5/8" REPOSITIONING THE1 15/16" TENSIONINGI WRENCH1 TOC CONTINUE TENSIONING. REPEAT AS REQUIRED.  SYSTEMI INTO FINALI POSITION.  STEPS31 THROUGH71 TOI INSTALL STRAPS TOA ANCHORI HEAD. Figure 61. Procedure for connecting the strap to frame and anchor v Anchor head location. As the anchor is pulled up to meet the stabilizer plate, the head oft the anchor will rise. Ini its final position, the bot- tom oft the anchor head should be no more than 1/4 inch above the top oft the stabilizer plate. Figure 62. Longitudinal frame anchor attachment. method  3. Pretension anchor. For anchors with stabilizer plates, pretension the anchor by pullingi it upt to the stabilizer plate using the strap and take-up boltt to move the anchor head. Continue pulling the strap until the plate moves a small amount (about 1/2i inch). Thisi is called packing the plate andi it willy yield the  resistance bottom (the one inch above the top oft the stabilizer plate).  strongest  oft the anchor head should be a maximum  LONGITUDINAL FRAME ANCHORS  Attach straps toi the bracket welded by the manufacturer to the frame (Figure 62). Ifr no brackets have been installed, use approved beam clamps designed specifically for this purpose, available from anchor suppliers or connect thes strap to as spring hanger ora crossmember (within 3" oft the main I-beam). Connect straps to anchors following same procedure as for sidewall frame anchors. Protection oft the strap at sharp corners must  be provided (p.91).  MAINI BEAM  PIER  LONGITUDINAL  BRACKET TIEDOWN: STRAP 450/  ANCHORI WITH STABILIZERI PLATE!  93  Packet Pg. 177    Install Stabilizing Systems  2.g  MARRIAGE WALL COLUMN 1/8" THICKX1'DIAMETER: WASHERS FORS SPACER BETWEEN BRACKET &F PERIMETER RIM. JOIST ATI MATING LINE MARRIAGE WALL COLUMN TIEDOWNS ANGLEE BRACKET INSTALLED WITH L'FACING TOWARDS OUTSIDE EDGE OF FLOOR SYSTEM MARRIAGE WALLI LOCATION  Figure 63. Sidewall and mar- riage line vertical tie down connections.  9MMx3"- OR5/16"x 3"FULL THREAD LAGS.  ANGLE BRACKET INSTALLED WITH'L' FACING AWAYI FROM OUTSIDE EDGE OF FLOOR SYSTEM SIDEWALL 2" SIDEWALL TIEDOWN STRAPS  4"MIN. 07/16" - HOLE  3/8"  3/8" 5i8"  1-1/2",  1-1/2"  A  1-14,3-121-14 ATMARRIAGE LINE:  ANGLE BRACKET TOE BEOF 9MM> x 3" OR 5/16'x3'FULL 11 GA. MIN)STEELXI-12 THREADI LAGS THRUI BRACKET  x1-1/2" ANGLE MEMBER. ATS SIDEWALL: 3/8" ANGLE BRACKET TO BEOF 12GA. (MIN)STEELX1-12 x1-1/2" ANGLE MEMBER.  INTO OUTERI MOST RIM. JOIST ATE EXTERIOR WALLS. SIDEWALL LOCATION  3/8"  SLOT NOTI REQUIRED. TIEDOWN: STRAPI MAY BE INSTALLED BETWEEN HORIZONTAL FLANGE OF  ANGLE BRACKET. ANDF FLOOR. JOIST PERIMETER RAIL. BRACKETWILL BE  INSTALLED INTHE FACTORY.  ANGLE BRACKETTIEDOWN RADIUS CLIP  VERTICALT TIEDOWN ANCHOR  BP-10VERTICAL TIEDOWN BRACKET BRACKET INSTALLEDWITH (8).131x1-1/2" NAILS. MASTERCRAFT #5705 TIEDOWN BRACKET ONLY)  INSTALLER TO FABRICATE RADIUS CLIPE BYI PLACING STRAIGHT 3" LENGTH OF 1-1/4", x. .035" TIE-DOWN STRAP IN ANCHOR SLOT ANDI PHYSICALLY BEND THE STRAP TO CONFIGURATION: SHOWN. ABOVE. RADIUS CLIPI MUST BE INSTALLED ON ALL LONGITUDAL FRAME TIE-DOWN, ANCHORS, SIDEWALL VERTICAL TIE-DOWN. ANCHORS  MARRIAGEWALL VERTICAL TIE-DOWN, ANCHORS AND BRACKET (SIDEWALL TIEDOWN  STEP 6. TIGHTEN AND ADJUST STRAPS stabilizer plates. Dor not over tension straps. go to Connect Utilities (p. 95)  After all anchors have beeni installed and pre-tensioned, recheck all anchor straps to assure that they are tight and that the anchor shafts have remained in contact with the  94  Packet Pg. 178    Connect Utili 2.g  Connect Utilities  This chapter contains procedures and requirements for the connection and testing of utility hook-ups. Responsibility for making utility connections varies by location. Consult thel LAHJ andt the utility before connecting the home to any utilities.  Follow the Steps below:  STEP 1. CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE (p. 95) STEP 2. CONNECT WATER SERVICE (p. 98) STEP 3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE (p. 100) STEP 4. CONNECT OIL SERVICE (p. 102) STEP 1. CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE  Thel homei is designed for connection to ane electrical wiring system rated at 120/240 volt AC. Service connection requirements depend on whether the meter willl be in- stalled on a post or pole or mounted on thel home more than 61 feeti from the circuit breaker panel. Iti is recommended that this connection be performed by al licensed elec- METER MOUNTED ON POST OR POLE (OR MOUNTED ON THE HOME MORE Thet feeder must contain four continuous insulated, color-coded, feeder conductors, with one used as the equipment grounding conductor (Figure 64). The current rating (in amperes) of the home can be found on the tag located on the outside next to the feeder or service entrance, and on the electrical distribution panel. Using thisi infor- mation, determine the required feeder wire size from Table 26. These sizes are based on an ambient temperature of 86 degrees Fahrenheit and do not take voltage drop into Acceptable conductor types are: RHH, RHW, RHW-2, THHN, THHW, THW, THW2,  vy Special precautions when installing electrical ser- vice. Installation of the electric power tot the home can cause exposure to live electrical circuits. Ther neu- tral conductor must not be grounded int the distribution panel board. Exposure to live electrical circuits ori im- proper grounding of the conductor int the panel board may resulti ins severe shock or possible electro- cution. A qualified installer must make the connections for the electric power. Figure 64. Electrical feeder connection when meter is on ap post or pole or mounted on the home more than 61 feet from the circuit breaker pan- iv Power supply. Al large enough power supply must be available at the site. An inadequate power supply may result ini improper op- eration of and possible damage to motors and ap- pliances. Itr may also in- crease electricity costs.  trician.  THAN 6F FEET FROM THE CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL) Feeder Wire and Equipment Sizes  consideration.  THWN, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, SE, USE, and USE-2.  EQUIPMENT GROUND BUSBAR-  MAINF PANEL ENCLOSURE NEUTRAL BUS BAR BONDING STRAP NOT INSTALLED CONDUIT INSTALLED (FUSED)- ATFACTORY BLACK-"HOT" RED -"HOT" TOAORB TOAORB WHITE TOI NEUTRALI BUS BAR GRND TOE EQUIPMENT GRND  OVERHEAD: SERVICE ENTRY  CONDUIT TO SERVICE! HEAD CONDUIT TO GROUNDING ROD TON MAIN GROUNDING SCREW TO CONNECT NEUTRAL TO GROUND METERE BY UTILITY COMPANY CONDUIT N.M. CONDUIT UNDERGROUND TON MAIN SERVICE ENTRY PANEL TOGROUNDINGI ROD  METER BY UTILITY COMPANY DISCONNECT  el.  GROUNDING LUGTO CHASSIS EXTERIOR WALL METER-  PANEL  METER ENCLOSURE 1/4" AIR: SPACE BETWEEN METER ENCLOSURE, AND EXTERIOR WALL SIDEVIEW (TYP.ALLA APPLICATIONS)  DISCONNECT (FUSED)  95  Packet Pg. 179    Connect Utilities  2.g  TABLE 26. ELECTRICAL FEEDER WIRE ANDI EQUIPMENT SIZES FOR COPPER AND ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS Breaker Size in Neutral Feeder Size Minimum Race- Red &E Black White  y Grounding the electrical system. Do not provide electrical power until the grounding electrode isi in- stalled and connected. When the meter basei is not on the house never use the neutral conductor oft the feeder cable as a ground wire. Do notg ground the neutral bar ini the electrical distribution panel.  Main  Max.  Copper Conductors (Cu)  Green (Cu)  Bare (Cu) #8 #8 #8 #6 #4 #4 1/0 Bare (AI) #6 #6 #6 #4 #2 1/0 3/0  Panel Box Load way Conduit (Power) (Neutral) (Grounding) Ground  (AMPS) (AMPS) Diameter (in)  (Cu)  50 100 125 150 200 225 400 Main 50 100 125 150 200 225 400 Grounding  40 70 100 120 175 180 320 Max.  1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2 3  #4AWG #8AWG #10AWG #4AWG #4AWG #8 AWG #2AWG #3AWG #6AWG #1AWG #2AWG #6AWG 2/0AWG 1/0/ AWG #6A AWG 3/0AWG 3/0AWG #4 AWG 400 kcmil 400 kcmil #3A AWG Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors  Breaker Neutral Minimum (AMPS) (AMPS) Diameter (in)  Size in Feeder Size Race- Red & Black White  Green (AI)  Panel Box Load way Conduit (Power) (Neutral) (Grounding) Ground  (AI)  (AI)  40 70 100 120 175 180 320  1-1/4 1-1/4 2 2 2-1/2 2-1/2 3-1/2  #2AWG #8 AWG #8A AWG #2/ AWG #2 AWG #6 AWG 1/0AWG #1 AWG #4 AWG 2/0AWG 1/0 AWG #4 AWG 4/0 AWG 3/0 AWG #4 AWG 250 kcmil 4/0AWG #2 AWG 6001 kcmil 6001 kcmil #1 AWG  v Priort to energizing the home, turn off the water heater un- tiliti is completely filled with water.  The home must be properly grounded to protect the occupants. The only safe and ap- proved method of grounding the! homei is through an electricaly-isolated grounding bar int thel home's distribution panel board. This grounds all non-curent-carying: metal parts tot the electrical system int thel home at a single point. The ground conductor of the power supply feeder cable int turn connects the grounding bar to a good electrical ground back through they power supply system. Therefore, for 120/240 volts service at four wire power Isolate (insulate) grounded circuit conductor (neutral or white wire) from the grounding conductors (green wires) andi from equipment enclosures and other grounded Isolate (insulate) the neutral circuit terminals in the distribution panel board and in ranges, clothes dryers, and counter-mounted cooking units from the equipment enclo- Feeder connections are madei from above or from below the home as follows: From above-mast weatherhead feeder. The routing, connection, and support of the service drop must meet local codes. Homes equipped this way contain all necessary con- duits tot the electrical distribution panel. However, the fourt feeder conductors (not provided with the home) are installed on site. Ift the masthead is located above the roof overhang, al- low a minimum clearance of eight feet above all roof points that the conductors pass over. There are two exceptions to this rule: (1)The vertical clearance may be reduced tot three feeti ift ther roof has a minimum: slope of 4i in 12; and (2) The vertical clearance may! be re- duced to 18 inches ifr no more thani four feet ofs service-drop conductors pass above the roof overhang, and ift they terminate ata a through-the-roof raceway or approved support.. AI min- imum clearance must also be provided from thei final grade tot thes service-drop conductors. This measurement may vary from 101 feet to 181 feet, depending on thet types of traffic antic- ipated below the service drop (refer toi the NEC). Unless impractical, locate service heads above the point of attachment of thes service-drop conductors and make them rain-tight. If  supply feeder cable is required. Itisi important to:  parts. sure. Feeder Connections  96  Packet Pg. 180    Connect Utili 2.g  individual conductors do not extend downward, form dripl loops.  From below. As section of conduit is factory installed through the floor cavity. Install properly-sized service entrance conductors from the main power supply tot the panel board. Depending on thel location of ther main panelboard inside the home. Refer to Table: 261 for the conductor requirements. Thei installer must provide the supply connection including the four feeder conductors, junction box and conduit connectors. Protect conductors emerging from the ground from a minimum of 18 inches below grade to eight feet above grade, or to the point ofe entrance to the home. The distance measured from the top surface ofal buried cable, conduit, or raceway to thet finished grade must meet the minimum burial requirements outlined int the NEC. Use ar moisture-proof bushing at the end oft the conduit from which the METER MOUNTED ONI HOME WITHIN 61 FEET OF CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL Ift the meter is mounted on the home, the following requirements apply (refer to Figure 65): Uses straps to support any conduit. Do not use the meter base equipment for support. Use exterior equipment ande enclosures listed as weatherproof and entrance conduc- The grounding bar may be installed separate from the neutral bari for purposes of The grounding bar may bei isolated during the electrical check and re-attached, after Check with the local electrical utility to verify meter base requirements and locations Thei fieldi installed meter base enclosure must be installed in accordance withi its list- ing. Fasten securely to exterior wall studs and provide for a weather tight seal. Alli field work must be done by al licensed electrician or other person approved byt the Check the local code for any requirements regarding the location oft the meter base. Note that bonding, screws, straps, or buses int the distribution panel board or in appliances  buried cable emerges.  tors listedf for wet locations. testing the electrical system. the tests are completed.  and distances for the main panel andi meter box.  LAHJ.  have been removed and discarded at the manutacturing: facility.  Figure 65. Meter base wiring when the meter is ont the home within 61 feet of Circuit Breaker Panel.  EQUIPMENT GROUND BUS BAR-  MAINF PANEL OVERHEAD: SERVICE ENTRY ENCLOSURE NEUTRAL METERE BY BUSE BAR UTILITY BONDING STRAP NOT INSTALLED CONDUITI INSTALLED ATFACTORY RED HOT'TOAORB WHITETONEUTRAL BUSBAR EXTERIOR WALL METER-  CONDUIT TO SERVICE HEAD CONDUIT  COMPANY  GROUNDING LUG TO CHASSIS  N.M. CONDUIT UNDERGROUND SERVICE ENTRY  --TOMAIN  TOMAIN PANEL  TOGROUNDING BLACKOTTOAORE PANEL  ROD  METER ENCLOSURE 1/4" AIR SPACE BETWEEN METERI ENCLOSURE, AND EXTERIOR WALL SIDEVIEW ("MPALLAPPUCATONS)  97  Packet Pg. 181    Connect Utilities  2.g  When af factory installed service meter base is provided on al home, a grounding elec- trode conductor anda a ground wire must bei installed according to the following specifi- 1. Grounding wire material and size per Table 26 provided byt the manufacturer. Ifmanufacturer provides a minimum 1/2i inch EMT or conduit raceway, the 2. The clamp connecting the grounding wire to the electrode shall be suitable for 3. Use a 5/81 inch diameter by eight footl long iron electrode for grounding. Larger 4. Drive the electrode to a depth of not less than eight feet so that at least eight 5. When rock is encountered, the electrode may! be driven at an angle not to ex- ceed 45 degrees from vertical or buried in at trench thati is at least 2-1/21 feet  cations:  wire is provided by the retailer for installation. direct burial and locatedi flush or below ground level. sizes may be required by LAHJ. feet oft the electrode isi in contact with thes soil.  deep. TESTING  After your home has been completely assembled and all accessories installed, its should be tested to ensure that no damage occurred during transit andt that all electrical con- nections were properly performed (TESTI ELECTRICAL SYSTEM pg. 111). These tests should be performed by qualified personnel familiar with the local codes  and required test procedures.  STEP 2. CONNECT WATER SERVICE  CONNECTION  To connect the home's water system to the water source, identify the water inlet locat- ed under the home (usually below the water heater compartment or utility room) and 1. Flush pipe. Flushi fieldi installed water piping free of all debris prior to connec- 3. Install pressure-reducing valve. Ift the local water supply exceeds 80 psii in- 4. Connect valve. Install a main shut-off valve between the waters supply source and the home in an accessible location underneath or adjacent to the home. Select af full flow gate or ball shutoff valve, or equivalent valve. To prevent the possibility off fresh water contamination, install an anti-siphon valve on alli field  follow thep procedure described below (refer to Figure 66): tion tot the home's water inlet. 2. Clean threads. Ensure that pipe threads are clean. stall ap pressure-reducing: valve.  Maximum water pressure. The water system for the home was designed fora maximum inlet pressure of 80 psi.  installed exterior faucets.  Figure 66. Water system connection  FACTORY INSTALLED WATERI PIPE OPTIONAL HOSE BIB (NOT SUPPLIED): LOCATE WATER RISER UNDERNEATHOR ADJACENT TOHOME  SERVICE CONNECTION (NOT SUPPLIED) MANDATORY SHUT-OFF VALVE (NOT SUPPLIED)  98  Packet Pg. 182    Connect Utili 2.g  5. Inspect water heater drip pan drain pipe. Inspect the drain opening on the water heater to ensure that iti is clear of any obstruction. Drain pipe cannot con- 6. Inspect water heat T/P relief line. Verify that the T/P relief line terminates 6" min and 24" max from thet finish grade. Relief line must be directed down at the  nect with the DWVI line. exit.  Using check valves. Verify that a check valve has beeni installed on the wateri inlet to prevent water system drainage in the event of al loss of water pressure from the source. Such pressure loss could cause the water heater to drain, exposing the heating elements ofe electric water heaters causing them to fail. Figure 67. Water heater drip pan and drain  T/PRELIEFLINE  DRIPPAN  WATER HEATER  WATER HEATERI DRIP PAN DRAIN PIPE  6"N MIN- -24" MAXF FROM FINISH GRADE  7. Insulate. In areas subject toi freezing temperatures, protect with insulation or heat tape pipes, valves andp pressure reducers that are exposed to the outdoors; and pipes in water heater compartments with non-insulated doors. Connect heat must not bei installed ont the! DWV pipe. Electrical outlet provided under thel home must only be used for the heat tape connection because itis GFCI protected. After connecting the water lines check the water system for leaks using one oft the pro- cedures described below. Before testing, close all water faucets, spigots, and toilet- 1. Bypass water heater. Bypass the water heater by disconnecting thel hot outlet and cold inlet water lines from the water heater andj joining them together. This will protect the hot water tank from damage and protect thosei involvedi in the 2. Pressurize system. Connect al hydrostatic pump, valve and gauge. Pressurize the system with water at 80 psi: +5 psi, and then isolatei itf from the pressure source. Bleed all air from the highest andi farthest points in the system.  v only pipe heating cable (tape) listedi for manufac- tured! homes andi install itin accordance with the cable (tape) manufacturer instal- lationi instructions. Testing water lines. Only use pneumatic (air) testing when hydrostatic testing is not practical. Air under pressure is explosive. Ex- ercise extreme caution and notify all site personnel of thet test. Wear protective eyewear and take precau- tions to prevent impact damage toi the: system  tape to the electrical outlet under the home near the water supply inlet. Heat tape Selecting heat tape. Use  TESTING tank float valves. Hydrostatic (preferred):  test from possible injury.  99  Packet Pg. 183    Connect Utilities  2.g  3. Hold pressure. Monitor the pressure for atl least 15 minutes. 4. Fix leaks. Ift the pressure drops below 80 psi +5 psi, locate and correct any leaks by cutting outa and discarding bad pipe sections orj joints andi installing new 5. Repeat. Repeat the test until all leaks have been eliminated. 6. Restore connections. Reconnect the water heater and the water supply.  while thet testi is inp progress. Do not pneumatically test CPVC: systems. Pneumati- cally test Flow Guard Gold systems levels only at low or pres- surel (20 psi less). Pressurizing water lines. When pressurizing the wa- ter system, connect the pump to al location above a closed shut-off valve so as not toi introduce pressure intot the municipal water supply. y Anti-Scald Valves. Anti- Scald valves have beeni in- tub/showers stalled on all and tubs, showers in the home. The valves are preset byt the valve manufac- turer to about 105°F (41°C). After the water lines have beeni flushed, the outlet tem- perature ate each tub, tub/shower and shower must be tested to ensure that it does not exceed 120°F (49°C). Water should run for at least one minute on the hottest setting before taking the temperature reading. Some customer's may desire temperatures higher than 105°F (41°C). Temperature may be adjusted using the instructions provided with the valve. In no case should the temperature exceed 120°F (49°C) as this result in serious bodily may harm and/or death.  pipe orj joints with couplings.  Pneumatic:  1. Bypass water heater. Bypass the water heater by disconnecting the hot outlet and coldi inlet waterl lines from the water heater andj joining them together. This will protect thel hot water tank from damage and protect thosei involved in the 2. Pressurize system. Connect an air pump and pressure gauge tot the water in- let, pressurize the system to 80 psi: +5 psi andi isolate the pressure source from 3. Hold pressure. Monitor the pressure for least 15 minutes. Ift the pressure below 80 psi +5 psi, locate any leaks by applying soapy water to the connections 4. Fix leaks. Correct any leaks by cutting out and discarding bad pipe sections or joints and installing new pipe orj joints with couplings. 5. Retest. Repeat the procedure until all leaks have been eliminated. 6. Restore connections. Reconnect the water heater and the water supply. Ift the home is to be left unheated in cold weather. Protect water lines from freezing as 1. Disconnect supply. Turn off the waters supply and disconnect the water supply 2. Drain water heater. Turn off the water heater; ifr necessary, attach al hoset tot the valve to direct water away from under the home, open the drain valve and drain 3. Drain faucets. Open all faucets throughout the home (including the laundry ar- eai if plumbed, and any exterior faucets) andI let them drain completely. 4. Drain toilets. Flush toilets and drain water tanks completely. 5. Close faucets. Close all water faucets with the exception of one. 6. Connect compressor. Connect ar maximum of 30 psi air supply tot the wateri in- let connection using al low pressure compressor. 7. Open faucets. With the air supply on the system, open one faucet at at time 8. Disconnect compressor. After the entire system has been drained of all water, disconnect the air supply and close the water inlet valve. 9. Pour anti-freeze. Pour an RVa antifreeze solution into all drain traps, including sinks, tubs and toilets. Be sure that the antifreeze is safe for thei fixtures and P-  test from possible injury. the system. and looking for bubbles.  drops  FREEZE PROTECTION FOR UNOCCUPIED HOMES  follows: inlet.  thet tank completely  throughout the home.  traps.  v Installing gas lines. Only qualified professionals may connect and test gas service  STEP 3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE  CONNECTION  Ift the home uses natural or liquid petroleum gas (LPG, also known as propane) for water ors space heating, cooking or other appliances, follow the procedure described below: 1. Inspect vents. Assuret that all exhaust vents on gas-fired equipment are secure- ly connected and that roofj jacks and stacks have not come loose during transit 2. Review appliance instructions. Review each appliance manufacturer's in-  andt they are properly installed.  100  Packet Pg. 184    Connect Utili 2.g  what changes need to be made. For homes located above 3,0001 feet, ap- pliances may require a different orifice. 3. Remove cap. Remove the protective capi from home inlet pipe and install a fullf flow shut-off valve att thes supply inlet (Figure 68). 4. Install regulator. The gas piping system is designed for a pressure that is at leasts seveni inches of water column (4 OZ. per sq in or 0.25 psi) butr not more than 14 inches of water column (8 OZ. per sq in or 0.5 psi). If gas from any supply source exceeds, or could exceed this pressure, install a regulator ifre- 5. Connect supply. Using matching threaded fittings connect the gas supply to 6. Close valves. Close all valves at appliances prior to opening ther main supply  quired by the LAHJ. thei inlet side oft the shut-off valve.  valve.  Figure 68. Gas service con- nection  FULLF FLOWS SHUTOFF VALVE REQUIRED (SUPPLIEDI BY OTHERS)  FLOOR -DUST COVER -UNION (SUPPLIED  SOURCE BY OTHERS) OFGAS  TESTING  Test the gas piping system in thei following two ways: 1) piping only and 2) entire sys- tem. Consult with thel LAHJ for any additional testing or start-up requirements. Before testing begins, the temperature oft the ambient air and the piping should be ap- proximately thes same. Conduct the tests when and where air temperatures will remain 1. Isolate appliances. Isolate all appliances from the system by closing all ap- 2. Attach gauge. Attach to thel home's gasi inlet ar mercury manometer or slope gauge calibrated in increments of not more than 1/10lb. 3. Pressurize system. Using an air compressor, pressurize the: system with compressed airt tot three psi andi isolate the pressure source from thes system. 4. Monitor pressure. Monitor the pressure for at least 10 minutes. 5. Check for leaks. Ifp pressure drops belowt three psi, check for leaks by apply- ing a non-corrosive, ammonia-free gas leak detection fluid tot thej joints at all valves, appliance connections and crossover connections (do not use dish washing detergents, soap or other household chemicals). If bubbles form, 6. Repair leaks. If leaks persist, replace defective pipes or fittings with sound 7. Release pressure. Release pressure and open all appliance shut-off valves. 8. Rinse connections. Thoroughly rinse all tested connections with water to 1. Close appliances. Close all gas equipment controls and pilot light valves ac- cording tot the individual gas equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Open valves. Assure that gas shut-off valves for all gas equipment are int the 3. Attach gauge. Attach to the! home's gas inlet a pressure gauge calibrated in 4. Pressurize system. Pressurize the system with compressed air to six to eight ounces (3/8 to 1/2 psi, or 101 to 141 inches of water column). Check for leaks. Check for leaks as described above ins step 4 of the Piping  constant.  Piping only test (all appliances isolated) pliance shut-off valves.  tighten the connection and recheck. material and retest. remove leak detection fluid. Entire system test (with appliances)  open position. ounces.  101  Packet Pg. 185    Connect Utilities  2.g  onlyt test. Replace defective pipes or fittings with sound material and re-test. 6. Rinse connections. Thoroughly rinse all tested connections with water to Open the shut-off valve fore each appliance and adjust the burners according tot the ap- pliance manufacturer's instructions. Verify that thet furnace and water heater thermos- tats are operating properly and set them tot the desired temperatures.  remove leak detection fluid. GAS APPLIANCE START-UP  STEP 4. CONNECT OIL SERVICE  Homes that are equipped with oil burning furnaces must have oil supply pipingi installed and tested on site by a qualified professional in accordance with NFPA31, Standard whichever is more stringent. The home manufacturer does not supply oil piping or Consult the furnace manufacturer's instructions for proper pipe sizing and installation procedures. Where piping is run through the bottom of the! home, ensure all holes in the! bottom board are sealed tight with foam, mastic, and/or tape specially made fort that When equipping thel home with an oil storage tank, comply with thet following: Install the pipe with a gradual slope toward thet fill end or drain plug (ifs so equipped) to facilitate pumping or draining of water and sludge. Provide a readily accessible approved manual shut-off valve att the outlet, in- Equip the tank with an approved oil filter or strainer located downstream from the tank shut-off valve. Use af filter or strainer containing a sump with a drain Equip under ground tanks with at filler neck extending one foot above grade and ar minimum 1-1/4 inch diameter vent pipe extending atl least two feet Locate thet tank to be accessible for service and inspection, and safe from fire Ift thet tank is located inside a compartment oft thel home, provide ventilation at the bottom of the compartment to permit diffusion of vapors. If the tanki is fixedt to the home, provide for filling and draining from the outside. Insulate interior tanks from the structural members oft the home. Provide tanks soi installed with an outside fill and vent pipe and an approved liquid level Install tanks that feed vaporizing type oil furnaces sot that oil flows by gravity. To achieve efficient gravity flow, make sure thatt the bottom of thet tank is at  Installation for thel tanks. OIL CONNECTION  y Fill gas water heaters. Be- fore lighting the pilot ona gas powered water heater, fill thet tank with ure to do sO could damage the water heater.  of Oil Burning Equipment, 2001 or the requirements of thel LAHJ,  water. Fail-  purpose and made rodent proof.  stalled to close against the supply.  tot trap water. above grade. and other hazards.  gauge. Tanks for OIL SYSTEM TESTING  least 18 inches above the furnace oil control level. gun type installed above or below ground.  oili furnaces  furnaces include  y Testing oil tanks. All oil sto- rage tank and piping installa- tions and tests must meet all and applicable should local be made regulations experienced, qualified only per- by sonnel.  (these  at fuel pump) may be  Before operatingt the system, fill the tank to capacity with thet fuel to be burned and vi- sually check all jointsi in the system for leakage. Replace (dor not repair) parts that leak.  got to Prepare Appliances and Equipment (p. 103)  102  Packet Pg. 186    Prepare Appliances and Equipinene  2.g  Prepare Appliances and Equipment be completed in any order, thel lasti item, TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, must be done last.  This chapter provides instructions for installing and/or preparing appliances and other equipment. While thei items below can  Follow the Steps below:  INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER ORI HEAT PUMP (p. 103) PREPARE HEATING SYSTEM (p. 104)  INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT (p. 104) PREPARE WHOLE HOUSE VENTILATION SYSTEM (p. 105)  PREPARE CLOTHES DRYER (p. 105) PREPARE SMOKE ALARMS (p. 106) PREPARE FIREPLACES (p. 107)  PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES/FIXTURES (p. 108)  INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING (p. 109) INSTALL CEILING FANS AND LIGHTING (p. 109) TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (p. 111)  INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP (ifa applicable) Install split system or unitary central air conditioners and/or heat pumps as follows: 1. Check suitability. Check the home's Comfort Cooling Certificate (may bei in- cluded with the data plate) to confirm that thel homei is suitable for installation of central air. Ifs so, note the air distribution system's rated duct capacity (BTU/hr), any equipment: sizing guidance provided byt the manufacturer and information 2. Select equipment. Select equipment with ar rated heating capacity (BTU/hr) not exceeding the maximum indicated on the home's data plate and a rated cooling capacity sized in accordance with Chapter 28 oft the 1997 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals or ACCA Manual J, Residential Cooling Load, 8th edition. Informa- tion necessary to calculate the heat gain of the! home is located on thel Datal Plate. Sizing recommendations may alsol be obtained by utilizing the Manufactured Housing Research Alliance Cooling Equipment Sizing Guidelines available at www.mhrahome.org (Located in Appendix B). Choose equipment with a mini- mum circuit amperage (found on the equipment rating plate) no greater than the branch circuit rating of the exterior air conditioning receptacle (indicated on the 3. Install A-coil. Wheni installing a cooling A-coili in a down-flow furnacet that incor- porates af fresh airi intake duct, position the ducti int thet furnace cavity according to thef furnace manufacturer's instructions (Figure 69). For electric down-flow fur- naces, trim the whole house ventilation duct as needed to allow installation oft the A-coil and secure the duct tot the wall of the compartment or toi thet top of the A- coil. Do not restrict thet flex duct opening, allow the duct insulation to contact the A-coil, or allow the duct tol become kinked, restricted or configured to form ai trap.  CENTRAL UNITS  y Use listed appliances. All applicable appliances must bel listed or certified bya nationally recognized test- ing agency for the applica- tion for which the uniti is in- tended and installed in ac- cordance with the terms of its listing or certification. Properly sizing equipment. Oversized cooling equip- ment can lower energy ef- ficiency, reduce comfort, shorten equipment life and may cause moisture prob- lems int the home (includ- ing potentially damaging the home's structure). Siz- ing guidance is provided by thel Manufactured Housing Research Alliance Cooling Equipment Sizing Guide- lines available at www.mhrahomeorg,  provided to calculate the home's heat gain.  adjacent tag), ifp present.  103  Packet Pg. 187    Prepare Appliances and Equipment  2.g  Figure 69. Whole house ventilation flex duct in an electric down-flow furnace. From left to right: as pre- pared in the factory; proper installation with A-coil; im- proper installation with A-coil v A-coils. Use Selecting A-coil units compatible only and listed for use with thet fur- nacei int thel home andi in- stalled in accordance with the furnace manufacturer's instructions.  TRAP A-COIL FURNACE  "WHOLE HOUSE" VENTILATION FLEXDUCT FURNACE. CABINET  "WHOLE HOUSE" VENTILATION FLEXDUCT FURNACE. CABINET  A-COIL FURNACE  FURNACE  4. Connect to Power. Connect cooling equipment tot the power supply in accord- ance with all manufacturer's instructions and local codes. 5. Direct Runoff. Direct condensate runoff from cooling equipment away from the home and sot that ito does not collect under thel home. Ifthe home does not contain a factory installed heating appliance, install a remote heating appliance according to INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT, p. 104. Prepare fuel-burning heating systems included with thel home as follows: 1. Inspect for damage. Inspect thet furnace and report any damage to the home 2. High altitude. Ift thel home is located moret than 2,0001 feet above sea level or as indicated int thet furnace manufacturer's instructions, derate gasf furnaces 4% for each 1,0001 feet above sea level. This work must be done by a qualified (andi in 3. Converti for LP gas. IfLP gas (propane) will be used, convert the appliance from natural gas tol LP gas use. Conversion must be made by a qualified and (if re- 4. Install intake air pipe. Consult the appliance manufacturer's instructions for max- imum allowable pipe run length, requirements for air dampers, locations relative to expected snowl levels (check with thel LAHJ for expected snow levels), acceptable materials, pipe supports, and pipet termination requirements. 5. Install flue. For combustion appliances, install thet flue roof cap and stack as- sembly as described in the manufacturer's installation instructions. INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT Install remote unitsi in compliance with all heating and cooling equipment requirements in 1. Locate connections to the home. Find the manufacturer-nstaled connectors, labels or tags under the! home indicating the required connection points for supply and return air. If connectors are not provided nor location indicated, select a sup- ply duct location sucht that there are approximately equal numbers of supply regis- ters forward andi rear oft the connection point. Iti is recommended that the exterior heating and/or cooling equipment be centrally located on the back side of the 2. Install ducts. Install the appropriate supply and return ducts (not provided) be- tween the remote unit and the home (Figure 71), making connections according to the instructions for crossover ducts in Connect Crossovers (p. 61). 3. Install dampers. If installing a remote cooling unit in a home with a factory in- stalled furnace, install dampers between thet furnace and the home's air duct sys- tem, and between the remote unit and the home's air duct system to prevent warm air in heating mode from escaping to the remote cooling unit and vice versa. 4. Connect wiring. Install a thermostat containing at fan switch. Connect utilities in accordance with all manufacturer's instructions and local codes. Wiring shall be  PREPARE HEATING SYSTEM  Installing flue stacks with al hinged roof. Iff flue stack components are installed above the finish roofl line (asi is often the case with hinged roofs), an Alterna- tive Construction letteri is normally required along with ai follow-up inspection. Contact the factory for guidance. Venting appliances to the outside. Vent to the exte- rior of the home all com- bustion appliances except ranges and ovens. Selecting ducts. Exterior ductwork for remote units must be provided byt the installer or HVAC contrac- tor. Ducts must be ap- proved fore exterior installa- tion and should be wrapped with insulation of at least R-8 under a vapor barrier with a perm rating ofr not greater than one. (For ENERGY: STAR homes, the R-value must be at least that specified ont the manufacturer's EN- ERGY STAR Site Installa- tion Checklist- a minimum ofR-8.)  manufacturer.  some jurisdictions, licensed) technician. quired by thel LAHJ) licensed technician.  this chapter above and the following:  home.  104  Packet Pg. 188    Prepare Appliances and Equipinene  2.g  per the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer. 5. Seal penetrations. Repair or replace all floor insulation disturbed during the duct installation and seal holes int the bottom board using foam, mastic or tape special-  ly made for that purpose. MARRIAGE SUPPLYDUCT LINE 1 SUPPORT STRAPSAT 48"IN.O.C. MINIMUM  AIRC CONDITIONING ORHEATING EQUIPMENT  Figure 71. Ducts connecting exterior heating and/or cool- inge equipment the! home v Compressed Duct. Support the duct without ing the insulation and re- stricting airflow. v Choosing pipe lengths. The appliance manutactur- er may designate the length oft the pipe run based on the pipe diameter and the number of turns in the pipe run. Venting exhaust systems. Exhaust vents must extend to thel home's exterior through skirting. Termina- tion of the dryer exhaust underneath the home can cause condensation and moisture damage to the home. Lint and dust accu- mulation can ignite, caus- inga a fire. Figure 72. Clothes ventilation ductwork through floor (left) or exterior wall (right)  SUPPLY RETURN DUCT DUCT  SUPPORT BLOCK MINIMUM CLEARANCE BETWEEN DUCTS AND GROUND1 TOBE4IN.  to  compress-  PREPARE WHOLE HOUSE VENTILATION SYSTEM Prepare the whole-house ventilation system according to the ventilation system manufac- turer's instructions. Confirm that any fresh air intake ducts extend toi the exterior and do not draw air from the crawlspace under thel home. Do not allow fresh air ventilation intake  any  ducts to become kinked or restricted, forming at trap. PREPARE CLOTHES DRYER  DRYER VENTS  Iftheh home has been designed with a dryer location, the components for ventilating the dry- ers should already be installed so thatt the vent terminates to the exterior of the home. Ini the event the dryer ventilation system could not be completed byt the manufacturer, the compo- nents to complete the ventilation system are includedi int the home and should be completed Run the dryer vent to the outside through the exterior wall or through thet floor to a point beyond the perimeter of the home, using materials approved byt the clothes dryer manufac-  asi illustrated before connecting and operating the dryer.  turer (see Figure 72).  EXTERIOR WALL CLAMP TOVENT CAP DRYER VENT CAP  CLAMP TO DRYER CONNECTION CAP- SEAL BOTTOM BOARD  CLAMP TOVENT  RIGID OR FLEXDUCT  dryer  SUPPORT: STRAP RIGID OR FLEX DUCT WOODF FRAME SECURED TOBOTTOM OF RIMPLATE ORI INSTALL THROUGH: SKIRTING  CLAMPTO DRYER CONNECTION  VENT BELOWF FLOOR Install the vent as follows: vent rough openings.  VENT THROUGHI EXTERIOR WALL  1. Remove temporary caps. Remove any temporary seals and duct caps from the 2. Install ductwork. Install ductwork using clamps (do not use screws or other fas- teners that penetrate into the duct) and support the duct withr metal straps con- nected to thet floor joists or chassis at two feet O.C. orl less. Ensure ducto connec- tions are internally overlapped to prevent inhibiting the flow of air and thereby  y Avoid damaging structural elements. Do not cut or otherwise damage struc- tural elements such as floor joists or wall studs for the installation oft the dryer exhaust system.  causing lint accumulation.  105  Packet Pg. 189    Prepare Appliances and Equipment  2.g  3. Install cap and damper. Install an approved dryer vent cap with damper ont the exterior termination oft the duct. Ift the vent terminates at skirting, secure the cap to framing or skirting with sheet metals screws and seal edges with caulk ors sealant. Ift the vent terminates through a wall, apply al bead of sealant to thel back of the cap around the opening ands secure with sheet metal screws to metal, hardboard orf fiber cement siding or with woods screws to ar mount block for vinyl siding. Seal opening. Seal openingsi inside and outside oft the home including at the floor, interior walls, siding and skirting (with caulk) and at the bottom board using foam, mastic and/or tape specially madei fori that purpose.  Gas. Ventilation compo- nents that may be included with thel homet for ane elec- tric dryer may not be ac- ceptable for gas dryers. Consult the gas dryer manufacturer instructions.  GAS DRYERS  Ift the home was not fitted for a gas dryer, installing one requires substantial alteration to thel home. Gas supply piping and adequate venting must be provided as specified byt the dryer manufacturer andi installed by at trained professional. Do not cut major structural ele- Thel home has several factory installed smoke alarms thata are wired to a 120 volt circuit. If the home was designed for placement on a basement, an additional alarmi is provided for installation at a pre-wired location under the home. Connect the basement smoke alarm 1. Check circuit. Ensure that the batteries are installed and the electrical power to thel home is activated and that the smoke alarm circuit is on. 2. Test alarms. Press the' "test" button on the alarm and hold for 5 seconds (or until the alarm sounds). When the alarm begins to sound, release and confirm that each alarm int thel home is sounding. Replace (with the same brand as thosei in- stalled elsewhere ini the home) any alarms that do not sound and retest. 3. Disconnect AC. With the AC current disconnected: and! batteries installed, test for DC operation following thes same procedure as shown ins step 1. Both steps 1 and 2 above must be conducted on each alarmi installed int the home. Ifany alarm fails to sound during the test, turn off the power at ther main panel box and check the wiring. Make any necessary repairs and conduct a complete re-test. Repeat ifr necessary  Installing ducts. Keep ductwork straight and smooth as possible without excess slack. Slope it slightly downward towards the exterior to facilitate moisture drainage.  ments to accommodate a gas dryer. PREPARE SMOKE ALARMS and test all alarms as follows:  until all alarms arei functioning properly.  106  Packet Pg. 190    Prepare Appliances and Equipinene  2.g  PREPARE FIREPLACES  Install chimneys, chimney flashing and roofing, fireplace combustion air inlets and hearths according tot the manufacturer's instructions and the procedures described below. Fireplace and wood stoves may require on-site installation of additional sections of ap- proved chimney pipe, a spark arrestor and ar rain cap assembly. Follow the manufacturer's 1. Remove coverings. Remove protective materials covering the roof flashing and any foreign material from thei installed part of the chimney. 2. Install chimney pipe. Assemble ands seal the chimney per thet fireplace or wood stove manufacturer's installation instructions andi if there is a conflict between the instructions andt thet figure, followt thei instructions. To assure sufficient draft for proper operation, extend the chimney atl least three feet above the highest point where itp penetrates the roof and atl least twot feet higher than any surface within 101 feet oft the chimney (Figure 73). Use additional section(s) of chimney pipe (not provided) if required byl local code ori ift thes site has obstructions within 101 feet of Fireplaces and wood stoves not provided byt thel home manufacturer, including chimneys and air inlets for fireplaces and wood stoves must be listed for use with manufactured  CHIMNEYS  instructions and the procedures described below:  the chimney.  homes andi must be installed in accordance with their listings.  ROOFTOP ASSEMBLY RAINO CAP  Figure 73. Chimney and combustion air intake duct installation y Selecting the appropriate flue. Wood fireplaces use larger diameter flues than gas fireplaces. Make sure flue matches the appliance type. Gas fireplaces cannot burn wood because the fluei is too small and smoke will back up into thel home.  SPARK ARRESTOR CHIMNEY CAP ADAPTOR DOUBLE WALL PIPE STORM COLLAR FLASHING FIRESTOP THIMBLE  3-0" MIN.  ROOF HEIGHT  DAMPER HANDLE OPEN D AIRI INLET DAMPER HANDLE ABOVE SNOW LEVEL OUTSIDE AIRI INLET  CLOSED4  AIRI INTAKE FROM OUTSIDE  Figure 74. Chimney clear- ance  LESS THAN 10 3'MIN. 2MIN.  2'MIN. 10-1 3'MIN.  3. Install shingles. Install shingles upt toi the edge oft the flue cut-outi in the roof  107  Packet Pg. 191    Prepare Appliances and Equipment  2.g  deck. Secure shingles installed under the roof flashing with asphalt cement. 4. Install flashing. Place flashing over pipe section and shingles and set in asphalt cement. Secure flashing to roof deck at top two corners with roofing nails. 5. Complete shingles. Cuts shingles in successive courses to fit around the pipe and embedt themi in asphalt cement where they overlap thet flashing. Secure shingles with roofing nails through flashing and apply asphalt cement over nail heads. The completed installation should appear as shown inl Figure 75, with the lower part of thef flange overlapping the lower shingles and the side and upper shingles over-  lapping thei flange. e - 9  ROOF SHINGLES FLANGE  PUSHDOWN- STORM COLLAR FLANGE  UPPER. ANDS SIDE SHINGLES OVERLAP FLANGE AND ARE SET IN ASPHALT CEMENT  CAULKING FLASHING  Figure 75. Roof flashing and shingle installation around chimney  FLUE PIPE  LOWERI PARTO OF FLANGE OVERLAPS LOWER: SHINGLE  COMBUSTION AIRI INLETS  Combustion air inlets provide combustion air through thei floor or an exterior walli to a com- bustion appliance. Ifi installed through an exterior wall, no further site installation is re- quired. Ift through thet floor, extend the duct from its point just below thef floor tot the outside. Locate the outside air inlet above expected snow levels (contact thel LAHJ for snow levels). Follow thef fireplace manufacturer's instructions (typically ini thet fireplace/stove or with the Ifshipped loose, install the fireplace hearth according to the fireplace manufacturer's in- PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES/FIXTURES Install kitchen and bath appliances according to the manufacturer's instructions and the Ift the home is provided with a range, cook top and/or grill containing its own exhaust sys- tem that penetrates the floor, complete the exhaust system as follows: 1. Remove covers. Remove the cover on the factory installed exhaust pipe protrud- ingf froml beneath the floor near the appliance. 2. Install termination fitting. Secure the provided termination fitting at the outside 3. Install duct. Use the provided flexible metallic duct to connect the elbow protrud- ingf from thef floor and the termination fitting. Refer to the manufacturer's installa- tioni instructions for guidance on supporting the duct andr making the connections. Install only appliances with al Btu capacity equivalent to or less than the capacity of thet fac- tory-installed piping and at the location of ai factory-installed gas riser.  chimney parts). HEARTHS structions.  procedures described for each appliance below. COOKING APPLIANCES  v Installing exhaust ducts. Route exhaust ducts sO they do not terminate be- neath thel home.  edge of the floor.  SITE-INSTALLED GAS APPLIANCES REFRIGERATOR Prepare the refrigerator as follows:  Remove straps, blocks or other securement devices used for shipping and patch Ifthe refrigerator has ani icemaker, check water lines for leaks upon installation and a few days later to make sure no leaks have developed.  any resulting marks on floors or walls.  108  Packet Pg. 192    Prepare Appliances and Equipinene  2.g  SITE-INSTALLED APPLIANCES ANDI FIXTURES homes and follow all applicable local codes. INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING Install exterior lighting according to Figure 76 and thet following:  Ifsinks, tubs, showers or other fixtures or appliances are tol be site-installed, follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. Use only products listedi for use in manufactured  1. Remove cover. Remove the screws and cover from electrical junction box. 2. Install flash ring. Place the non-combustible flash ring over thej junction box. 3. Connect wires. Connect fixture wires tol house wires int thel box, black tol black, white to white and equipment ground to equipment ground, using listed wire con- 4. Connect fixtures. Connect thet fixture to thej junction box or strap using screws 5. Weatherproof. Weatherprooticauk around the base of thei fixture, leaving a small gapi int the caulking on the bottom to permit drainage of water that may accumu- 6. Complete installation. Install bulb and globe on thet fixture and verify proper op-  iv Lighting installation. A qualified electrician should install lighting. Before con- necting lighting, disconnect power tot thel lighting circuit. Ground all exterior light fix- tures. Using a non-combustible ring. Install a non- combustible ring complete- ly covering any combusti- ble surfaces thet fixtures may be mounted on (e.g. hard-board, clad wooda and vinyl siding), or when ceil- ing material is exposed be- tween the light fixture ca- nopy and thej junction box. Figure 76. Exterior lighting connection y Installing ceiling fans. A qualified electrician should install lighting andf fans. Before connecting the ceil- ing fan or light, disconnect power to thei fan wires. Any unit installed outside of the home (such as ina a porch ceiling) shall bel listed for wet locations.  nectors. Push wires intot the box. provided with the light fixture.  late. eration.  WIRE FROMS SWITCH NON-COMBUSTIBLE RING (IF REQUIRED): FIXTURE CANOPY-  WIREI NUT WIREF FROM (TYPICAL) SWITCH- WHITE  WIRENUT (TYPICAL) HITE  GLOBE  PIGTAILFOR GROUND CONTINUITY- WIRE1 BOX- TO  JUNCTION OTHER FIXTURE  INSTALL CEILING FANS/LIGHTS  Install ceiling fans no closer than 36 inches, measured from the tip of the fan blade tot the nearest side of the smoke alarm and with the trailing edges of the blades at least six feet- four inches above thet finished floor. Comply with all unit manufacturer's instructions and CEILING FAN/LIGHT MOUNTED TO FACTORY INSTALLED ELECTRICAL BOXI IN Before installing the unit, makes sure that adequate structural bracing is present int the ceil- ing. Ifuncertain, check with the manufacturer. Follow the fan or light manufacturer's in- structions to connect the unit and complete the wiring. Ift the instructions are not available,  ther requirements below. CEILING  connect the wiring as shown in Figure 77.  109  Packet Pg. 193    Prepare Appliances and Equipment  2.g  GROUNDY WIRE  Figure 77. Wiring fora a ceil- ingt fan or chain-hung light fixture with a maximum weight of 35 Ibs  COLOR CODED WIRES WIRE NUT CEILINGE BPX-  GROUND STRAP CEILING  LIMITED OR NONCOMBUSTIBLE RING (IF REQUIRED)  MOUNTING SCREW CHAIN  CEILING FAN/LIGHT MOUNTED ON SITE-INSTALLED DECORATIVE BEAM Where the electrical box will be mounted in as site-installed decorative center beam at- tached to the ridge beam, connect the fixture as follows (see Figure 78): 1. Cut hole. Ift the decorative beam (shipped loose) does not contain aj precut hole for the electrical box, cut al hole with a diameter approximately 1/4 inch larger than the! box's using al hole saw. Align the hole with the supply wire location and center 2. Install box. Install thel boxi int the hole and secure the flange (plastic boxes only) 3. Insert wire. Insert the ceiling wire through al knock out hole int the side of the elec- trical box. It may be necessary to cut ar notchi in thet top oft the decorative beam (on the supply wire side of the center beam hole) allowing the: supply wire to be inserted into the electrical box without binding against thel beam during installa- tion. Leave approximately four inches of wirei free in the box. 4. Attach beam. Secure the decorative beami in place over the center linej joint, checking that the supply wire is not pinched or penetrated by beami fasteners. Se- cure the electrical box to the ridge beam with #8x21/2" wood screws through the 5. Strip wires. Strip about 3/4 inch of insulation from the white and black conductor 6. Position ring. Position ther non-combustible flash ring (provided) over the elec- trical box so that thet finished surface (adjacent to electrical box), which is to be 7. Install and wire unit. Follow the unit manufacturer's installation instructions for mounting thef fan/light assembly tot the box and for electrical wiring. Use provided  y Choosing ceiling fanj junc- tion boxes. Connect ceil- ing fans only toj junction boxes listed and marked for ceiling fan application in accordance with Article Always 314.27(b) of 2005 metalj NEC. tion boxes. ground Selecting fan weight. Do not use any ceiling fans or light fixtures that exceed the weight rating of the box (351 Ibs unless otherwise noted). Grounding vices. Ground electrical de- using a fixture-grounding device or at fixture- grounding wire as specified int the manufacturer's in- structions. Figure 78. Ceiling fan/light mounted toi flush ridge beam  ont the! beam.  tot the decorative beam with four #6 X 1"screws.  junc-  two holesi int the top oft the box. ends of the supply wire.  fans/lights  covered byt the fan canopy, is not exposed. electrical connectors for splicing wire.  RIDGEI BEAM  CEILING SUPPLYWIRE COILED/ ANDS SECURED FOR SHIPMENT NOTCHI BEAM AT HOLEI IFI NECESSARY FORI WIRE CHASE SECURE! BOXTO2X6 (FIELD-INSTALLED) CENTERI BEAM  2X6 CENTER BEAM- SHIPPED LOOSE FORI FIELDI INSTALLATION HOLEF FORI BOX CUT THROUGH2X6 (MAYI BE CUT INI PLANT ORI INI FIELD) SECURE. BOX TO RIDGE. BEAM (FIELDI INSTALLED) ELECTRICAL BOX SUPPLYWIRE INSERTED INF FIELD THROUGH SIDEI KNOCKOUT OF BOX  110  Packet Pg. 194    Prepare Appliances and Equipinene  2.g  TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM  After completion of all electrical wiring and connections, including crossovers, appliances, lights, and ceiling fans, inspect andt testt the electrical system as follows: 1. Fill water heater. Fill water heater before turning on power to the home or switch- 2. Test continuity. Before turning on the electrical power to thel home, conduct an electrical continuity test to ensure that exposed metallic parts oft the home and the 3. Test operation.. After turning on the electrical power tot the home, conduct opera- tional tests of all devices to demonstrate that they are connected and in working 4. Test polarity. After turning on the electrical power to the home, conduct electrical polarity checks to determine that connections of electrical equipment installed or completed duringi installation have been made properly. Visual verification is an acceptable electrical polarity check for these on-site connections. go to Complete Exterior Work (p. 112).  ing on the circuit breaker. chassis are effectively bonded.  order.  111  Packet Pg. 195    Complete Exterior Work  2.g  Complete Exterior Work  This chapter covers sealing the bottom board, installing the ground cover and skirting, preparing wind protection shutters  and completing site built structures. Follow the Steps below:  STEP 1. REPAIR. AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD (p. 112) STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER (p. 112)  STEP 3. INSTALL SKIRTING (p. 113)  STEP 4. ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION SHUTTERS (p. 114) STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE BUILT STRUCTURES (p. 114) STEP 1. REPAIR AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD Tears and openings int the bottom board can result from transportation or installation activities. Inspect for holes and gaps int the entire bottom board, especially areas around service penetrations, crossover connections, elements and the perimeter of thet floor. Using approved materials appropriate for the type of repair, repair the bottom board wherever torn or loosened as follows: 1. Insulate. Replace any missing insulation prior to closure andr repair of thel bot- tom board, paying particular attention toi insulation gaps that may! have been 2. Repair large openings. Repair large openings with a durable patch made of bottom board fabric or other compatible material and fastened with vinyl bot- tom board tape held in place by fasteners installed with a divergent stapler. Seal the edges around patches with foam or mastic. Forl large openings, in- stall a rigid backer board behind the bottom board to provide at fastening sub- 3. Repair small openings. Repair small gaps and tears with vinyl bottom board Alternate materials may be used to repair and seal the bottom board provided they are appropriate for the type of repair andi installed per the manufacturer's installation in- STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER Ift thes space under the home is tol be enclosed with skirting or other materials, a ground moisture retarder ofa a minimum six mil thick polyethylene sheeting or equivalent must bei installed covering the ground under the home. Moisture retarders are not requiredi in arid regions (less than 15 inches of rainfall annually) with dry soil conditions. If on- grade (surface) footings are used, install the ground moisture retarder prior to placing the footings, or install it around thet footings after all other work under the home is com- 1. Apply sheeting. Unrollt the ground moisture overlapping joints in the sheeting a minimum of 12 inches and covering the entire area under the home except for 2. Repair tears. Repair any large voids ort tearsi int the retarder by patching with like material, maintaining a minimum 12i inch overlap, secured with tape or ad- hesive. Repair small voids and tears with tape, adhesive or per manufacturer's  foundation  Hiv Sealing bottom boards. A continuous and sealed bot- tom board is critical for home performance, energy efficiency, protection against moisture problems, prevention of pipe freezing and protection against in- sects and rodents Bottom board sealing me- thods. Tapes shall never be used alone to repair a large opening int the bottom board. Divergent staples or mastic must be usedi in tandem with tape to prevent future tear off. Fastening vinyl siding. Do noti install fasteners directly into vinyl siding. Allow for siding thermal expansion by inch pre-drilling diameter minimum fastener 1/2 holes or fastening skirting toal under home (see ledger Best Practice thel tip).  pipe and duct hangers,  created at P-traps.  strate for the patch.  tape, patches, adhesive/mastic ori foam sealant.  structions.  plete.  Install the ground moisture retarder as follows:  areas under recessed entries, decks and porches.  installation instructions.  112  Packet Pg. 196    Complete Exterior Wun Attaching vinyl skirting. At- tach skirting tot the home, buta allowi for contraction ande expansion characteris- tics oft the skirting material. v Avoid backfilling against skirting. Do not backfill against non-structural skirt- ing.  2.g  STEP 3. SKIRTING (IF USED)  Skirtingi is any structural or non-structural perimeter crawlspace enclosure. Complete site built structures (see STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE BUILT STRUCTURES, p.114) that abut the! home (such as porches, attached garages and steps) prior toi installing skirt-  ing.  TABLE 27. SKIRTING AND VENTILATION SPECIFICATIONS  Component Skirting  Specification  Skirting must be of weather-resistant materials orp provided with protection against weather deterioration: atl least equivalent tot that provided bya coat- ing ofz zinc ons steel ofr notl less than 0.30 OZ pers sqf fto ofs surface coated. Skirting madef from wood or wood products and used within sixi inches of the ground needt tol ber made ofr materials naturally resistant to decay and Ventilation openings must be covered fort their full height and width with a perforated (1/4i inch maximum opening in any dimension) corrosion and weather resistant covering thati is designed to prevent the entry ofr rodents. In areas subject to freezing, the coverings for the ventilation openings must have and operable damper, permitting themt to bei int the open or closed posi-  termite infestation orp pressure treated.  Vents  tion depending ont the weather.  To design andi install skirting, comply with the skirting manufacturer's instructions (if 1. Configure skirting. Run the skirting along thep perimeter of the home's heat- ed, conditioned space. Dor not enclose with skirting areas under recessed en- tries, porches or decks (whether constructed as part oft the home or added on site) unless skirting is of thet fully vented type and installed so as to allow wa- 2. Fasten skirting. Attachi itt tot thel home in a manner that prevents water from being trapped between the siding or trim andt thes skirting. Allow for frost heave 3. Provide ventilation. Unless the skirting has integral ventilation openings that meet thet following ventilation requirements, install equally sized ventilation openings on at least two opposite sides of the foundation. Size ventilation ar- eat to equal atl least one square footi fore each 150 square feet of under-floor area (or for each 1,500 square feeti ifa ground moisture retarder isi installed according to STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER, p. 112). The ventilation arear must be the netf free area oft thet foundation vent, not the area oft thet foundation opening. Place vents as high above the ground as One Square Foot of Vent per 150 Square Feet of Under-Floor. Area Total Sq. Feet Total Sq. Feet Total Sq. Feet Total Sq. Feet Total Sq.Feet Home ofVents Home of Vents Home of Vents Home of Vents Home of Vents Sq.Feet Required Sq. Feet Required Sq.F Feet Required Sq.F Feet Required Sq.Feet Required 500 3.33 1000 6.67 1500 10.00 2000 13.33 2500 16.67 600 4.00 1100 7.33 1600 10.67 2100 14.00 2600 17.33 700 4.67 1200 8.00 1700 11.33 2200 14.67 2700 18.00 800 5.33 1300 8.67 1800 12.00 2300 15.33 2800 18.67 900 6.00 1400 9.33 1900 12.67 2400 16.00 2900 19.33 4. Install access. Provide an access opening not less than 18i inches wide and 24 inches high (minimum 3 square feeti in area) and located sot that any utility 5. Extend vents, drains andi inlets. Run appliance exhaust vents, combustion airi inlets and air conditioner condensation drains through the skirting tot the outside and terminate eacha asi instructed int the sections of this manual corre-  provided) andt thet following:  ter to freely flow out from under the home. wheni installing skirting in areas subject toi frost.  practical.  TABLE 28 FOUNDATION VENTILATION  connections located under the home are accessible.  113  Packet Pg. 197    Complete Exterior Work  2.g  STEP 4. ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION Ifdesired, prepare temporary protective window covers for use during severe winds storms STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE BUILT STRUCTURES Install site! built structures such as steps, landings, garages, awnings, carports, breeze- ways, porches, decks, railings, sheds and utility rooms according to manufacturer's in- structions (if any), in compliance with alll local regulations including fire separation and electrical requirements, and according to the following: Do not obstruct any of the egress windows or thet two required exit doors from The addition must be entirely self-supported and cannot rely on the home for sup- port (superficial connections are acceptable). The home's structural system is not designed to support the extral loads imposed by the addition. Dor not damage the integrity of thel home's structural or weatherproofing: system. Seal any weatherproofing: connections between the site built structure and the home and flash any roof ort threshold connections. The home's structural system may not! be cut or altered in any way. A registered engineer or architect shall approve any alterations or changes. Utilize only GFCI outlets for site builts structures. Install and test smoke alarms in any site built structures according tol local code. Allj joints between the home and the addition must be properly sealed so they Thel home's mechanical system has been designed for the home itself and does The addition must meeta alll local codes, including site work and fire separation re- quirements. The manufacturer does not accept any responsibility for the addi- The home with an addition must be in conformance with the HUDI Manufactured Housing Code, such as exiting, light and vent, etc. The addition must be ap- Site work shall be consistent with the objectives of site grading as described in The manufacturer will not honor the warranty for any problem that relates tot the Site addons such as stairs, decks and porches should be installed between %" to 7-3/4" below the door threshold in a manori to drain water away from thel home. A dormer roof can bei installed ont the home to match the pitch of the addition's roof. The shingles below the dormer must be removed and the dormer must be vented properly. The dormer weight, including the weight of the existing home's roof sheathing, shall be no more than 8 psf and distributed uniformly over the roof trusses of the home. Connections may be made to attach the dormer tot the home, but not be used to support the roofl loads oft the addition. The dormer shall be shingled, flashed and sealed properly to prevent leaks (fol- lows shingle manufacturer's instructions and ARMA guidelines for shingle valley applica- The manufacturer is providing the above information as an accommodation only and with- out consideration. Accordingly, byt this letter the manufacturer extends no warranties or representation either expressed ori implied with regard to the recommendations herein.  SHUTTERS  and hurricanes according to Appendix C.  the home.  are watertight.  not consider the heating or cooling of the addition.  tion's design.  proved by thej jurisdiction having authority. Prepare the Site (p.15). construction of the addition (leak problems, etc).  tions).  got to Prepare Home for Occupancy (p. 115).  114  I-114  Packet Pg. 198    Prepare Home for Occupanvy  2.g  Prepare Home for Occupancy Follow these steps for finali inspection and completion of the home.  Follow the Steps below:  STEP 1.VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION (A/C) INSPECTION (p. 115)  STEP 2. COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST (p. 115) STEP 3. COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST (p. 115)  STEP 4. CLEAN THE HOME (p. 115)  STEP 1. VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION (A/C) IN- AI home designated as an ACI home will contain the letters "AC" in the serial number lo- cated ont the data plate.Veriflying the ACi inspection is the responsibility of the retailer. The installation is not complete until the alternative construction inspection has been passed and all applicable documention completed and returned to the plant. STEP 2. COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST After all previous steps have been accomplished, inspect the home to verify thati it has been completely and properly installed using the checklist starting on p. 116. Installer must also certify that the installation isi in compliance with either the manufacturer's in- structions or with an alternative design in compliance with 3285.2(c). Arrange for an in- Correct any deficiencies found, if possible, ori if not possible, inform the retailer or man- STEP 3. COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST For ENERGY STAR qualified homes (check with the retailer or manufacturer), this step ist tol be completed by the manufacturer's designated representative. Ther manufacturer's representative must complete the Energy Star Site Installation Checklist, obtain signatures on the ENERGY STAR label, and return the completed ENERGY STAR Site Installation Checklist to the manufacturing plant. Remove and properly dispose of alli instalation-generated dust, debris and packaging materials from the home and the surrounding property. Ensure that the home isi in  SPECTION  spection byt the appropriate LAHJ, ifr required.  ufacturer immediately.  STEP 4. CLEAN THE HOME "move-in" condition.  Installation is Complete  115  Packet Pg. 199    Complete Installation  2.g  Checklist  FOUNDATION SUPPORT  Footings properly sized and constructed for the soil conditions Piers spacing per data plate and applicable table and roof load zone  Piers properly constructed and vertical Perimeter blocking installed (if required) Piers at eachs side of openings 48" or larger Center line piers installed at columns Shims in place and tight Approved anchors are used Proper anchors installed based on soil conditions Anchors are installed at correct angles Anchor spacing and installation correct Longitudinal ties installed (if required) Anchor straps are tensioned Moisture retarder installed  Piers beneath all outside exterior doors (except when located in end wall)  ANCHORS  UNDER THE HOME  The ground under and around the home has been properly graded to prevent HVAC ducts are supported off the ground and connected tightly to collars at all  water from collecting or flowing beneath thel home Fireplace combustion air intake free and unrestricted No holes or tearsi in! bottom board venting and provision for frost heave  ends  Skirting (if used) has been installed per manufacturer's instructions with proper Skirting has been attached in a manner that does not cause water tol be trapped between the siding and trim and cannot be forced upi into the wall cavi- Dryer vent, range/cook top exhaust, water heater temperature and pressure overflow pipe and AC condensate draini installed to perimeter of crawl space Shingled roofs are free of visible damage and serious defects and there arer no Shingle close-up and ridge cap have been completed per applicable details AIl hold down straps on shingled roofs have been removed and holes have Penetrations at roof stacks, vents and chimneys have been properly sealed Siding andt trimi is free of gaps, voids, missing fasteners, damage and serious defects. All seams are sealed and hardboard edges are sealed. Drip edge and fascia is properly installed and free of damage and serious de- Gutters and downspouts are installed properly such that water is diverted away Trees and bushes have been trimmed to prevent brushing against the home in The exterior of the home andi immediate surroundings is clean, clear of con-  ty  EXTERIOR  missing or loose shingles been properly sealed  fects from the home  windy conditions or under snow loads The HUDI label is exposed, intact and legible  116  Packet Pg. 200    Complete Installation  2.g  struction materials, dust and debris  INTERIOR  Ceilings, walls andi floor coverings are free from damage and serious defects Carpeting is properly stretched and seamed All trim and molding isi installed properly andi free of damage and defects All cabinets, countertops, plumbing fixtures, appliances, furnishings and win- dow coverings are free of damage or serious defects All cabinet doors and drawers work properly Alli interior and exterior doors and windows open, close and latch properly One window in each bedroom meets emergency egress requirements, has op- erating instruction labels oni it and operates properly Allt temporary: shipping hardware has been removed Floors are level The data plate isi intact and legible Smoke alarms have beent tested  Thei interior oft the home is clean, clear of materials, dust and debris Crossover and service connection and splices have been properly made with Water and drain lines are insulated or otherwise protected from freezing Pipe supports are installed and properly spaced Proper slope has been maintained on all drain lines All necessary inspections and tests have been performed All sinks, basins, tubs and toilets operate properly as labeled and operate properly  WATER AND DRAIN SYSTEMS correct materials  All hota and cold water lines are properly connected to fixtures, dispense water Tub, tub/shower and shower outlets have been verified to ensure the outlet water temperature does not exceed 120°F (49°C) The panel amperage matches the connection to the home The home has been properly grounded Continuity test has been conducted Polarity test! has been conducted Operational test has been conducted Alle electrical crossovers have been connected All receptacles, switches andl light fixtures operate properly Ground fault circuiti interrupters operate properly Alle exterior lights have been properly installed The gas system pressure test has been conducted  ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS  The main power supply has been properly connected and tested by al licensed  electrician  GAS/FUEL OIL SYSTEMS  Connections between units are properly made with access as required The maini fuel line has been properly connected and tested by a qualified tech-  nician  APPLIANCE OPERATING AND VENTING Alla appliances are working properly  117  Packet Pg. 201    Complete Installation  2.g  Checklist  Appliance venting isi in accordance with the manufacturers instructions Whole house, kitchen and bath exhaust fan operation are correct Fireplace chimney stack extension and roof cap! have been installed in accord- Air conditioner condensate line is properly trapped and terminates outside of Instalation/anchoring certificates or seals have beeni issued andi installed (if Owner's and operation manuals are available for all appliances Thisi installation manual is left with home Marriage line gasket has been installed andi inspected  Fresh air intakes are properly installed ance with the manufacturers instructions Air conditioner/heat, pumpi is sized properly  the skirting MISCELLANEOUS required)  118  Packet Pg. 202    Complete Installation  2.g  Index of Steps INTRODUCTION GETTING STARTED. PREPARE THE SITE. INSTALL FOOTINGS. CONSTRUCT FOUNDATIONS. SET THE HOME. COMPLETE MULTI-SECTION SET. COMPLETE ROOF AND EXTERIOR WALLS.. CONNECT CROSSOVERS. COMPLETE THE INTERIOR INSTALL STABILIZING SYSTEM CONNECT UTILITIES. PREPARE APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT COMPLETE EXTERIOR WORK. PREPARE HOME FOR OCCUPANCY. COMPLETE INSTALLATION CHECKLIST.  PG.1 10 PG.15 PG.20 PG.35 PG.38 PG.44 PG.56 PG.61 PG.72 PG.74 PG.95 PG.103 PG.112 PG.115 PG.116  119  Packet Pg. 203    2.g  APPENDIXA  Packet Pg. 204    2.g  APPENDIXB  Packet Pg. 205    2.g  MHRA Housing Research Alliance  NationalF Rural Manufactured Electric Cooperative  Manufactured Home  Cooling Association  Equipment Sizing Guidlines For ENERGY STARB qualified manuractured  homes and homes built to the HUD standards' Environmental United States Tennessee Authority Valley  ProtectionA Agency  Oversizing cooling equipment: a costly mistake The guidelines offer a simple look-up procedure to assist equipment specifiers, HVAC contractors, home installers, retailers, manufacturers, and electric utility staff select heat pump and air conditioner capacity for new manufactured homes. The guidelines were developed to help eliminate the all-too-common problem of choosing equipment with far more Oversized HVAC equipment is recognized as a common industry problem that erodes energy efficiency and lowers customer satisfac- tion. Consumers overpay in two ways. First, they are buying equipment that has more cooling capacity and is more expensive than they need. Second, once installed, oversized equipment cycles on and off frequently, shortening equipment  cooling capacity than the home needs.  life, lowering efficiency, and increasing power bills. Oversized equipment also can lead to moisture problems  within the home. ENERGY STAR  ENERGY STAR is a nationally recognized, voluntary labeling program designed to identify and promote energy-efficient homes, buildings, and products to consumers and business owners across the United States. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency is responsible for administering the ENERGY STAR for Homes program. An ENERGY STAR qualified home is at least 30% more energy efficient in its heating, cooling and water heating than a comparable home built to the 1993 Model Energy Code. This increased level of energy efficiency is met by successfully integrating an energy efficient building envelope (effective insulation, tight construction, advanced efficient equipment (space heating and cooling and hot water heating).  ENERGY STAR windows), energy efficient air distribution (air-tight, well-insulated ducts), and energy ENERGY STAR qualified homes typically require less cooling capacity because their high insulation levels and tight construction slow the transfer of heat from outside into the home, and their tight air distribution systems  minimize the loss of conditioned air from the ducts.  Thermal provisions of the Manufactured Housing Construction and Safety Standards, Subpart F, Section $3280  Packet Pg. 206    2.g  How to use the sizing guidelines  The sizing guidelines consist of a set of nine maps covering the continental U.S. and the Sizing Table contain- ing recommended cooling equipment sizes in tons. The maps are divided into counties. Contiguous counties that have the same sizing recommendations are combined into Sizing Groups." The maps and Sizing Table are  available on the Web at ntpiww.mhrahome0rg and mtp'wwwenetstargow  Follow these steps to determine your recommended size:  1. 2. 3. 4. 5.  Find the county where the home will be sited on the map and determine the corresponding Sizing Find the row corresponding to the Sizing Group on the Sizing Table. The rows on the table are color- Determine the conditioned Floor Area of the home and read across the top row of the table locating Tot find the required cooling equipment capacity in tons for a heat pump or air conditioner, read down the column that corresponds to the Floor Area and across the row that corresponds to the Sizing Group. The left-hand column in each pair represents the appropriate cooling equipment size for ENERGY STAR qualified homes. The right-hand column in each pair represents the size (in tons of cooling capacity) for  Group number.  coded to match the colors on the map. the pair of columns containing that area.  homes built to the HUD-standards thermal requirements.  Example:  An ENERGY STAR qualified home is to be installed in Richmond County near Ocala, Florida. The home is a 28 ft. by 561 ft. multisection containing 1,568 square feet of conditioned living space (28 Referring to the Sizing Table, read across the row labeled Sizing Group 50 and down the column  The map indicates that Richmond County is in a Sizing Group 50.  ft.x 561 ft.=1,568 sq. ft.).  containing 1,568 square feet (1,441 to 1,680). This home requires a 3 Ton heat pump.  Read down the left-hand (blue) column for an ENERGY STAR qualified home.  'Some counties are dividedi into more than one sizing group.  Disclaimer  The values ont the chart arei intended as a guide for equipment selection. This information is nota a substitute for proper evaluation and judg- ment by an equipment specifier. The cooling capacity estimates are based ont typical home configurations and assumed design conditions. Actual sizing requirements may differ from the values ont the chart. The Manufactured Housing Research Alliance and its members, the US Environmental Protection. Agency, the Tennessee' Valley Authority, the National Rural Electric Cooperative. Association, sponsors oft this work, Sizing charts are available for other regions of the U.S. For information on obtaining sizing guidance for other areas, please visit the The Manufactured Housing Research Alliance developed the sizing charts. MHRAis ar non-profit membership organization comprised of firms actively engagedi int the manufactured housing business. Wrightsoft Corporation performed the engineering analysis. The technical basis for the values thata appear on the chart is Right-JrM, an Air Conditioning Contractors of America (ACCA)-endorsed software version of Copyright 0: 20051 Manufactured Housing Research. Alliance Allr rights reserved. No portion of this chart may be reproduced, by any  assume nol liability for errors ine equipment sizing, selection, andi installation. Manufactured Housing Research. Alliance web site at: ntpiwwwmhanomeorg.  ACCAI Manual J, Load Calculation for Residential Winter and Summer Air Conditioning, Seventh Edition.  process or technique, without the express written permission of MHRA.  Packet Pg. 207    Floor Area Upto840 841to  1,121to 1,281to 1,441to 1,681t to 1,961to 2,241to 2,521to 2,761to  (square feet) Sizing Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71  1,120 HUD m HUD 1 1 1 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.51.5 1 1.51.5 1.51.5 1 1 1.51 1.5 1 1 11 1.5 1 1 1.51.5 1 1 1.51.5 1.51.5 1 1 1.5_1.5 1.51.5 1.5 2 11.5 1.5_1.5 1.51.5 1.5 2 1.51.5 1.51.5 11 1.5 1.51.5 1.5 2 1.5_1.5 1.5_1.5 1.5 2 1.5_1.5 1.51.5 1.5 2 1.51.5 1.5 2 1.51 1.5 1.5 2 1.5_1.5 1.5 2 1.5_1.5 1.5 2 1.5_1.5 1.5 2 1.5_1.5 1.5 2 1.5_1.5 1.5 2 1.5_1.5 2 2 1.5_1.5 1.5 2 1.5_1.5 2 2 1.5_1.5 2 2 1.5 2 2 2 1.5 2 2 2 1.5 2 2 2 1.5 2 2 2 1.5 2 22.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 2.52.5 2.52.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 2.52.5 2.5 3 1.5 2 2 2.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 2 2 225 2.52.5 2.5 3 2 - 2 2.52.5 2.5_2.5 2.5 3 1.5 2 2 2.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 2.52.5 2.5 3 1.5 2 2 2.5 2.5 3 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 3 2 2 2.52.5 2.5 3 1.5 2 22 2.5 1.5 2 2 2.5 2.5 3 2 2 22 2.5 2.5 3 2 2 2.52.5 2.5 3 1.5 2 225 1.5 2 22 2.5 2.5 3 1.5 2 22.5 2.5 3 2 2 2.52.5 2.5 3 2 2 2.52.5 2 2 2.52.5 2.5 3 1.5 2 225 2 2 2 3 2 2 2.5 3 2 2 2.5 3 1.5_2.5 2 3 22 2.5 2.5 3 2 2.5 2.5 3 2 : 2.5 2.5 3 2 - 2.5 2.5 3 22.5 3 3 2.5_2.5 3 3 22.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 2.5 3 3 3.5 3.5 4  1,280 HUD 1.5 1.5 1.51.5 1.51.5 1.5_1.5 1.51.5 1.51.5 1.51.5 1.51.5 2 2 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.52.5 2.5 3 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 22.5 22 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 3 22.5 2.5 3 22 2.5 2 3 2 3 2.5 3 2 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 3 3 2.5 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5  1,440 HUD 1.51.5 1.5 1.5 1.51.5 1.5 1.5 1.51.5 1.51.5 1.51.5 1.51.5 1.51.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2.5 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 3 2 3 2 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 2.5 3 3 3 3 3 2.53.5 2.5 3.5 3 3.5 2.53.5 2.5_3.5 2.53.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3.53.5 3 4 3.5 - 4 3.54.5  1,680 1,960 2,240 HUD HUD HUD 2 2 2 2 1.51.5 2 2 2 2 1.51.5 2 2 2 2 21 1.5 2 2 2 2 1.51.5 2 2 2 2 2 1.5 2 2 2 2 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 2 2 2 2 2 2.52.5 2 2 2 2 2.52.5 2 2 2 2 2.5 2.52.5 2 2 2.5_2.5 2.52.5 2 2 2 2.5 2.52.5 2.5 3 2 2 2.52.5 2.52.5 2 2.5 2.52.5 2.5 3 2 2.5 2.52.5 2.5 3 2 2.5 2.5_2.5 2.5 3 2 2.5 2.5_2.5 3 3 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 2.52.5 2.5 3 3 3 2 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 2 2.5 2.52.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 - 3.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 33.5 2.5 3 2.5 3 33.5 2.5 3 3 3 33.5 3.5 4 2.5 3 2.5 3.5 3 4 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 4 2.5 3 33 3.5 3.5 4 33 3.5 3 4 2.5 3 3 3.5 3 4 2.5 3 33 3.5 3 4 2.5 3 33 3.5 3.5 4 2.5 3 33 3.5 3.5 4 2.5 3 2.53.5 3 4 3 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 2.5 3.5 33.5 3 4 2.53.5 33 3.5 3.5 4 2.53.5 33 3.5 3.5 4 3 3.5 33 3.5 3.5 4 3 : 3.5 3.5_3.5 4 4 2.53.5 3 4 34.5 3.54.5 3 3.5 3 4 3.54.5 2.5 3.5 3 4 3.54.5 3.54.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 4 4.5 3 - 3.5 3.5 4 44.5 2.53.5 3 4 34.5 3.5 5 3 3.5 3 4 3.5_4.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 3.54.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 44.5 2.5_3.5 3 4 3.5_4.5 2.53.5 3 4 3.54.5 3.5 5 3 3.5 3 4 3.54.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 4 4.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 4 4.5 3.5_3.5 3.5 4 44.5 2.53.5 3 4 3.54.5 3 3.5 3 4 3.54.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4 4 4.5 3 4 3.5_4.5 4 5 3 4 3  4.5 3.5 5 3 4 3.54.5 4 5 3.5 4 4 4.5 4.5 5 3.5 4 3.5_4.5 4 5 3.5 4 4 4.5 4.5_5.5 3.5 4 44.5 4.5_5.5 4 - 4.5 4.5 5 55.5 3.54.5 45 4.55.5 44 4.5 4.55.5 5 6 4 5 4.55.5 5.5 6  2,520 2,760 HUD HUD 2 2 2 2.5 2.5_2.5 2.5 2 2.52.5 2.5 2 2.52.5 2.52.5 2.52.5 2.5_2.5 2.5_2.5 2.5_2.5 2.5 3 2.52.5 3 3 2.5 3 3 3 2.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 33.5 3 3 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3.5 4 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 4 3 - 3.5 3 4 3 - 3.5 3.5 4 3 - 3.5 3.5 4 3 4 3.5 4 3 4 3.5 4 3 4 3.54.5 3.5_4.5 3.5_4.5 3.5 5 3.5 4 3.54.5 3.5 5 3.5 4 3.54.5 3.5 5 3.5 4 3.54.5 3.5 4 3.5_4.5 3.54.5 3.5_4.5 3.5 : 5 3.54.5 3.54.5 3.54.5 3.54.5 3.54.5 3.5 5 34.5 3.5 5 3.54.5 4 5 3.54.5 3.5 5 3.54.5 3.5 5 3.54.5 4 5 4 4.5 4 5 44.5 4 5 3.5 5 4 - 4.5 4 5 4 5 445 4 5 445 4.5 5 3.5_5 5.5 3.5_5.5 3.5 5 4 5.5 4 5 4 5.5 4 5 4.55.5 3.5 5 3.55.5 4 5.5 4 5 4 5.5 4 5 4 - 5.5 4.5 6 4 5 4.5_5.5 4.5 6 4.5 5 4.55.5 3.5 5 3.5_5.5 4 5 4 5.5 4.5 5 4.55.5 4 5.5 4.5 6 4 5.5 4 6 4 5.5 4.5 6 4.5_5.5 5 6 4.5 5.5 4.5 6 4.5 6 4.56.5 5 6 56.5 5.5 7 5 6 5.5_6.5 5.5 7 4.5 6 56.5 5.56.5 5.5 7 5.5 7 5.5_7.5  2.g HUD 2.52.5 2.52.5 2.52.5 3 3 2.5 3 3 3 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 3 3.5 34 4 3 4 3.5 4 3.5 4 3.5 4 3.5 4 3.5 4.5 3.54.5 3.54.5 4 5 45 4 5 4 5 45 3.55.5 4 5.5 3.5_5.5 4 5.5 45.5 45.5 4.5_5.5 3.5_5.5 45 5.5 45.5 45.5 4.55.5 4 5.5 4 5.5 4.55.5 4 6 4 6 4 6 5 6 4 6 4 6 56 4.56.5 4.56.5 4.5 6.5 5 6.5 5 7 5 7 5 7 68 6 o Packet Pg. 208  2 2.5 2.5_2.5 2.52.5 22.5 2.5_2.5 2.52.5 22.5 2.5_2.5 2.5 3    2.g  27 11 33  13  19  23  27  26  23  Utah  15 Colorado 9  21 17  27  28  57  40  18 10  27 21 21  40  15  49  51  25 15  10 Arizona  15 26  23  26  23  17  39  17  32  71  32 New, Merico  53  45 54  70  28  39 35  62 35  53  25  32 32  Packet Pg. 209    2.g  26  19 15  29 25 23 25 19 26 North Carolina) 35 29 29 29 52 32 South Carolina 48 48 38 36 48 43 55. 31 55 31  35 31 35 39 52 5 50  48 52  52 50 48 55  are  pp 55  46 30 44 41 50 34 46 46 56 - lorida 55 36 50 41  50 41 36  50  36  Packet Pg. 210    2.g  Washington 24  19 27 33 26 19  15  1011 13 13 24 16 17 15 16  11 19  15 11  18  21  24 26 23  11  Montana 15  11  21 29 33  27  15  19  26 5 15  23  33 30 15  15 23 13  21  Wy yom in 19  11  10  Packet Pg. 211    2.g  10 11 M: ine 14  12  Vermont 12 10 14.  14 12 NewlYork  16 15 New Hampshire  12  11  15 14 18 16 46 20 15 18 15 12 16 18 20 16 20 11 Conneetient 18), 1815 13 15- 18 15 15  Massachusetts 11 Rhode1 1sland 11 22 16 25  16 18  15 15/13 14 15 14 16  9 Pennsytyania 13 18  22 23  205 23 New. Jersey 20 Delaware 23  20  11/16 23 Maryland- 25, 22 26 323 2627 25 27525 Vipginia 28 26 29  16 20 18: 23 20 West,Virginia 93 11  22  22  27 27  19  Packet Pg. 212    2.g  20  24  18  20 10  North Dakota  23  21  20 15 16 Minnesota  South Dakota 23  30  25  26 23 25  20  15 18 20 Lowa  31  27  23  27  Nebraska  24  26  23 35 36 31 25 25 27 35 35 39  25 26  23 225 25  26 31  29 28 39 35  Missouri 35  45 Kansas  31 49 55  39 31 26  49  28  35 39  53  35  29  Packet Pg. 213    2.g  23  35  57 42 Oklahoma 51 64 57 69 61 63  55  49 31 31, 57  35 Arkansas 39  52  42 66 63 65  66 Texas  61  62 55  Louisiana 36 50 55  44 56.  35  65/  61  36  66 69 61 65  Packet Pg. 214    2.g  12  10  11  Wisconsin Tyla 15 18  14'  15 14  14 15 16  Michigan 16  22 20  12E  18  18 23 20 20 22 22 2522 23  22 20 18 22  15 18  22 20 18 15 16 25 120 Camt ridge 26. 22- 23, 225 20 Ohio 26  23  26  122 25  26.  31  Illinois  Indiana 26  26  23  26, 22 19  27 35 31 31 35  35  28 Kentucky  28  26,  Packet Pg. 215    2.g  33  25  62  27  15  24  33  59  Nevada  23  45  24  9  15  59 54  53  68  67  tsso  California  70  Packet Pg. 216    2.g  APPENDIXC  Packet Pg. 217    2.g  HURRICANE SHUTTER DESIGNS  One oft the best ways to] protect al home from damage in windstorms ist toi install shutters over all large windows and glass doors. Shutters protect doors and windows from windborne objects. They also prevent damage caused by sudden  pressure changes when av window or doori is broken.  HIGH WIND ZONES OF THE UNITED STATES  100  110 120  90  AGRICUTURL 00109  130 140  NOMINAL DESIGN THREE SECOND GUSTS miles per hour J90 100 110 120 130 140 150  130 140 150  140  140  150  90 100 130 110 120  Source: 2003 International Residential Code  APA THEE ENGINEERED. WOOD ASSOCIATION  Packet Pg. 218    2.g 2  Hurricane Shutter Designs  The following designs are presented as two basic alternatives: The firsti is toj present the minimum shutters that are permitted by the codes when such shutters are required. The requirements of the 2003 Interational Residential Code (IRC) and the 2001 Florida Building Code (FBC) are presented. They permit the use of minimum 7/16" Rated Sheathing as shutters to protect against the impact of windbome debris. Check with local building departments for verification or The second approach provides some design details for stronger and stiffer shutters than provided for by the code- minimum designs. It should be noted that these designs were developed prior to the adoption of specific standards for shutter designs by any U.S. codes. The supports detailed for these shutters meet code requirements when mounted according to the specifications in Table R301.2.1.2. The mounting brackets for the masonry block structures have been tested for design wind loads but have not been impact or cyclic tested because they were developed as design guides before  clarification of requirements.  these standards were developed.  1.Code-Minimum; Shutter Design:  The 2003 International Residential Code (IRC), Section R301.2.1.2, provides that "windows in buildings located in windbome debris regions shall have glazed openings protected from windbome debris or the building shall be designed asap partially enclosed building in accordance with the International Building Code. Glazed opening protection for windbome debris shall meet ther requirements oft the Large Missile Test of ASTMI E 1996 and of ASTMI E1 18861 referenced therein. Exception: Wood structural panels with a minimum thickness of 7/16 inch (11.1 mm) and a maximum span of 8 feet (2438 mm) shall bej permitted for opening protection in one- and two-story buildings. Panels shall be precut to cover the glazed openings with attachment hardware provided. Attachments shall be provide in accordance with Table R301.2.1.2 or shall be designed tol resist the components and cladding loads determined in accordance with the provisions  oft the International: Building Code."  TABLE R301.2.1.2  WINDBORNE DEBRIS PROCTECTION FASTENING SCHEDULE FOR WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELSA,D,  Fastener Spacing 4ft<F Panel Span <6ft 12" 16"  Panel Span <4 4ft 16" 16"  6ft < Panel Span s8ft 9" 12"  Fastener Type 2-1/2" #6 Wood Screws 2-1/2" #8 Wood Screws  a. Thist table is based on 130 mph wind speeds and a 33-footr mean roof height. b. Fasteners shall bei installed ato opposing ends oft the wood structural panel.  C. Where screws are attached tor masonry or masonry/stucco, theys shall be attached utilizing vibration-resistant anchors havingo a minimum  ultimate withdrawal capacity of 490p pounds.  AGRICULTU  2fz2  Form No. T450E- O 2004 APA The Engineered Wood Association - www.apawood.org  Packet Pg. 219    2.g 3  Hurricane Shutter Designs  Section R202 defines a Windbome Debris Region as any "areas within hurricane-prone regions within one mile of the coastal mean high waterl line where the basic wind speedi is 1101 mph or greater; or where the basic wind speedi is equal  toor greater than 1201 mph; or Hawaii." (Seer map)  Alternatively, Section 1606.1.4oft the 2001 Florida Building Code:  "In windbome debris regions, exterior glazing that receives positive pressure in the lower 60 feeti inl buildings shall be assumed tol be openings unless such glazing isi impact resistant or protected with ani impact resistant covering meeting the requirements of SSTD 12, ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996, or Miami-Dade PA 201, 202 and 203 referenced therein as 1.Glazed openings located within 301 feet ofg grade shall meet thej provisions of the Small Missile Tèst. 2. Glazed openings located more than 30 feet above grade shall meet thej provision oft the Small Missile Tèst. Exception: Wood structural panels with a minimum thickness of 7/16 inch and maximum panel span of8f feet shall be permitted for opening protection in one- and two-story buildings. Panels shall be precut to cover the glazed openings with attachment hardware provided. Attachment shall be designed to resist the components and cladding loads deter- mined in accordance with Table 1606.2B. Attachment in accordance with Table 1606.1.4 is permitted for buildings with  follows:  mean roof height of 33 feet orl less where wind speeds do not exceed 1301 mph."  TABLE 1606.1.4  WINDBORNE DEBRIS PROTECTION FASTENING SCHEDULE FOR WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS  Fastener Spacing (in.)a,b 2ft< Panel Span <4ft 16 16 6  Panel Span <2ft 16 16 12  4ft< Panel Span < 6ft 12 16 4  6ft< Panel Span <8 8ft 9 12 3  Fastener Type 2-1/2 #6 Wood Screwc 2-1/2 #8 Wood Screwc Double-Headed Nailsd withdrawal capacity of 4901 Ib.  a. Thist table is based on ar maximumy wind speed of 130r mph andr mean roof height of 33 feet orl less. b.F Fasteners shall bei installed ato opposing ends oft the wood structural panel. d. Nails shall be 10do common or 12d box double-headed nails.  C. Where screws are attached tor masonry or masonry/stucco, they shall be attached using vibration-resistant anchors havingo a minimum  Section 1606.1.5 defines a Windbome Debris Region as:  1.Area within one mile of the coastal mean high water line where thel basic wind speed is 1101 mph or greater. 2. Areas where thel basic wind speed is 120 mph or greater except from the eastern border ofl Franklin Count to the Florida-Alabama line where the regioni includes area only within 1 mile oft the coast., Seemap)  (See map)  AGRICUITURE  122414  Form No. T450E- O 2004 APA The Engineered Wood Association - www.apawood.org  Packet Pg. 220    2.g 4  Hurricane Shutter Designs  2. Stronger, Stiffer Designs  The following design pages describe how to construct stronger, stiffer shutters for attachment to wood and masonry walls. The masonry attachments were designed prior to the adoption ofs specific test standards for shutter designs by U.S. codes. The shutters have been tested to resist the design wind loads andi impacts but the attachments to masonry have not beeni impact or cyclic-load tested. The masonry attachment details are therefore supplied as guides in developing individual Most building codes include provisions for storm shutters. Earlier code had provisions for a deflection of less than thes shutter span (ni inches) divided by 30 (fori instance, a 40-inch span should not bend more than 40/30 = 1.33i inches when the wind blows). They also should bend less than 2i inches maximum and should remain atl least onei inch away from The easiest designs are those that simply cover the opening with a wood structural panel. In wood-frame construc- tion, panels can be nailed over the openings when al hurricane approaches. Buildings made with concrete blocks, however, In some cases, stiffeners may be necessary to limit deflection of the shutter against the glass. Stiffeners function best Tables land 2 and] Figure 1 on the following page apply to most oft the designs, and are referenced accordingly. These APA hurricane shutter designs are based on pressures associated with a. 3-second gust wind speed of 1201 mph. Building codes are currently being reviewed for possible changes. Before constructing shutters, therefore, iti isi important to check with) your local Note: The shutter designs shown! herein will provides significant protection from hurricane-force winds. This publication contains recommendations to serve asag guide only. It does noti include: allp possible shutter, anchor andf fastenings systems, and thei installer must adjust all dimensions to compensate forp particular installations and! hardware used. Theses shutter designs by nor means represent allp possible workable designs and can always be upgraded top provide eveng greater margins ofs safety and protection. Alls shutter designs! herein arei intended tob bet temporary, and mounted and removed from While the design wind pressures used arel based on ASCE 7-95, thel building owner/installer: musts still carefully evaluate eachs system: and then, ifneces-  designs.  the window when under full wind force. require advance preparation.  ift the 2x 4s are on the outside of thes shutter and oriented with the narrow edge against the shutter.  building department ford an update on current code requirements.  outside thel building. Allo designs arel based on wind pressure capacities only. sary, make any modifications consistent with good design andl building practices.  DESIGN 1  SHUTTERS FOR WOOD-FRAME BUILDINGS  DESIGN 2 SHUTTERS FOR MASONRY BLOCK STRUCTURES  BARREL BOLT LATCH SUPPORTS  DESIGN 3  SHUTTERS FOR MASONRY BLOCK STRUCTURES STEEL OR ALUMINUM ANGLE AND SCREW SUPPORTS  DESIGN 4 SHUTTERS FOR MASONRY BLOCK STRUCTURES  SHUTTERS ATTACHED TO OUTSIDE WALL WITH PERMANENTLY, SHUTTERS FOR MASONRY BLOCK STRUCTUL  MOUNTED BRACKETS  DESIGN 5  FOR OPENINGS WIDER THAN 8 FEET  AGRICULTUREL  Form No. T450E- O 2004 APA- The Engineered Wood Association  apawood.org Packet Pg. 221    2.g 5  Hurricane Shutter Designs  TABLE1 APA Panel Span Rating 32/16 40/20 48/24 48oc  MAXIMUM SPAN WITHOUT STIFFENERS  Approximate Deflection (in.) at 120 mph Design Wind Speed at 15-ft. Height 0.5 0.5 0.9 1.5  Approximate Weight (Ib./Ft.2) 1.5 2 2.4 3.6  Maximum Shutter Span 30 36 48 72  TABLE2 APA Panel Span Rating 32/16 40/20 48/24 480 OC  ESTIMATED DEFLECTION AT 120 MPHI DESIGN WIND SPEED AT 15-FT. HEIGHT  FOR SHUTTERS WITH 2X4 4s AT 16 INCHES o.c.  Approximate Weight (lIb./f.2) 2.5 2.9 3.4 4.6  Shutter Span (in.) 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.8 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.6 1.0 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.9  FIGURE 1  SHUTTER STIFFENER ATTACHMENT - IF REQUIRED  APA Structural Panel  #22x4 Cutifdesired  Strength axis  3/16"x3"L Lag screws with fender washers  12d Nails 6" 0.c.  AGRICUITURE  I2z4  9  Form No. T450E- O 2004 APA The Engineered Wood Association - www.apawood.org  Packet Pg. 222    2.g 6  Hurricane Shutter Designs  DESIGN 1  SHUTTERS FOR WOOD-FRAME BUILDINGS  This design from APA - The Engineered Wood Association describes how to construct structural panel shutters for  attachment to wood-frame buildings. Steps to Constructing Shutters ass shown inl Figures 1 and IA. oft the panel as shown inl Figures 1 and 1A. and thes shutters must hit the framing tol bei fully effective.  1. Review Tables 1 and 2 in the Design Considerations section to determine ifs stiffeners are needed.. Attach stiffener 2. Cut APA wood structural panels with adequate edge overlap to receive nails. Orient long panel axis (strength axis) 3. Use al long! brad or finishing nail tol locate the framing behind the wood siding. The nails used to attach thes shims 4. Nail shims to the framing with 12d nails. Use 16d nails for shims over 3/4 inch thick. For spans up to 5 feet, space the nails 6i inches O.C. at each shim. For spans over 51 feet, space nails 41 inches 0.C. at each shim. (Figures 5. Attach the shutters with double-headed nails for ease of later removal. (Figures 1B and 1C) Use 12d nails for shutters up to 3/4 inch thick and 16d nails for shutters over. 3/4 inch thick. For spans up to 5 feet, space the nails 6i inches O.C. at each end oft the shutter panel. Fors spans over 51 feet, space nails 4i inches O.C. at each end of the shutter panel. Nailing thej panel on: all four sides, instead ofj just thet twO ends, will further limit deflection and 6. Any permanently installed hardware, shims or fastening devices must be installed using standard/acceptable 7. After fabrication eachs shutter should be marked for orientation and location to simplify installation. 8. Ifshims are tol bel lefti inj place, use galvanizedi nails and finishl like siding or exterior trim.  1Ba and IC)  maximize strength.  methods of waterproofing. All abandoned holes must be sealed.  AGRICULTURE  lzf22  Form No. T450E- O 2004 APA The Engineered Wood Association - www.apawood.org  Packet Pg. 223    2.g 7  Hurricane Shutter Designs  FIGURE 1A  SHUTTER ATTACHMENT - VIEW FROM OUTSIDE  APA Structural Panel #22x4s( (ifr needed) Strength axis  Cutifd desired  AGRICUTURE 00 1092  12d Double-headed nails 6'0.c. (nails at 4"c o.c. ifs shutteri is over 5'1 long)  FIGURE 1B Siding  SHUTTER ATTACHMENT- - TOP 12d Double-headed nails at 6" 0.C. (nails at 4"o.c. ifs shutteri is over 5'1 long) Shim  12d Nails Header Finishy wall  Flashing and caulk Shutter  Interior casing  Glass  Form No. T450E- O 2004 APA The Engineered Wood Association - www.opowood.org  Packet Pg. 224    2.g 8  Hurricane Shutter Designs  FIGURE 1C  SHUTTER ATTACHMENT- - BOTTOM  Finishs sill Interior casing Caulk Finishy wall 12d Nails  Shutter Sill  12d Double-headed nails at6 6" O.C.. (nails at 4"o.c. ifshutteri is over 5'1 long) Shim Siding  AGRICULTURE  lzf22  Form No. T450E- O 2004 APA The Engineered Wood Association - www.apawood.org  Packet Pg. 225    2.g  Alternate Wind Protection for Windows and Doors  Top plate  Locate plywood: seams over center of 2x4 stiffener. Installp plywood storm cover with face grain placed horizontal. 4B Typicalstiffener. installation detail. Typicalscrew A installation. Window opening width. Window. jamb/wall framing behind cover. Bottom plate  Plywood: storm cover See table below for plywood specifications. For openings wider than 80"- locates storm cover butt joint within 30" of verticals studs andi install H clips between lumber. stiffeners as shown. Fasten plywood storm cover- to door vertical framing with 1-*10x2 1/2" penet screw each side ofs stiffener and 8'0.C (Max.) 24SYP*2stffeners within 6'oft top and bottom of windows and 160.C. (Max.)  Wind Protection for Windows  AGRICUITURE  lafiy  OF  Top plate  Install plywood storm cover with face grain placed horizontal. 4B Typical stiffener installation detail below. Typical screw TA installation.  For openings wider than 80" locate storm cover butt joint within 30'd of vertical studs and install H clips between lumber: stiffeners as shown. Plywoods storm cover See table below for plywood specifications. Fasten plywood storm cover to door vertical framing with 1-10x2. 1/2 penet screw each side of stiffener and 80.C (Max.) 24SYP-2stiffeners within 6'of top and bottom of windows and 16'0.C. Max.)  Door Opening Width. Locate plywood seams over center of 2x4: stiffeners. Door jamb/wall framing behind storm cover.  Wind Protection for Doors  Packet Pg. 226    Alternate' Wind Protection for Windows and Doors  2.g  *10x21 1/2A penet wood screw with. 11 1/2'dia. steel washer. Plywood storm cover (min.) 11/2- min. Window/door- Window/door- frame Note:  Plywood: storm cover. must extend extend min. 34 beyond edge of window/door frame as shown.  2x4 stiffener entire width ofs storm cover. 2". Tp  Steel washer Metal tube/cylinder or plywood spacer. Exterior: siding. Plywood Rubber washer. storm cover. Stud or lumber blocking *10x3screw 60C  3/8x3 1/2 lag with 11/2'dia. washer ate each  (min. 2x2spf) Jamb/wall: stud.  (typ. entire length ofstiffener.  SECTIONB-B end of stiffener.  SECTIONA-A  Installer must locate woods screws. 3/4"+/-1 from edge of window/door frame andi must verify that woods screw placement properly engages lumber framing.  Wind Protection Details  AGRICUTURL  244  PLYWOOD STORM COVER SPECIFICATIONS  Max. opening width Up to 48" 49"to 84" 85"to 120"  Minimum thickness 1/2" 5/8" 3/4"  Span index 24/0 32/16 48/24  Wind Protection Exterior Sheathing  Notes:  1. All decorative shutters must be removed prior to installing protective covers. 2. When openings exceed 84" replace 2"x4" stiffeners with 2"x6" SPF #2 stiffeners.  3. After use, recommend that all sheathing be retained for possible reuse. Caulk any nail holes in 4. On bay windows, 3" extension beyond edge of window is not applicable, storm covering is tol be butted up at angled areas ofl bays. Covering may have a maximum gap of 1/4" between pieces.  the siding toj prevent moisture from penetrating the exterior wall.  Packet Pg. 227    2.g  APPENDIXD  Packet Pg. 228    2.g O    451938    Packet Pg. 229    2.g  ENEER z0  VV KSI938  Packet Pg. 230    GINEER  2.g  SI938 *  B    Packet Pg. 231    2.g  CANEER 2Z0  S1938 *  Packet Pg. 232    2.g  )  ) - @  Packet Pg. 233    GINEER  2.g  KSl934  005  Packet Pg. 234    NOTE: THIS RIDGEBEAM CONNECTION SUPPORT IS IN ADDITION TO NORMAL CONNECTION FOR FLAT CEILINGS ONLY  2.g  RIDGEBEAM A  A  #12x4"N MIN. WOODS SCREWS THROUGHE BOTTOM OFF RIDGEBEAM @ 16" O.C. (ALTERNATE: SIDES)  MULTI-UNIT CONNECTION  A  SCALE: 1"-1-0"  RIDGEBEAM LAGGING AT TOP AND BOTTOM  TRUSS (TYP.)-  RIDGEBEAM  WEF RECOMMEND ONA ALLFLAT CEILING HOMES THAT YOULAGAT THE TOP! AND1 THEE BOTTOM OF THE RIDGEBEAM. THIS REDUCES MARRIAGEI LINE CEILING CRACKS. BOTTOM! LAGS MAY BEI INSTALLEDI FROM THEI INTERIOR THROUGH" THE CEILING BOARD. A  A 3"UPPERL LAGBOLTS  A MIN.L LOWERI LAGE BOLTS  OFEDERAL MANUFACTURED A HOUSING CONSTRUCTION &SAFETYS STANDARDS 04 7/8/2016  MARRIAGEI LINE  CEILING SHEETROCK  MARRIAGE LINE CONNECTION  R  B) SCALE: 1-1/2"=1-0"  THIRDF PARTYS SEAL 11/24/08  TITLE:  RIDGEBEAM CONNECTION DETAIL Clayton Home Ofice  NOTE: RIDGEBEAM: SECURED TO1 TRUSS INF FACILITYF PRIORI TO DRAWN BY: SHIPPING. FASTENINGI REQUIREMENTSI PER OTHER DETAILS. REVIEWEDI BY: JGM  BMB  DATE:  PH:8 OClayton Road, Maryvlle, TN37804  LAST REVISED: 7/8/2016 SHEET: Packet Pg. 235  CHECKED! BY: RADCO CALCREF:    2.g  0,9,0,0,0    2.g  APPENDIXE  Packet Pg. 237    2.g  EER  HV FISI93N *  0OT Esno XYW  WWIXVW 0-614 HIGIM JINN  HWIXVW 0-.514 HIGIM JINI  Packet Pg. 238    2.g  GINEER E7ZO  yy 1SI938  0OTH Esno XVW ml  K  HHIXVW 0-514 HIGIM JINI  HHIXVW 0-.514 HIOIM JINN  Packet Pg. 239    2.g    UVW 491938 *  NVla /m. AaVA AVW HOOd O HIaIm HIXVW, 0-514  WIXVW 0-,9144 WHIXVW 0-614  HiaIm. LINN  HiaIm. INN  XVW, 84, dALtV  HWIXVW, 0-,9149 HHIXVW 0-91 4  Packet Pg. 240  HiaIm. JINN  HiaIm. JINN  XVW Dam GI4    2.g  NEER 720  TUVW 4S1938  a  TTVMANE  T0OwaBd AaVA AV DaOd O HIaIm Packet HHIXVW  NVTd /m. AaVA AYW HOaOd O HIaIm HHIXVW 0-5I4  Pg. 241    2.g  INEER * 120  VW Si934  (9'ON: FLON EES) H5IH L9 ANV 9E NEEMIEE  9 GNV S SELON 5) HOIH -98 NVHI SS37  Packet Pg. 242    2.g    Vw 4s1934 *  (9" 'ON: FLON IES) H5IH L9 ANV 9E NEEMEE a  9 ANV $ SEION EES) H5IH 9E NVHI 9937  Packet Pg. 243    2.g  EINEER ZO  SV SI938  -0z  L  BWOH ABIN3 39V8V9  NI.0-.02  Packet Pg. 244    2.g  GINEER * 720  UVW SI938  IINNI NIVW SBISVA HI9NET  39V8VS. 17n8-31IS SBISVA HI9NET  Packet Pg. 245    2.g  6 3  sg  8848  8  ANGINEER 7ZO  Packet Pg. 246    2.g  INEER 20  S  VW 451934  3 C  Packet Pg. 247    2.g  'GOLDEN WEST HOMES Addendum to Installation Manual Foundation Pier Blocking Requirements  No, perimeter blocking is required for 20 psf roof live loads. Alternatively, for 16 foot double wide units, only, no perimeter blocking is required for 30 psf max roof Refer to table below for required pier capacities and footing areas. Plfl load-(30+10)> X 4 +50 plf + (40+5+3.5+4): x4=4 420 plf.  live loads.  Soil Bearing Capacity 1000 psf 1000 psf 1000 psf  Pier spacing (fto.c.) 4 6 8  Required footing area (in*2)  242 363 484  Required Footing Area = (420 * Pier spacing/1000)-144  Refer to Installation Manual for all other setup requirements unless otherwise noted.  PROFESSION OSEN NE. C042077 Exp. 3-31-2014 CIVIL EOFCALIEFO  009.102  gydpialgoldweslsetupadenoumsre6WTIFoundation  Packet Pg. 248    2.g  Golden West  Date: May 4, 2006  To: John Brean, General Manager Golden West Homes Perris, CA From: Mark Ezzo, P.E. VP of] Engineering CMH Manufacturing, Inc. (865)380-3000 ext. 5382  Re: Roof Close-off, Ridge Beam Connections for 3/12  The Golden West Homes Installation Manual on page 48 provides instructions for connecting the ridge beams together for a 3/12 roof using 1/2" diameter bolts or 3/8"x5 5" This letter is to verify that when using 3/8" X 5" lag screws to connect the ridge beams together it is not necessary to remove the factory-installed roof sheathing prior to installing the lag screws. It is acceptable for the setup contractor to install the lags Please note that this application only applies to 3/12: roofs where the ridge beams are up tight against the peak oft the roof. On 4/12 and higher roofs, where the ridge beams are down below the peak, it is necessary to: remove the roof sheathing in order to gain access  lag screws.  through the roof sheathing.  for connecting the ridge beams together. Please let me know. ifthere are any questions.  Thank you,  Cc: Greg Bue, Engineering Manager Miguel Barcenas, QA Manager  Or  NO. C042077 Exp. 3-31-2014 CIVIL EOFCALIFOF GILES  Clayion  sbe  Aanss 9 pseagce  Buil: fers  Maslebe  SEhomes  Snidens GRY  Mailling Address: Box 9780 Maryville, Tennessee 37802 Street Address: 5000 Clayton Road Maryville, Tennessee 37804  Phone 865.380.3000 * FAX865.380.3781 or 865.380.3732  Packet Pg. 249    2.g  APPROVED BY FEDERAL MANUFACTURED HOME NANC CONSTRUCTION. AND SAFETYSTANDARD:  MHI Manufachuredh Housing Instinute  Hilousing Alert  HUD Suspends Enforcement of Ground Anchor and Manufactured Pier On Monday, January 12, HUD informed MHI it will be suspending national enforcement of the galvanization requirements for anchor systems and manufactured piers that would have become effective February 2, under the new Model Manufactured Home Installation Standards (MMHIS), until the Manufactured Housing Consensus Committee HUD is taking this action in response to an appeal made by MHI based on the lack ofa a demonstrated need for such a requirement to apply to the installation of all manufactured housing nationwide. MHI has maintained that weatherization requirements for anchor and pier systems should be based on local and regional conditions rather than a one size fits all approach as currently contained in the MMHIS. MHI has therefore been in discussions with HUD, requesting states be allowed to determine what, if any, minimum galvanization requirements are warranted in their own jurisdictions until the MHCC is able to recommend more practical standards that The following is the e-mail sent yesterday from Bill Matchneer, Associate Deputy Assistant Secretary, Office of Regulatory Affairs and Manufactured Housing, to SAA's 'As requested by MHI, HUD has decided to temporarily suspend national enforcement of the weatherization and corrosion protection requirements for piers and anchor systems found in CFR 3285.308 and 402 due to take effect on February 2, 2009. As requested by the industry in June 2008, these requirements are currently under review by a workgroup of the Manufactured Housing Consensus Committee (MHCC). HUD will reconsider its decision to suspend enforcement of these weatherization and corrosion protection requirements once the MHCC has voted on any recommendations received During rulemaking, HUD was not presented with a known history of actual failures of ground anchors or piers due to corrosion. Therefore, HUD is comfortable taking this  Galvanization Requirements  reviews the matter further.  account for regional climatic and soil differences.  and Primary Inspection Agencies (PIA).  from the current review process.  SU-ADD-10.0  Packet Pg. 250    2.g  step to help the industry cope with a period of severe economic distress. HUD reminds all concerned, however, that these weatherization and corrosion protection issues should have been more fully addressed by the affected parties during the rulemaking While HUD has decided to temporarily suspend national enforcement of the weatherization and corrosion protection requirements in CFR 3285.308 and 402, the states are free to make their own decisions with regard to galvanization or other weatherization and corrosion protection requirements for pier and anchor systems. Primary Inspection Agencies are asked to advise the individual manufacturers they Ify you have any questions, please contact Jeff Inks at inks@mfghome.org.  process.  supervise of this decision.'  APPROVEDE BY NIAINC FEDERAL MANUFACTUREDI HOME CONSTRUCTIONI AND SAFETY STANDARDS  5/29/2020  SU-ADD-10.1  Packet Pg. 251    3  AGENDA REPORT  B  ORNIA:  TO: FROM:  Honorable Members of the Planning Commission Beth Lindauer, Community Development Director  SUBJECT: Design Review of an Expansion Project of U-Haul 1. Conduct a Public Hearing and consider all testimonies.  RECOMMENDED COUNCIL ACTION:  2. Review and adopt Resolution 06-2024 recommending the City Council approve the design review and elevations of a new 20,000 sqft warehouse facility located at 2950  Main Street. SUMMARY  Al Design Review of the site plan is in process for the U-Haul Moving and Storage Warehouse facility located at 2950 Main Street. U-Haul Co of California is requesting an expansion ofi its existing facility by adding a 20,000-sf, single-story building strictly used  for U-Box storage. DISCUSSION  As part of the Planned Development Use Permit, the Planning Commission, City Council, and the Public shall consider and provide feedback on the designs and elevations of new development to ensure the project's design complements and is The subject project site is located north of the existing facility within the same parcel (APN: 027-231-001) and has street frontages along Main Street. The facility will be a single-story warehouse with employee access only and will store approximately 1,000 U-Box storage containers. The U-boxes are 5'x7'x8' in size, and the facility is projected to allow a stacking system of the U-Boxes approximately 4 boxes high. The interior configuration is subject to change, is not part of this consideration, and is provided as  harmonious with existing and proposed land uses in the vicinity.  general information only. STAFF COMMENTSIANALYSIS  The Technical Advisory Committee (TAC) performed a Design Review at the applicant's request and advised the Planning Commission to consider and recommend to the City Council that the Project Design be approved with conditions outlined in Resolution 06- 2024. TAC has provided additional conditions for this project that will apply to the  amendment of the Use Permit.  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*  Packet Pg. 252    3  FISCAL IMPACT ATTACHMENTS: A. Preliminary Elevation B. Project Map C. DR-2024-06 - Site Plan  There is no anticipated fiscal impact on the City's general funds.  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*  Packet Pg. 253    3.a  T  - EED  ai o SASMASSOCIATES INC. 2727 N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  UHAUL Preliminary Proposal RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET01  02024A ALL RIGHTS Packet Pg. 254    3.a  ARCHITECTURAL PANELING PROFILE, PROVIDES ARTICULATION, DEPTH AND TEXTURE TO THE BUILDING  IMP EXCEEDS SUSTAINABLE LEED STANDARDS BY PROVIDING SUPERIOR R.VALUEINSULATION FOR GREATER THERMAL EFFICIENCY  ARTISTIC USE OF MATERIALS CREATES AN ARCHITECTURAL INTEREST AT THE SKYLINE  ARCHITECTURAL FENESTRATION: TOENHANCE RETAIL UNIFORMITY INTHEAREA  ai e SABMASOCIATES INC. 2727N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  UHAUL Southwest Rendering RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET02  02024A ALL RIGHTS Packet Pg. 255    3.a  IMP EXCEEDS SUSTAINABLE LEED STANDARDS BY PROVIDING SUPERIOR R-VALUE INSULATION FOR GREATER THERMAL EFFICIENCY  ARCHITECTURAL PANELING PROFILE, PROVIDES ARTICULATION, DEPTH AND TEXTURE TO THE BUILDING  CHANGE INI MATERIAL COLORS TOF PROVIDE VISUAL SEPARATION TO THE ELEVATION  -  ARCHITECTURAL FENESTRATION TOENHANCE RETALUNFORMITY INT THEAREA  ai o SABMASSOCIATES INC. 2727 N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  UHAUL Northeast Rendering RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET03  02024A ALL RIGHTS Packet Pg. 256    3.a    OPOSED  LOWSIDE  EAST ELEVATION -E BLDG.J Scale: 1"=20'  FF.E.  PAF HIGHSIDE  PARAPET 42- 6" TOPOFROOF LOWSIDE  PROPOSED  1STFLOOR 4 FFE.  SOUTH ELEVATION - BLDG.J Scale: 1"=20'  GENERAL NOTES: D1-T THEF PROPOSEDI IMP USES FULL- WIDTHPANELS. DO NOT CUT IMPI DUE TO PAINT VARIATIONS. CONTACT THED DESIGNER AT A&MA ASSOCIATES TOFINDA SOLUTION. P:6 602.6 .623.6841 D2- THE PROPOSEDPROJECT CONSISTSOF 42" WIDEIMP. DEVATINGFROM: THIS SIZE PANEL WILL ALTER THEL LYRICAL FINDESIGN. PLEASE CONTACT THE DESIGNER AT A&M ASSOCIATES SO THE PLAND DRAWINGS CANE BEU UPDATED. P:602.623.6841 ARCHITECTURAL FINS THAT WERE PROVIDING AN ARTICULATINGI DESIGN FEATURE TOTHEE BUILDING WERE DENIEDFROMF PREVIOUS PROPOSAL.  MATERIALS 142WMETL SPAN SANTAFES STUCOPMECSSEDVERTONL IMP 2 36'WMETL-S SPAN 7,2HORIZONTALI IMP 3 HORIZONTAL LAPSIDING METAL 74.5'HTRIM1 TYP. 9 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS 1112'HT TRIMI TYP. UHAUL Colors & Materials RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET04  COLOR CHART  POLARWHITE (MPCUSTOMCOLOR 4 2WGALVANIZED TRIMONISIDESOF WALNUTF PANELS SANDSTONE MPCUSTOMCOLOR 5 10.25'HFLATA METAL TRIMT TYP. SW7 7011 NATURAL CHOICE 6 3'HFLAT TRIMTYP SIERRA SUNSET DESERT JEWEL (SW6767A AQUARIUM 8 9"Hx3'DA ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS SWEGGSHELL BLACK WALNUT FAUXWOODGRAN FINISH) 10 SCUPPERS GALVANIZED TRIM  ai o SARMASSOCIATES, INC. 2727 N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  02024A ALLI RIGHTS Packet Pg. 257    :  t  PARAPET LOWSIDE FFE. FLOOR  WEST ELEVATION- BLDG.J Scale: 1"=20'  PAR 42' ROOF LOWSIDE  FFE. FLOOR NORTH ELEVATION BLDG.J Scale: 1"=20'  GENERAL NOTES: D1-THE PROPOSEDI IMPU USES FULL-WIDTHPANELS. DOI NOT CUT IMP DUE TOPAINT VARIATIONS. CONTACT THE DESIGNER AT A&MA ASSOCIATES TOFINDA SOLUTION. P:6 602. .623.6841 D2- -THE PROPOSEDPROUECT CONSISTS OF 42" WIDEI IMP. DEVIATING FROM THIS SIZE PANEL WILL ALTER THEI LYRICAL ASSOCIATES FINDESIGN. PLEASEC SOT THEPLAND CONTACT DRAWINGS THE DESIGNER CANBE AT UPDATED. A&M P:602.623.6841 ARCHITECTURAL FINS THAT WERE PROVIDING AN ATOALATNGDESGNFEANUR: TOTHEE BUILDING WERE DENEDFROMPREVOUSI PROPOSAL.  MATERIALS SPAN 142WMETL SANTAFE STUCCOEMBOSSEDV 2 36'WMETL-S SPAN 7,2HORIZONTALI IMP 3 HORIZONTAL LAPSIDING 74.5'HTRIM1 TYP. 9 ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS 1112'HT TRIMI TYP. UHAUL Colors & Materials RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET05  COLOR CHART  POLARWHITE (MPCUSTOMCOLOR 4 2WGALVANIZED TRIMONISIDESOF WALNUTF PANELS SANDSTONE MPCUSTOMCOLOR 5 10.25'HFLATA METAL TRIMT TYP. SW7 7011 NATURAL CHOICE 6 3'HFLAT METAL TRIMTYP SIERRA SUNSET DESERT JEWEL (SW6767A AQUARIUM 8 9"Hx3'DA ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS SWEGGSHELL BLACK WALNUT FAUXWOODGRAN FINISH) 10 SCUPPERS GALVANIZED TRIM  ai o SARMASSOCIATES, 2727 N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  INC.  02024A ALL RIGHTSRESERVED 2024-08-23  PacketPg.25    3.a  Metl-Span CF 7.2 (or Equivalent IMP)  Metl-Span Santa Fe (or Equivalent IMP) The Metl-Span CF Santa Fep panel hasaflat exterior SYSTEM profile witho heavy, embossed stuccot texture that mimics thel look ofamasonry stucco finish butwith theo addedy valuec ofani insulatedn metal panel. The profilei isflush witht the warmness ofano old-world finish, providinga visually pleasing building. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS WIDTH LENGTH EXTERIORF PROFILE EXTERIOR FACE INTERIOR PROFILE FACE  The CF72Insul-Rib insulatedn metal panel combines atraditional 72ribp panely witho ani insulated core. With abold, ribbed pattern, thisp panel createso aunique building profile thats stands out, idealf for any commercial orindustrial application. The7 72Insul-R Rib panel can beinstalled bothv vertically andh horizontally, allowing architects flexibility witho design. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS LENGTH  OOVE PANEL  PANEL PROFILE CORE JOINT REVEAL U-FACTORS AND R-VALUES"*  INTERIOR FACE CORE JOINT  Stucco Embossed IMP EXAMPLE  FACE  METL SPAN  YEAN  Parapet Architectural Details  4.5"H TRIM TYP. ARCHITECTAL DETAIL HORIZONTAL UNISTRUT SYSTEM 10.25"HFLAT METAL TRIMT TYP. 3"HFLAT METAL TRIMTYP.  Horizontal Lap Siding Embossed Walnut EXAMPLE  ai e SA8MASSOCIATES, INC. 2727 N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  UHAUL MaterialE Board RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET06  02024ALL RIGHTSRESERVED 2024-08-23  Packet Pg. 25    3.a  Face Detail n.t.s. 'Background" Color: Sprays secondsurface L-403V WhiteLacryl,bys Spraylat. Translucent White MaterialeySperifications- -SignFace Materia G.E. Lexan" ScIO0dearSoèarGide) Typ.Trade: .150"  yp 3-0" typ  /2) "Letter" Color: Sprays seconds surface L-480E Blackl Lacrylbys Spraylat. Black  3) "Orange Bar" Color: Sprays secondsurface L422F Poppy OrangeLacrylby Spraylat." Translucent Orange  Cabh, sideview ZXZXXAluminumAase 10-18RFler RT200Retainer 2X3SenipeDor  A  SGNAGEPROPOSAL  2X2XXAuminumAngle (Weldtolnside Cabinet) 2X2XV-SlelAnge RT200F Retainer 10-118RFiller Extrudedaluminum TeFlorescenthmpsont 12'centers Aluminumv wireway Ballast,Mtd. Min.12'upFrom BatomdfCabnetbFIsiNg, Hole  Red Bluff, CA  mnection Details n.t.s. Bh SABMASSOCIATES INC. 2727 N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  UHAUL Signagel Proposal RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET01  02024A ALLI RIGHTS Packet Pg. 260    3.a  U-HAUL  UBOX MOVING CONTAINERS  Bn SABMASSOCIATES INC. 2727 N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  UHAUL Southwest Rendering RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET02  02024A ALL RIGHTS Packet Pg. 261    3.a  UHAUL CENTER  CUIMATE CONTROLLED SELF-STORAGE  SEFSTORAGE  DHAUE Den, MOVING CONTANERS  :    -  ai o SABMASSOCIATES INC. 2727 N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  UHAUL Northeast Rendering RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET03  02024 ALL RIGHTS Packet Pg. 262    3.a  <6)  TOF PARAPET 42'-6 ROO LOW'SIDE  HIGHSIDE  CLIMATE CONTROLLED SELF-STORAGE  UHAUL CENTER  PHAUL U-BoX MOVING CONTAINERS  EAST ELEVATION BLDG.J Scale: 1"=20'  FFE.  47-2 TOPOF PARAPET TOPOFROOF LOWSIDE  HIGHSIDE  UHAUL CENTER  SOUTH ELEVATION- - BLDG.J Scale: 1"=20'  1STFLOOF FF.E.  SIGN CALCULATIONS  1DMENSIONAL LETTERS 9.10'WX1 1.5'H(13.65 SQFT)BIKF PN:6 62818-1 120 NON-LIT CABINET SIGN 11. 19'H(109. .82 SQFT), Planert 2 DIMENSIONALI LETTERS 14. 43WX1 1.5/H(21.65 SQFT)BIk PN: 62818-1 134 6 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS 11.23WX2H/224 46 SQFT),PN:628184 -634 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS 26.9'WX2.5H (53.8SQFD)BIK PN:62818- 094 7 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS 18:26WX2H/36.52: SOFDPN62818-606 NON-LIT CABINET SGN9EBWX38HBB75 SQFT). John Planert 8 LITCABINET SIGN 12'WX7'H(84: SOFDPN62854-064 (center)  ai o SARMASSOCIATES, INC. 2727 N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  "Litsignoptionis available uponn request  *Signp permits arer required. Before ordering your signage, work withy yourl locals sign company top permit the UHAUL Sign Calculations proposedI layout-as signv variancer may ber required. Contact. John Planert, Ext. 516701, fora assistance. *Signs withp partr numbers cant be orderedf from UHIF Purchasing> order procesing@uhaul.com  RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET 04  02024 ALLI RIGHTS Packet Pg. 263    664  3.a  471-2 TOPO PARAPET  PHAUL L-BOX MOVING CONTAINERS  PARAI 8'-6" POFF ROOF LOWSIDE FFE. FLOOR  WEST ELEVATION BLDG.J Scale: 1"=20'  45'- HIGHSIDE  CLIMATE CONTROLLED SELF-STORAGE  LOW'SIDE  FF.E.  NORTH ELEVATION-BLDG. Scale: 1"=2 20"  SIGN CALCULATIONS  1DMENSIONAL LETTERS 9.10'WX1 1.5'H(13.65 SQFT)BIKF PN:6 62818-1 120 NON-LIT CABINET SIGN 11. 19'H(109. .82 2 DIMENSIONALI LETTERS 14. 43WX1 1.5'H(21.65 SQFT)BIK PN: 62818-1 134 6 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS 11.23WX2H/224 46 SQFT)PN:6 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS 26.9'WX2.5H (53.8SQFD)BIK PN:62818- 094 7 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS 18:26WX2H/36.52: SQFT)PN:6281 606 NON-LIT CABINET SIGN968WX38H067 .71 SQFT). John Planert 8 LITCABINET SIGN 12'WX7'H(84: SQFT) PN62854-C -064 (center)  ai o SARMASSOCIATES, INC. 2727 N. CENTRAL AVENUE PHOENIX, ARIZONA 85004 P:602.263.6841  "Litsign optionis available uponr request  *Signp permits arer required. Before ordering your signage, work withy yourl locals sign company top permit the UHAUL Sign Calculations proposedI layout-as signv variancer may ber required. Contact. John Planert, Ext. 516701, fora assistance. *Signs withp partr numbers cant be orderedf from UHIF Purchasing> order procesing@uhaul.com  RedBluff RedBluff,CA (719029) SHEET 05  02024A ALL RIGHTSF RESERVED 2024-08-23  Packet Pg.26    3.b  U-Haul Expansion DR-2024-06  ProjectLocation  SmmpPanaues  noldayinnExp Suites  Google  Packet Pg. 265    ROLEDCURB PERIYLINE FRESERVICE (E)STORMDRAIN SANITARYSEWER  ORAGE  EREEPRESES  BUSINESSS SIMANST)  DU ULDER W/T THICKENDEDGE  RAPHIC SCALE  PAVEMENTSECTION  REVISIONS  REDE BLUFF UHAULE EXPANSION STORAGE FACILITY SITE PLAN  SHEET C2.0 PG40F12 PacketP .266  RAWING  PACE ENGINEERING  PERMIT SET    4  AGENDA REPORT  B  ORNIA:  TO: FROM:  Honorable Members of the Planning Commission Beth Lindauer, Community Development Director  SUBJECT: Use Permit UP-2024-03 Historic Chinatown Markers and Maintenance  Agreement  RECOMMENDED COUNCIL ACTION:  1. Conduct Public Hearing and consider all testimonies. Use Permit and Maintenance Agreement to the City Council.  2. Consider and adopt Resolution 07-2024 recommending the approval of UP-2024-03  SUMMARY:  Helen and Joe Chew Foundation has applied for a Use Permit for a grant-funded project toi install (11)informational sidewalk makers in various locations throughout the historic  Chinatown area of Red Bluff. (Attachment A) PREVIOUS COUNCIL ACTION:  On September 17, 2024, the City Council adopted Resolution 27-2024, waiving the  associated fees for applying for this Use Permit.  DISCUSSION:  On behalf of the Helen and Joe Chew Foundation, Jessica Chew has submitted a request to the City of Red Bluff for consideration and cooperation in installing eleven (11)information sidewalk markers. The markers will be located at various locations on Rio Street, Hickory Street, and Walnut Street in the Chinatown Historic area of downtown. The Use Permit Application is accompanied by a request to consider and approve a Maintenance Agreement between the Foundation and the City of Red Bluff The project's primary goal is to serve the community and promote its historical and cultural significance. The foundation believes that these historical markers will enhance the city's cultural identity and attract visitors who are interested in local history  for the lifetime of the markers (Attachment B).  (Attachment C). STAFF ANALYSIS:  The Technical Advisory Committee, in collaboration with the City Attorney, advises the Planning Commission to recommend approval to the City Council for the granting of a Conditional Use Permit and Maintenance Agreement for the proposed project outlined  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*  Packet Pg. 267    4  in Resolution 07-2024. CITY FISCAL IMPACT:  Use permit fees waived from previous Council action totaling $1,696.00.  CEQA:  This project has no identified adverse effects and meets the California Environmental  Quality Act guidelines as Categorically exempt.  ATTACHMENTS:  A. Attachment A - 092524 Chinatown PLANS R2 B. Attachment B - MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT PC DRAFT C.A Attachment C -Overview Markers  *The City of Red Bluff is an Equal Opportunity Provider*  Packet Pg. 268    4a  HISTORIC CHINATOWN MARKERS MULTIPLE LOCATIONS ALONG RIO, HICKORY & WALNUT STREETS APNs: 029-383-001, 029-384-001, 029-383-003, 029-371-001  RED BLUFF, CA 96080  STREET  PINE STREET  NOTE: ALL IMPROVEMENTS SHALL BE TO THE CITYOFRED BLUFF "LAND DIVISIONA ANDE ENGINEERINGI DESIGN STANDARDS" UNLESS APPROVED VIAA PRIOR TOI ISSUANCE OF PERMIT.  PLOT PLAN SCALE: "-60-0"  SHEET INDEX: DETAILEDS PLAN SIGNAGE IMAGERFOOTINGD DETAIL  T1    4a  MING  2-0A DJEVEFAN  2IRE  DETAIL - MARKERS 1,2,3,4,8 SCALE: 3/32"-1'-0"  CAUOSMDCANFDD  STREET  DETAIL MARKER 10 SCALE: 3/32"-1-0"  DETAIL MARKER 9 SCALE: 3/32"-1-0"  T2  M    4a  STREET  OYSTERKNC  PARKING LOT  TYP. SIGNAGE POLE FOOTING NOSCALE STANDARD FRAME  VACKERSI  DETAIL MARKERS 5,6,7 SCALE: 3/32"-1-0"  ALL MARKERS EXCLUDING MARKER 8 STANDARDI UPRIGHT MOUNTI  WALNUTSTREET  VACKERSIGN  DETAIL MARKER 11 SCALE: 3/32"-1-0"  T3  MARKER 8 ONLY  271    4.b  MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT  This MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT (the "Agreement"), is effective as of  (the  "Effective Date"), by and between The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation a nonprofit, and' The  City of Red Bluff. Background  A. The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation is engaged ini the business of providing one time outdoor markers for the purposes of historical information regarding the Chinese  American community. the outdoor markers.  B. The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation has received a one-time grant to fund C. The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation has requested that the outdoor markers is installed at historically significant locations with respectto thel Historic Chinatown Alley  street signs as provided herein.  D. The City of Red Bluffi is willing to permit the outdoor markers as agreed upon  byt the terms and conditions setforth herein.  NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the promises and covenants set forth herein, and intending to be legally bound hereby, the parties hereto agree as follows:  1.  Outdoor markers Services.  1.1 The City of Red Bluff represents that it owns, or otherwise has rights to permit the outdoor markers. Adjoining property owners are responsible for sidewalk maintenance and 1.2 The City of Red Bluff agrees to cooperate on a suitable location for the outdoor markers procured by The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation. In addition, the Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation shall provide all services and paperwork necessary, as set forth herein. 1.3 The City of Red Bluff shall not be responsible for damage or destruction of such outdoor markers. If there is any damage or destruction, The City of Red Bluff shall notify The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation in writing thereof within twenty-four (24) hours of such  should be consulted priort to placing outdoor markers.  Packet Pg. 272    4.b  awareness. The City of Red Bluff shall provide The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation with 1.4 The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation will assume full responsibility for securing grant funding based upon availability of funds andi the handling of ordering any  such documentation regarding the damage and/or destruction.  replacement outdoor markers.  1.5 During the term of this Agreement, and until the returned or total destruction of such outdoor markers in accordance with this Agreement, the outdoor markers shall remain outdoor and accessible to the general public and shall not be moved or removed without The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundations prior written notification, unless int the event of a public emergency or presentation of public hazard. The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation shall clearly identify the outdoor markers as being the property of the Helen 1.6 The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation shall keep the outdoor markers free and clear 1.7 The outdoor markers shall at all times be and remain the sole and exclusive personal property of The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation, and The City of Red Bluff shall have no right, title or interest therein or thereto, unless forfeited as per the Agreement.  and. Joe Chew Foundation.  of all liens, securityinterests, mortgages, and pledges of any kind.  2.  Return and Delivery of the Outdoor markers.  2.1 The Helen and Joe Foundation may request that the City of Red Bluff may make available any removed outdoor markers to the Helen and Joe Foundation. Anyremoved outdoormarkers can be reclaimed at the City of Red Bluff Corporation yard duringr normal business hours. Any removed ànd stored outdoor markers are subject to City of Red Bluff labor reimbursement at the currentfully burdened rate. If outdoor markers are not reclaimed by the Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation within 30 days of providing notice to the Foundation, removed outdoormarkers shall considered forfeited and be disposed of.  3.  Compensation and Payment. The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation are solely responsible for all costs associated with the permitting, installation, maintenance, and removal of outdoor markers, unless modified through official action by the City of Red Bluff  City Council except as set forth in Exhibit A hereto.  4.  No Additionauspecial Services. No additional or special services shall be performed unless such changes or additionatspecial services and any related cost to The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation are agreed upon by The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation  Packet Pg. 273    4.b  in advance, in writing. Any changes made or additionauspecial services performed by The City of Red Bluff without The Helen and Joe Chew Foundations express written approval shall be deemed unauthorized and at the sole cost and expense of The City of Red Bluff.  5.  Compliance with Laws. The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation shall comply with all federal, state, and local laws, rules, regulations and ordinances (collectively, "Laws") applicable to the outdoor markers hereunder. The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation shall provide The City of Red Bluff with any and all applicable information sheets made available  regarding the outdoor markers.  6.  Liability and Indemnity Matters.  6.1 The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation hereby agrees toindemnify, defend and hold The City of Red Bluff its employees, officers, directors, agents and representatives, harmless from and against all claims, losses, demands, suits, actions, liabilities, costs and expenses (including, but not limited to, clean-up and disposal costs and reasonable attorney's1 fees and court costs) (collectively, "Losses"), arising in favor of any person on account of or as a result of (a) the negligence or willful misconduct of its employees, officers, directors, agents or representatives, (b) the breach of any provision oft this Agreement, or (c) bodilyinjury (including death) and property damage (including loss of use 6.2 The rights and obigationssetfonthi int this Section shall survive anyt termination of  thereof) resulting from ori incidenttothe performance hereunder  this Agreement.  /  7.  Damage or Destruction of Outdoor markers.  Ifthe outdoor markers aret totally destroyed or damaged as to render its substantially unfit for outdoor display, this Agreement may be terminated immediately upon written notice by The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation. Ift the outdoor markers are partially destroyed and necessary repairs can be completed, and grant based funds are available, The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation hereunder shall make its best efforts to replace the outdoor markers. Ifsuch repairs cannot be completed, or are not completed due to no available funding options, The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation will remove the marker, or, at its option, terminate this Agreement upon written notice to The City of Red Bluff. If any removal is required, ori if Agreement is terminated, all outdoor markers shall be removed within 30 calendar days of date of termination with exception to any extensions, at the expense of the Helen and Joe Chew Foundation and each site shall be returned to pre-i installation conditions to the satisfaction of the City of Red Bluff Public' Works Director.  Packet Pg. 274    4.b  8.  Records; Inventory; Audit.  8.1 The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation shall keep accurate records regarding the receipt and information sheets as may be reasonably requested by The City of Red Bluff to provide for adequate procedures. Such records shall include, without limitation: the date,  quantity and type of outdoor markers received.  9. Term; Termination.  9.1 This Agreement shall commence as of the Effective Date hereof and shall continue  until terminated in writing by both parties.  9.2. This Agreement may bei terminated by either party as follows:  9.2.1 Immediately, upon written notice, if the other party becomes insolvent or otherwise unable to payi its debts as they become due, is declared insolvent or bankrupt or files or has filed againstita a petition in bankruptcy, makes any assignment or trust mortgage for the benefit of creditors, or has a receiver, guardian, conservator, trustee in bankruptcy, or similar official appointed by a court of competent, jurisdiction to take charge of all or any 9.2.2 On thirty (30) calendar days prior written notice if the other party isi in default of any term or condition of this Agreement and, upon receipt of such notice from the non- defaulting party, does not cure such defaulty within such 30-calendar day period; 9.2.3 Upon removal of all outdoor markers and written confirmation of termination by The  part of the other party's property;  Helenand. Joe Chew Foundation. 10. Miscellaneous Provisions.  10.1 The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation Representatives. From time to time, The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation shall designate a name of the person or persons who are authorized to acti for The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation hereunder, and The City of Red Bluff shall direct communications to, and take direction solely from, such authorized 10.2. No Third Party Beneficiary Rights. Except as expressly set forth int this Agreement, nothing ini this Agreement isi intended to create, or shall be construed as creating, third  person(s).  party beneficiary rights in any third party.  Packet Pg. 275    4.b  10.3. No Waiver of Defaults. No failure by either party at any time, or from time to time, to enforce any of the terms or conditions of this Agreement shall constitute a waiver thereof ori in any wayi impair such party's right at any time to avail itself of such remedies as it may have to enforce such terms or conditions. No waiver by either party hereunder will be 10.4 Remedies Cumulative. Except to the extent expressly provided otherwise herein, all of the rights and remedies available to the parties under this Agreement are in addition to, and not in limitation of, the rights and remedies otherwise available at law orin equity. 10.5 Binding Effect; Assignment. This Agreement shalli inure to the benefit of, and be binding upon and enforceable by, the parties hereto and their respective successors and permitted assigns. The City of Red Bluff agrees that it shall not assign or otherwise transfer any ofi its rights or obligations under this Agreement, except with the prior written consent of The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation, and any purported assignment made without such 10.6 Status as Independent. The City of Red Bluffacknowledges and agrees that this Agreement is noti intended to create a partnership orj joint venture between The City of Red Bluff and The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation, and neither any of its employees, agents or representatives shall havei the authority toi incur any obligations, contractual or otherwise, orn make any representations or warranties, for ori in the name ofT The Helen and Joe Chew Foundation. The City of Red Bluff shall not be entitled to any benefits accorded to The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundationincluding: without limitation, worker's compensation, unemployment insurance, medical or disabilityinsurance, vacation or sick pay. The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation. shall be responsible for providing, at its expense, all licenses or permtsnecessarytor. performing the outdoor markers services hereunder. 10.7 Notices. All formal notices or communications required or permitted under this Agreement shall be in writingto the addresses as provided in this Agreement and shall be hand delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, return receipt requested, orb bytelecopier (provided that a confirming copyi is sent by recognized overnight courier) or by recognized overnight courier, to the intended recipient at the address and attention designated on the signature page hereof or to such other address or attention as the recipient may have designated in a written notice given pursuant to this Section. Any such notice or communication shall be effective upon the earlier of actual receipt or deemed delivery. Delivery: shall be deemed to have occurred as follows: if hand delivered, on the day sO delivered; if mailed, three business days after the date SO mailed; if telecopied, upon written confirmation by the sending machine of effective transmission or upon telephone confirmation of receipt; and if sent by recognized overnight tcourier, the  effective unless in writing and signed by such party.  consent shall be null and void.  next business day.  Packet Pg. 276    4.b  10.8 GOVERNING LAW/VENUE. THISAGREEMENT WILL BE GOVERNED BY, AND CONSTRUED AND INTERPRETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH, THE LAWS OFTHE: STATE OF CALIFORNIA, ANY DISPUTE ARISING FROMTHIS. AGREEMENT SHALL BE HEARD INA COURT OFCOMPEIENT/AREDCTON IN THE COUNTY OFTEHAMA. 10.9 Entire Agreement; Modification. This Agreement contains the entire agreement between the parties regarding the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior proposals, agreements, understandings and representations, whether written or oral, with respect thereto. No waiver, alteration or modification of any of the provisions or attachments to this Agreement shall be binding on any party unless in writing and signed by the party againstwhom enforcement of such waiver, alteration, or modification is sought.  INWITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be  executed by their duly authorized representatives.  By:  By:  Name: Title: Mailing Address:  Name: Title: Mailing Address: City Of Red Bluff 555 Washington Street Red Bluff, CA 96080  Packet Pg. 277    4.b  EXHIBITA  Planning Application Fee: waived Permit Fee: waived Payment Terms: NOTAPPLICABLE  Packet Pg. 278    4.b  EXHIBITB  One-time Grant: Awarded  The Helen and. Joe Chew Foundation has received a one-time grant for the purpose oft the purchase of durable equipment or building-related projects int thei following areas: arts & culture, recreation, environment, communityvitality, social services, health care, children/youth & education. The funding was received from the McConnell Fund of Community Foundation oft the North State established in 2001. The McConnell Foundation is a private, independent foundation whose mission is to help build better communities through philanthropy. The McConnell Foundation's directors chose the Community Foundation as ai funding partner because of its connection and widespread involvement in the communities they serve and to give communityle leaders the opportunity to be actively  involved in local grant making.  Grant Restrictions: Grants proceeds arer not permitted to be used for:  administrativeloperating/program expenses including personnel costs and items essential government service equipmentrequired of a public organization and its Permanent improvements. tol buildings or land not owned by the applicant organization (for building or land-related projects with permanent improvements, the applicant org (a 501c3 or public entity) should own the building or land. Ift the ouilding/land is leased, requested grant items should be removable should the reimbursements (costs incurred prior to signing of awarded grant contract);  consumable in nature;  services given its association with gov'tagencies);  organization's! location change; building/land purchase; leases or leased equipment; planning costs; budget deficits; individuals;  equipment that will be: stored at personal residences;  endowment funds or annual fund drives; sectarian religious purposes;  organizations with past-due report(s) to the Community Foundation;  Packet Pg. 279    4.b  Non-allowable costs may also include (but aren't limited to): administrative, operating, or program expenses, including personnel costs (salaries), items consumable in nature (paper, logo swag, etc.), warranties, subscriptions, vehicle registration andi insurance, permits; essential government services (equipment required of a public organization); permanent improvements tol buildings or land not owned by the applicant organization; reimbursement for costs incurred priorto signing of awarded grant contract; budget deficits; equipment that will be stored at personal residences; sectarian religious purposes; planning costs; building/land purchases; leases or leased equpmentendowment funds or annual fund drives;  parking lot paving.  Packet Pg. 280    4.b  EXHIBITC  Standard Angle Mount Frame with Plate:2 24'Hx36'WX0.125 sign panel 45D Degree Angle: for surface mount, black texture powder coat.  Post: 3"x3"x40" Construction: Aluminum Panel: 24"Hx3 36"WTuff panel 0.125" polymetal  Premium Graphic Film: industrial grade cover protective overlaminate applied to  FRAMEMOUNT: STYLE Foru usev withl 1/8" thickr non-s selfs supporting highy pressure laminated or Tuffy panel  Frame willcover! 5/8" perimeter ofs sign! panel. Designaccordingly.  Removablet toprail 1/8"Thickl high pressure laminate of1 Tuff panel 28-32" slidesi intoc channel attop offrame. Frame railv with3 3/16" frame gapfor1 1/8" thicks signy panel  Packet Pg. 281    4.b  EXHIBITD  Placement shall be mutually agreed upon prior toi installation and the parties agree to consider distances from curbs, gutters, sidewalks, drive approaches, landscaping improvements (includingi irrigation), and utilities. The approved locations shall be per EXHIBITE-Historic Chinatown Markers Site Plan" as permitted through the respective City  of Red Bluff Departments.  Placement shall not interfere with pedestrian or ADA access, parking, or vehicular movement, norintroduce sight obstructions for egressing vehicles.  Post shall bei installed using a masonry drill anchors with point screws for drillingi into existing concrete to sufficiently anchor posts orwet-seti into fresh concrete in accordance  with the current California Building Code.  Outdoor markers shall bei installed on agreed upon sidewalks in accordance with the Red  Bluff Municipal Code 12.24.  Inr no event, outdoor markers placement conflicts with existing utilities, improvements, or  potential sight obstruction.  Best Management Practices shall be employed during thei installation process.  Packet Pg. 282    4.b  EXHIBITD See Site Map  Packet Pg. 283    4.c  E - 5  EMOIB  3  OSINUEM  U  9  SAXEI  ISNOE  Packet Pg. 284    4.c  S  9  SINueM  -  Packet Pg. 285    4.c  E  -  - -  Packet Pg. 286    4.c  Packet Pg. 287